Contents/Table
of Index
Preface
Part 1
Three Hundred Trillion Dollars and Counting
Chapter 1
MONEY
1.1
The Money Magicians
1.2 The Banking Cartel
Chapter 2
THE GREAT TRUST
2.1
The Military-Industrial Complex
2.2 Five Monopolies
2.3 Who Owns the Stock?
2.4 Who Owns the Media?
Chapter 3
THE GREAT TRUST AND WESTERN FOREIGN POLICY
3.1
International Relations Policy Groups
3.2 Tax Exempt
Foundations and Charity Funding
3.3 The IMF and World
Bank
3.4 Control over Western
Governments
Chapter 4
COMMUNISM AND FASCISM
4.1
The Heart of the Issue: Power and Property Rights
4.2 Lessons From History
Chapter 5
LESSER DEVELOPED COUNTRIES
5.1
Empowering Third World Governments
5.2
The Sell Off
Chapter 6
PRIVATISATION IN THE WEST
6.1
Public Private Partnership
6.2 The Policy Comes
from the Top
Part 2
The Art of Killing Quietly
Chapter 7
THE ECONOMY
7.1
The Function of Poverty
7.2 Monetary and Fiscal
Policy
7.3 Free Trade
Agreements
7.4 Open Borders
7.5 The Environmental
Movement
7.6 War as a Means of
Planned Waste
7.7 Criminalizing
Society
7.8 Disease
Chapter 8
THE NEW POLITICAL SYSTEM
8.1
The Future of Democracy
8.2 Banning Opposition
to World Government
8.3 Creating Regional
Governments
8.4 World Government or
World War Three
Chapter 9
THE WAR ON TERROR
9.1
CIA/MI6/Mossad/ISI: The Global Terrorist Network
9.2 Proliferating
Weapons of Mass Destruction
Chapter 10
MARTIAL LAW
10.1
Martial Law Legislation
10.2 Foreign Troops
10.3
Gun Confiscation
Chapter 11
THE LEGAL APPARATUS OF TOTALITARIANISM
11.1
Integration
11.2 UK Mental Health
Laws
11.3
Abolition of Juries and Arbitrary Detention
11.4 Expanding the
Definition of 'Terrorism'
11.5 Surveillance
Legislation
11.6 The Ruling Class
Above the Law
Chapter 12
THE TECHNOLOGICAL APPARATUS OF TOTALITARIANISM
12.1 ID Cards and Biometric Identification
12.2 Computer Databases
12.3 DNA Databases
12.4 Implantable
Microchips
12.5 Radio Frequency
Identification
12.6 Car and Mobile
Phone Tracking
12.7 Surveillance
Cameras
12.8 Black Budget
Funding
Chapter 13
THE FAMILY
13.1
Elitism and the New Age Religion
13.2 Caught in the Act
at Bohemian Grove
13.3 Targeting the Young
13.4 Banning Monotheism
13.5 Enforcing Love of
Big Brother
13.6 Sexual Abuse
Chapter 14
POPULATION CONTROL
14.1 Funding Population Control
14.2 Aims and Methods
14.3 Environmentalism
14.4 Public Health
Policy and Western Medicine
14.5 Cancer
14.6 Vaccination
14.7 Mind Control
Technology
14.8 Junk Food
14.9 Fluoride
14.10 Germ Warfare
14.11 Depleted Uranium
14.12 Forced Abortion
and Sterilization
14.13 GM Food
14.14 Weather
Modification
14.15 Nanotechnology
14.16 Eugenics
Conclusion
Chapter 1
MONEY
The Western money monopoly is
the central pillar of the New World Order monolith. The ownership and control
of commercial activity by a few European and American families has created the
necessary concentration of financial power to manipulate public policy at all
levels through co-option of politicians, policy institutes, charities,
educational establishments, and media outlets. Maintaining this international
army is a very expensive business, so it is important to understand the source
of its funds.
1.1 THE
MONEY MAGICIANS
I am afraid that the ordinary
citizen will not like to be told that the banks can and do create money... And
they who control the credit of the nation direct the policy of Governments and
hold in the hollow of their hands the destiny of the people
- Reginald McKenna speaking to
stockholders as Chairman of the Board of Midland Bank in January 1924.(1)
G. Edward Griffin's book The
Creature from Jekyll Island is the source for the following explanation(2) - a benchmark publication on the
subject of banking and the New World Order.
Western banks create money
through a fractional-reserve lending system. Central banks lend money to
governments to make up for the deficit in taxation receipts. The banks print
money out of nothing and receive interest bearing government bonds in return.
These bonds are called "securities" because they are backed by the
full credit and integrity of taxpayers who pay back the loans through taxation.
Eventually every pound or
dollar borrowed passes through the current accounts and savings accounts
operated by commercial banks. Under the rules of fractional-reserve banking,
for the purpose of lending money, the commercial banker is allowed to print nine
more pounds or dollars than he holds on deposit, or what ever ratio the central
bank decides. He pays savers a modest rate of interest and charges borrowers a
much higher rate on up to ten times the amount. His only costs are his
buildings, employees, and book-keeping. The only risk he takes is an accounting
risk if too many loans go into default at once. However, if he gets into
serious trouble the central bank will come running to his aid with more money
printed out of nothing.
Looking for the equity in
this system is fruitless. Every penny and cent in circulation requires interest
payment to the money powers because money is debt. Hundreds of billions
of dollars world-wide are paid in interest every year to men who print money
out of nothing.
A frequently asked question
is, 'where does the money come from to pay the interest on the loan?' Quite
simply there is none. Interest payments are serviced by payment in kind -
through labour. This is a game of musical chairs where the money keeps on circulating
between creditors and debtors. The profits from the banks are used by their
shareholders to buy goods and services, passing the money to the workers to
pay back the capital and the interest. If the game of musical chairs ever
stopped there wouldn't be enough money in circulation to repay a penny or cent
of interest. But the game is designed to go on forever.
Having said all this,
the bankers are permanently and necessarily interposed between parties in the
market place, allowing us to trade goods and services for money. But they
charge a high price for their services, as many Third World nations have found
out, and have become fantastically wealthy as a result. The problem of this
money monopoly is as much a political one as an economic one.
1.2 THE
BANKING CARTEL
The
monopoly underlying all other monopolies is the banking cartel. The wealth of
the Rothschild dynasty in the nineteenth century was legendary. In building the
mightiest private bank the world has ever seen, the Rothschilds amassed the
largest private fortune in the history of capitalism. Since 1919, the world
gold price has been fixed daily at the office of N.M. Rothschild & Sons in
London. However, before World War I the European and American money powers had
already formed a lasting partnership. Potential competitors on Wall Street,
which included European banking houses, decided that they could reduce
competition from the provincial banks and achieve higher profits if only they
had a functional central bank like those in Europe and cooperated in printing
America's money.(4)
A central bank is
a private cartel enforced by the police power of government. Created in 1913,
the Federal Reserve 'System' was designed to benefit the most powerful New York
banks, halting the loss of business to the hundreds of smaller banks in the
southern and western states. The system appeared to distribute power equally
between the twelve regional branches but in reality, it gave power to the New
York branch controlled by The Money Trust on Wall Street.(5) The Jekyll Island Plan for the
Federal Reserve Act was drawn up by the five biggest banking houses in Europe
and America: Rothschild, Rockefeller, Morgan, Warburg and Kuhn Loeb.(6) It's chief architect was Paul
Warburg of the German and Swiss banking house who moved to America only nine
years earlier. He brought with him all the experience of European central
banking. His brother Max Warburg was financial adviser to the Kaiser and later
Director of Germany's central bank, The Reichsbank.(7) Paul Warburg's Wall Street banking
operation was a partnership with the Rothschilds in Kuhn Loeb & Co..
After
working together to create the 'Fed', the members of the cartel devised the
acceptance market which powered up their newly created money printing press.
Through the 1920s the acceptance market created over half of all the money
printed by the Fed.(8)
Since then,
the agents of the private commercial banks, who sit on the boards of the
central banks throughout the world, have worked together to formulate
international monetary policy. In 1966, Bill Clinton's mentor at Georgetown
University, Professor Carroll Quigley, described the system in his book Tragedy
and Hope: (9)
The
substantive financial powers of the world were in the hands of these investment
bankers... who remained largely behind the scenes in their own unincorporated
private banks. These formed a system of international co-operation and national
dominance which was more private, more powerful and more secret than that of
their agents in the central banks... In addition to these pragmatic goals, the
powers of financial capitalism had another far reaching aim, nothing less than
to create a world system of financial control in private hands able to dominate
the political system of each country and the economy of the world as a whole.
This system was to be controlled in a feudalistic fashion by the central banks
of the world acting in concert, by secret agreements arrived at infrequent
private meetings and conferences. The apex of this system was to be the Bank
for International Settlements in Basle, Switzerland, a private bank owned and
controlled by the world's central banks which were themselves private
corporations...
The
international nature of the cartel was evidenced during the 1920s when the
Governor of the New York Federal Reserve Bank, Benjamin Strong, worked with
Montague Norman, the Governor of the Bank of England, to assist the economy of
Great Britain at the expense of American investors. Increasing the U.S. money
supply contributed to a massive speculative boom in the stock market and the
Wall Street Crash in 1929.(10)
Woodrow Wilson was the
U.S. President when the Fed was created. In his book The New Freedom he
commented on the centralization of banking power:
Since
I entered politics, I have chiefly had men's views confided to me privately.
Some of the biggest men in the United States, in the field of commerce and
manufacturing are afraid of somebody, afraid of something. They know that there
is a power somewhere so organized, so subtle, so watchful, so interlocking, so
complete, so pervasive that they had better not speak above their breath when
they speak in condemnation of it.(11)
In July 2003 it
was mentioned in the news that the Rothschild international investment banking
group is controlled by a parent company called Rothschild Continuation Holdings
A.G., located in Switzerland. Far from being competing factions, the English
and French Rothschilds have worked out a deal merging control of their
respective banking houses by forming a new holding company, Concordia B.V..(12)
It is these
family run private banks which continue to coordinate central bank policy. On
28 June 1998, The Washington Post published an article about the Bank
for International Settlements describing how "this economic cabal.... this
secretive group... the financial powers who control the world's supply of
money" shape the world's economy.(13)
The next
chapter asks the question, 'who today really has all the money
and where is it invested?'. This is not possible to answer with satisfactory
precision but there are some good indicators that provide much food for
thought.
Chapter 1
End Notes
1. Carroll Quigley, Tragedy
and Hope: A History of the World in Our Time, The Macmillan Company, New
York, 1966, p.325
2. G. Edward Griffin, The
Creature from Jekyll Island, American Media, Fourth Edition, 2002,
3. Transcript of Jeremy Paxman's Newsnight
interview with Tony Blair,4th June 2001. BBC news on-line.
See http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/events/newsnight/1372220.stm
4. Ibid., p.437
5. Ibid., p.473
6. Ibid., p.12
7. Ibid., p.18
8. Ibid., p.482
9. Quigley, op cit., pp. 324,
326-327
10. Griffin op cit., pp.
474-475
11. Globalization,
Robert Gaylon Ross Sr. See http://www.4rie.com/index.html#Anchor-51540
12. Rothschilds
Continuation Holdings AG: Restructuring,Clarinet News, 9 July 2003. See
http://quickstart.clari.net/qs_se/webnews/wed/de/Brothschilds-continuation.R-J1_Dl9.html
13. Dr. Stanley
Monteith, The Brotherhood of Darkness, Hearthstone Publishing, 2000,
p.33. See http://www.radioliberty.com
Chapter 2
THE GREAT
TRUST
In 1888,
Edward Bellamy wrote a book entitled Looking Backward: 2000-1887 in
which he predicted the future exactly as it happened:
The
nation... organized as the one great business corporation in which all other
corporations were absorbed; it became the one capitalist in the place of all
other capitalists... the final monopoly in which all previous and lesser
monopolies were swallowed up... The epoch of trusts had ended in The Great
Trust.(1)
2.1 THE MILITARY-INDUSTRIAL COMPLEX
The bankers have invested their vast fortunes in
every branch of commerce, cementing monopolies with interlocking shareholdings
and directorships. In John D. Rockefeller's immortal phrase "competition
is a sin."
The establishment of the
European-American petrochemical cartel was achieved in 1929 with the marriage
of I.G. Farben of Germany to I.C.I. and Shell Oil of Great Britain, and to
Standard Oil and DuPont of America.(2) The cartel was formed after I.G.
Farben discovered how to make petroleum out of coal. I.G. agreed not to enter
the petroleum market so long as Standard Oil did not enter the chemical
industry unless as a partner with Farben. By the beginning of WWII, Farben had
become the largest industrial enterprise in Europe, the largest chemical
company in the world, and part of the most powerful cartel in history. Besides
the afore-mentioned companies, it had cartel agreements with 2000 companies
around the world including Ford Motor Co, Alcoa, General Motors, Texaco,
Proctor and Gamble, and virtually every enterprise that involved chemicals.
Hermann Schmitz, president of
Bayer A.G and I.G. Farben during WWII, who also largely directed the Deutsche
Bank, held a substantial amount of stock in Standard Oil of New Jersey.(3) G. Edward Griffin's investigation
into the cancer industry found that the cartel agreement signed between
Standard Oil and Farben on 9 November 1929 involved the exchange of some of
Farben's patent rights over the coal-hydrogenation process for $30,000,000 of
Standard's stock. The Rockefeller group concealed its Farben holdings in false
fronts and dummy accounts and when Farben's vast holdings were finally sold in
1962, the Rockefellers were the dominant force in carrying out the transaction.(4) Paul Warburg, another
founding member of the Wall St. banking cartel, was also a director of several
Farben subsidiaries.(5)
A cartel is a grouping of
companies that are bound together by contracts or agreements designed to
promote inter-company cooperation and thereby reduce competition between them.
Some of these agreements may deal with harmless subjects such as industry
standards and nomenclature. But most of them involve the exchange of patent
rights, the dividing of regional markets, the setting of prices, and agreements
not to enter into product competition within specific categories.(6) In 1937, Fortune magazine
editorialized:
By and large, the chemical
industry has regulated itself in a manner that would please even a Soviet
Commissar... The industry...is... the practitioner of one definite sort of
planned economy.
In 1973, the United States
Tariff Commission observed:
In the largest and most
sophisticated multinational corporations, planning and subsequent monitoring of
plan fulfillment have reached a scope and level of detail that, ironically,
resemble more than superficially the national planning procedures of Communist
countries.
Far from the money powers
fighting for free-markets and against government regulation, the exact opposite
is true. Giant cartels use government regulation and anti-trust laws to break
up smaller cartels or to prevent competitors entering into the market. The
ultimate objective is a feudal 'comand and control' society in which the
corporations use government to diminish our freedoms.
2.2 FIVE
MONOPOLIES
Corpororate monopolies over
water, food, energy, medicine, and information, are just some manifestations of
The Great Trust today.
The explosive growth of three
private water utility companies in the last 10 years raises fears that mankind
may be losing control of its most vital resource to a handful of monopolistic
corporations. In Europe and North America, analysts predict that within the
next 15 years these companies will control 65 percent to 75 percent of what are
now public waterworks. The companies have worked closely with the World Bank
and other international financial institutions to gain a foothold on every
continent. A yearlong investigation by the International Consortium of
Investigative Journalists (ICIJ), a project of the Center for Public Integrity,(7) found that world's
three largest water companies - France's Suez and Vivendi Environnement, and
British-based Thames Water owned by Germany's RWE AG - have expanded into every
region of the world since 1990. Three other companies, Saur of France, and
United Utilities of England working in conjunction with Bechtel of the United
States, have also successfully secured major international drinking water
contracts. But their size pales in comparison to that of the big three. The
water companies are chasing a business with potential annual revenue estimated
at anywhere from $400 billion to $3 trillion.(8)
In 2002, the American retailer
Wal-Mart was the biggest company in the world, with turnover of $219 billion
ahead of Exxon at $191 billion and General Motors at $177 billion. Five
retailers- Wal-Mart, Safeway, Kroger, Albertson's and Ahold- take 33% of
American grocery sales.(9) In the U.K. there is even more
consolidation: 60-75% of groceries are purchased in the top 5 supermarkets.(10)
The oil industry is dominated
by five companies: ( In order of size) ExxonMobil, Royal Dutch-Shell, British
Petroleum-Amoco, Chevron-Texaco, and TotalFinaElf. Interestingly the recent
Exxon -Mobil merger reunited the two biggest chunks of John D. Rockefeller's
Standard Oil monopoly dismantled by the U.S. government 90 years ago.
Mobil was Standard Oil of New York and Exxon was Standard Oil of New Jersey. (11)(12)
The world's drug industry is
dominated by 10 companies whose total market value at the time of writing
exceeded (U.S.) $ 1.1 trillion.(13)
Rank in (U.S.) $ billion:
Pfizer $244
Johnson and Johnson $161
Merck $124
GlaxoSmithKline $119
Novartis $113
Amgen $83
Roche $ 72
AstraZeneca $70
Eli Lilly $ 67
Wyeth $58
In 1985, there were 50
substantial media conglomerates in the U.S. By Year 2000 there were six: AOL
Time Warner, The Walt Disney Company, Bertelsmann A. G, Viacom,
Newscorporation, and Vivendi Universal. Vivendi Universal is the parent company
of Vivendi Environment, the water conglomerate. Recently legal rulings in
Europe clearly indicate that there is more trans-Atlantic consolidation to
come. The London Financial Times reported on 21 July 03:
The passage into law of the
Communications Bill closes a turbulent chapter in the history of UK
media...allowed the lifting of the bar on investments in ITV or Channel Five by
non-European interests, the largest of which are US media conglomerates... the
bill is, by international standards, extremely liberal on ownership but highly
structured for content regulation, to be applied by Ofcom, the new media
regulator. (14)
This followed a European
Court of Justice ruling in favour of mergers and acquisitions. On 4 June 2002,
the BBC reported that the European Court of Justice (ECJ) ruled that
restrictions by some European governments on foreign ownership of privatized
companies are illegal. The decision makes it more difficult for governments to
block foreign investment in former state-owned firms on national interest
grounds, paving the way for more cross-border takeovers and mergers. The
decision has also boosted a planned overhaul of E.U. takeover law aimed at
making it easier for firms to launch cross-border mergers and acquisitions. The
reform is an important element of E.U. plans to create a single European market
for investment services by 2005.(15)
2.3 WHO
OWNS THE STOCK?
A recent article in the London Financial Times indicates
why it is impossible to gain an accurate estimate of the wealth of the
trillionaire banking elite. Discussing the sale of Evelyn Rothschild's stake in
Rothschild Continuation Holdings, it states:
..[this] requires agreement
on the valuation of privately held assets whose value has never been tested in
a public market. Most of these assets are held in a complex network of
tax-efficient structures around the world. (16)
Queen Elizabeth II's
shareholdings remain hidden behind Bank of England Nominee accounts. The
Guardian newspaper reported in May 2002
... the reason for the wild
variations in valuations of her private wealth can be pinned on the secrecy
over her portfolio of share investments. This is because her subjects have no
way of knowing through a public register of interests where she, as their head
of state, chooses to invest her money. Unlike the members of the Commons and
now the Lords, the Queen does not have to annually declare her interests and as
a result her subjects cannot question her or know about potential conflicts of
interests... In fact, the Queen even has an extra mechanism to ensure that her
investments remain secret - a nominee company called the Bank of England
Nominees. It has been available for decades to all the world's current heads of
state to allow them anonymity when buying shares. Therefore, when a company
publishes a share register and the Bank of England Nominees is listed, it is
not possible to gauge whether the Queen, President Bush or even Saddam Hussein
is the true shareholder. (17)
By this method, the
trillionaire masters of the universe remain hidden whilst Forbes
magazine poses lower ranking billionaires like Bill Gates and Warren Buffett as
the richest men in the world. Retired management consultant Gaylon Ross Sr,
author of Who's Who of the Global Elite, has been tipped from a private
source that the combined wealth of the Rockefeller family in 1998 was
approximately (U.S.) $11 trillion and the Rothschilds (U.S.) $100 trillion.(18) However something of
an insider's knowledge of the hidden wealth of the elite is contained in the
article, Will the Dollar and America Fall Down on August 19?.." on
page1 of the 12th July 2001 issue of Russian newspaper, Pravda(19). The newspaper interviewed Tatyana
Koryagina, a senior research fellow in the Institute of Macroeconomic
Researches subordinated to the Russian Ministry of Economic Development (Minekonom),
on the subject of a recent conference concerning the fate of the U.S. economy:
Koryagina: The
known history of civilization is merely the visible part of the iceberg. There
is a shadow economy, shadow politics and also a shadow history, known to conspirologists.
There are [unseen] forces acting in the world, unstoppable for [most powerful]
countries and even continents.
Pravda: Just
these forces intend to smash America on August 19?
Koryagina: There
are international "super-state" and "super-government"
groups. In accordance with tradition, the mystical and religious components
play extremely important roles in human history. One must take into account the
shadow economy, shadow politics and the religious component, while predicting
the development of the present financial situation.
Pravda: Still,
I don't understand what could be done to this giant country [the U.S.], whose
budget is calculated in the trillions of dollars.
Koryagina: It
is possible to do anything to the U.S... whose total debt has reached $26
trillion. Generally, the Western economy is at the boiling point now. Shadow
financial activities of $300 trillion are hanging over the planet. At any
moment, they could fall on any stock exchange and cause panic and crash. The
recent crisis in Southeast Asia, which touched Russia, was a rehearsal.
This is a startling
revelation: $300 trillion of wealth is secretly controlled by an unspecified
cabal of the world's richest families.
The power of Rothschild
family was evidenced on 24th September 2002 when a helicopter touched down on
the lawn of Waddedson Manor, their ancestral home in Buckinghamshire, England.
Out of the helicopter strode Warren Buffet, - touted as the second richest man
in the world - and Arnold Schwarzenegger, candidate for the Governorship of
California. They'd come to rub shoulders with James Wolfensohn, President of
the World Bank and Nicky Oppenheimer, Chairman of De Beers at a two day
conference hosted by Jacob Rothschild. Arnold went on to secure the governorship
of one of the biggest economies on the planet a year later. The fact that he
was initiated into the ruling class in the Rothschilds' English country manor
is more evidence of the international nature of the cartel and the location of
its centre of gravity. (20)
2.4 WHO
OWNS THE MEDIA?
The New World Order
would be in serious trouble, if for one day, the mainstream media put the
pieces together and told the whole truth, 'the story behind the story'. Editing
certain news out of the press has been just as important as putting propaganda
in, probably more so. Westerners receive relatively little news about the
atrocities committed in the socialist dictatorships especially in the former
Soviet Union and communist China which continue to this day. The last thing
they want the public to hear on the evening news is the fact that its our
money which has kept these regimes afloat, or to find out who helped them into
power.
In 1917 Congressman
Oscar Callaway told the House that, in 1915 JP Morgan interests and their
subsidiary organizations purchased the editorial policies of the 25 most
important newspapers in the U.S. By controlling the policy of the most
important, they were able to control the general policy of the whole media.
They used this power to turn public opinion in favour of entering the First
World War.(21)
The Rockefellers took over the Morgan empire, and in the 1950s they had one of
their pharmaceutical company directors and publisher of the New York Times,
Arthur Hays Sulzberger, appointed as Director of the Associated Press.
They also owned the trend setting magazines Time, Life, Fortune, and
Newsweek.(22)
Laurance Rockefeller was a director of The Reader's Digest, a barometer
of orthodox thinking, especially on the medical issues in which his family had
enormous financial interests. (23)
Forbes Magazine's recent
bio' of media tycoon, Conrad Black read:
67% ownership in
Ravelston Corp., a privately held company, gives him control of a 78% stake in
Hollinger Inc., a publicly traded Canadian holding company with real estate and
other investments. Hollinger, in turn, owns 32%of the equity and 73% of he voting
control of Hollinger International, the Big Board media company that owns the
newspapers. There is also a hefty dose of debt financing in this chain. Thus
does Black, with a mere $13 million of his own equity money in the till,
control $2 billion in media assets. The assets are impressive: Black's 129
newspapers include the Chicago Sun-Times, the fifth-largest paper in the U.S.;
the Jerusalem Post, with a circulation of 110,000; and the London Daily
Telegraph, which has 40% of the market for national broadsheet newspapers in
the U.K...Directors include such illuminati as Henry Kissinger; former Illinois
Governor James R. Thompson; financier Henry Kravis' wife, Marie-Josée Kravis;
former ambassador to Germany Richard Burt; and Richard Perle, the controversial
member of the Defense Policy Board." (24)
Forbes ranks two media
billionaires, Silvio Berlusconi and Rupert Murdoch, at numbers 3 and 4 in the
world in terms of power and influence even though their wealth is ranked 45 and
54 respectively. Italy's Prime Minister owes much of his influence to
Fininvest, his investment firm that owns 49% of Mediaset, Italy's largest
television network. He also has interests in banking, insurance and publishing.(25) Murdoch's media
empire includes NewsCorporation and its U.K. subsidiary News International,
British Sky Broadcasting Group, Sky Global Networks Inc. and Fox Entertainment
Group. Besides T.V. networks and newspapers, this group also owns the publisher
HarperCollins.(26)(27)
Two sisters
Anne and Barbara Cox own 98% of Cox Enterprises which controls 17 daily
newspapers (including flagship Atlanta Journal-Constitution), 15 TV stations,
78 radio stations and cable systems (6.5 million users). Their personal wealth
is estimated to be $11billion each.(28)Two thirds of Viacom's voting stock
is controlled by Sumner Redstone whose personal wealth is estimated at $9.7
billion.(29)Viacom
now owns CBS, Infinity Broadcasting, Paramount, Nickelodeon, MTV, and
Blockbuster. In 1980 Ted Turner launched America's first 24 hr. cable news
service, CNN. Turner Broadcasting Systems was bought by Time Warner in 1996 but
Turner remains Time Warner's largest individual shareholder (only 1% at June
2003) and sits on its board.(30)
Sir Evelyn de Rothschild used
to sit on the board of The Daily Telegraph (31) and Edouard de
Rothschild bought the controlling stake in French left-wing newspaper, Liberation,
in December 2004. (32)
From July 1999 to March 2002,
The Carlyle Group, an $18 billion private equity firm, held a 40% stake in the
French daily Le Figaro. Carlyle Group investors have included Frank
Carlucci, former U.S. Defense Secretary and Deputy Director of the CIA; the Bin
Laden family; and former heads of state, George Bush Sr. and John Major. In
March 2004, Le Figaro was purchased by Serge Dassault, head of Dassault
Aviation a major military contractor.(33)
However, ownership,
directorship and censorship is not the whole story of media manipulation. Much
of what appears in the press is shaped by the education of journalists and
their sources. The roots of the 'psychological operation' are in the schools,
universities, charities, think-tanks and policy institutes - the subject of the
next chapter.
Chapter 2 End Notes
1. Dr. Stanley Monteith, The
Brotherhood of Darkness, Hearthstone Publishing, 2000, p.15
2. G. Edward Griffin, World
Without Cancer: The Story of Vitamin B17, American Media, second edition
1997, p.183
3. Manning P, Martin Bormann:
Nazi in Exile. Secaucus, NJ: Lyle Stuart, 1981, pp. 29, 56, 69, 116-17;
134-35. see article by Dr Leonard Horowitz at
http://www.lightstreamers.com/horowitz/Solving_The_Anthrax.html
4. G. Edward Griffin, op cit.,p.236
5. G. Edward Griffin, The
Creature from Jekyll Island, American Media, Fourth Edition, 2002, p.482
and Antony C. Sutton, Wall Street and the Rise of Hitler, CSG and
Associates, 1976 p.164
6. Griffin, World Without Cancer,
pp.187-189
7. International Consortium of
Investigative Journalists (ICIJ),The Water Barons, a report for The
Center for Public Integrity, 2003. See http://www.icij.org/water/default.aspx
8. Bill Marsden, Cholera and The
Age of The Water Barons, The Center for Public Integrity, 2003. See http://www.icij.org/water/report.aspx?sid=ch&rid=44&aid=44
9. Impact of Wal-Mart on Retail
Consolidation and Standardization, Infosys Technologies Ltd.
See http://www.infosys.com/knowledge_capital/
thought-papers/WalMart_Impact_on_Retail-Consolidation.pdf
10. What's Wrong With
Supermarkets? CorporateWatch.
See http://www.corporatewatch.org.uk/pages/whats_wrong_suprmkts.htm
11. James A. Paul, Iraq: the
Struggle for Oil , Global Policy Forum, August, 2002 (revised December,
2002). See
http://www.globalpolicy.org/security/oil/2002/08jim.htm#4
12. Jobs slashed at new oil
colossus, BBC news, London, 1 December 1998. See http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/business/the_company_file/222402.stm
13. The 2003 Global Scoreboard,
BusinessWeek Online, November 2003.
See http://bwnt.businessweek.com/global_1000/2003/index.asp?
sortCol=ind_code&sortOrder=ASC&pageNum=19&resultNum=25&country=
14. The United States of
Television, Global Policy Forum.
See http://www.globalpolicy.org/socecon/tncs/mergers/0721tv.htm
15. EU Court Boosts Foreign
Mergers, Global Policy Forum.
See http://www.globalpolicy.org/socecon/tncs/mergers/eucourtmerger.htm
16. French Rothschild is set to
take helm in London, Charles Pretzlik, Banking Editor, The Financial
Times, London, 10 February 2003.
17. Horses, stamps, cars - and an
invisible portfolio, The Guardian, London, 30 May 2002. See
http://www.guardian.co.uk/jubilee/story/0,11550,724327,00.html
18. Robert Gaylon Ross Sr.
See http://www.4rie.com/index.html#Anchor-51540
19. Dr. Alexandr Nemets, Expert:
Russia Knew in Advance, Encouraged Citizens to Cash Out Dollars, Newsmax.com,
17 Sept. 2001. See http://www.newsmax.com/archives/articles/2001/9/16/103951.shtml
20. Arnold and Buffett's Loaded
Elephant Gun? Buffett's Back with the Terminator!, Reuters
24 Sept. 2002 .
See copy at http://www.infowars.com/print/nwo/schwartz_roths.htm
21. Monteith, op cit., p.31
Chapter 3
THE GREAT TRUST AND WESTERN FOREIGN POLICY
There exists behind closed doors, a high command of
policy groups which feed the argument for political globalization. Policies are
passed down the chain of command into the public arena by lavish patronage of
public institutions and key politicians. In discrete pursuit of financial
globalization, they have also advanced the view that the future of mankind is
best served by a transfusion of wealth from the West to lesser developed
countries in the form of foreign aid and bank loans. This chapter identifies
the groups which constitute the Ministry of Truth for International Relations
and the next three reveal how they have miraculously consolidated financial
power in the hands of their members.
3.1
INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS POLICY GROUPS
THE ROUND
TABLE GROUPS
In 1870, John Ruskin,
professor of Fine Arts at Oxford University, inspired a student named Cecil
Rhodes with the dream of uniting the English speaking world under a federal
government. Rhodes went on to become one of the richest men in the world.
Besides the Rhodes Scholarships which provided for American students to study
at Oxford, Rhodes' legacy was the formation of a secret society which professor
Quigley called 'the Milner group'.(1)
Lord Rothschild loaned
£750,000 to assist Rhodes in creating De Beers in 1888. As well as being the
largest shareholder in De Beers, Rothschild was also amongst the 'circle
of initiates' in the Milner group.This clique of British aristocrats invented
the Round Table movement aimed at fostering international government. Two
important Round Table groups were set up after the end of World War I: The
Royal Institute of International Affairs in London, also known as The Chatham
House Study Group founded in 1919; and The Council on Foreign Relations in New
York founded in 1921. The plans for these two groups were drawn up at the 1919
Paris Peace Conference. The RIIA was largely funded by the Astor family, The
Rhodes Trust and certain British banks whilst the CFR was a front for JP Morgan
&Co.(2)
The financial elite have
dominated the Round Table movement ever since. Lord Waldorf Astor was Chairman
of RIIA 1935-1949 (3) and David Rockefeller was CFR
director 1949-1985, Chairman of the board 1970-1985 and vice president
1950-1970. Despite being over 80 years old he is still the honary chairman of
the CFR International Advisory Board.(4) CFR members currently number around
4000 of the most influential people in the United States. All of the major
American news anchors are members of the CFR including Dan Rather, Peter
Jennings, Barbara Walters and Tom Brokaw.(5) Both the Royal Institute of
International Affairs and the CFR have off the record meetings which observe
the Chatham House Rule of secrecy. (6)
THE
TRILATERAL COMMISSION
David Rockefeller founded
another international relations policy making forum in 1973 called the
Trilateral Commission. It is dedicated to fostering closer cooperation between
North America, Europe and Japan.(7) Consisting of the top few hundred
industrialists and policy makers, this semi-secretive organization is far more
exclusive than the CFR.
BILDERBERG
Like Round Table and the
Trilateral Commission, Bilderberg's purpose is to coordinate American and
European foreign policy. The annual Bilderberg meeting of the top 120
European-American movers and shakers is the world's most secretive and
exclusive foreign policy making forum. There are no published minutes and only
recently have the meetings been mentioned in the mainstream press.(8) They normally take place a week or
two before the publicized G8 inter-governmental conferences. Bilderberg was
founded in 1954 by Prince Bernhard of the Netherlands, a card carrying member
of the Nazi SS. Whilst membership appears to change year to year, David
Rockefeller has been spotted several times over the last few years and Dutch
Royalty are regular attendees. Kenneth Clarke, Tony Blair and Peter Mandelson
are just some British Ministers who have attended Bilderberg in recent years.
On the 'official participants
list' from Bilderberg published before the 2002 meeting in Chantilly Virginia,
media personnel included: Kenneth Whyte, National Post (CDN), Tager Sidenfaden,
Editor of Politiken (Germany); Andrea Mitchell, Foreign Affairs correspondent
for NBC ; Charles Krauthammer, columnist Washington Post; Jim Hoagland,
Associate Editor, Washington Post; Paul A Gitot, Wall Street Journal; Conrad
Black, Chairman, Telegraph Group; Jean de Belot, Editor-in-Chief, Le Figaro
(French).(9)
Bilderberg's control over the
mainstream press is evidenced by the fact that on 20th July 1976, London Financial
Times correspondent C. Gordon Tether was finally fired after several
attempts to publish articles about Bilderberg in the Lombard Column
(10)
TRUST ME,
I'M A BILDERBERGER
Unlike Mr Tether, Financial
Times columnist Martin Wolf has been a regular attendee of Bilderberg for
years. Only this year did he publish the fact in the FT, writing an
article on the conference in Versailles in May 2003. Since the meetings are
strictly confidential, we can only assume that Mr Wolf 's suggestion of a rift
in American and European foreign policy is the first ever official - and well
timed - piece of Bilderberg propaganda.(11)
THE CLUB
OF ROME
In addition to these
secretive groups, the elite manage a high-level international think-tank on
environmental issues- The Club of Rome. Its members are one hundred
individuals, at present drawn from 52 countries and five continents.(12) It was founded in
1968 by Dr Aurelio Peccei on behalf of Fiat and Olivetti.(13) With a particular
focus on environmental issues, the group is charged with finding
internationalist solutions to the world's problems. Members have included top
businessmen, notably Canada's environmentalism ambassador and
multi-billionaire, Maurice Strong. Honary members include European royalty and
presidents such as Mikhail Gorbachev, the Red who mysteriously turned Green.
3.2 TAX
EXEMPT FOUNDATIONS AND CHARITY FUNDING
The high command launch
their policies into the public arena on a wave of money that washes over
schools, universities and charitable organizations. In the United States that
wave has been directed at changing the bias of American education away from
individualism towards socialism and internationalism.
The Ford Foundation was
established in 1936 by Henry Ford of Ford Motor Company. In January 2002 its
assets were valued at $13 billion and total grants since 1972 alone total $10.2
billion!(14)
The major Rockefeller family foundations were established by John D.
Rockefeller - the General Education Board in 1903 endowed with $129 million,
and The Rockefeller Foundation in 1913 endowed with $50 million. Total grants
to date by the Rockefeller Foundation are estimated at $ 2 billion.(15) The Rockefeller Brothers Fund was
founded in 1940 and by January 2003 it had given away $574,466,677. RBF merged
with The Charles E. Culpepper Foundation in July 1999.(16) The Carnegie Endowment Fund was
established in 1910 with a $10 million endowment from Andrew Carnegie(17) and became a key
partner of the Rockefeller and Ford foundations in pursuit of a single aim.
That aim became apparent to
The Congressional Special Committee to Investigate Tax-exempt Foundations,
known as the 'Reece Committee', set up in 1952. To their concern, the Committee
discovered that the Rockefeller and Carnegie group of foundations exercised a
very significant degree of control over American schools and universities. In
1954 Norman Dodd was the staff director of the committee. He recorded an
interview with G. Edward Griffin shortly before he died in which he described
how the Carnegie Endowment and the Rockefeller Foundation joined forces after
the end of World War I to use the education system, and the teaching of
American history in particular, to promote internationalism and collectivism.
And when Rowan Gaither, President of the Ford Foundation, met with Mr Dodd he
made an astonishing admission:
Mr. Dodd, all of
us who have a hand in the making of policies here have had experience operating
under directives, the substance of which is that we shall use our grant-making
power so to alter life in the United States that it can be comfortably merged
with the Soviet Union.(18)
3.3 THE
IMF AND WORLD BANK
The establishment of the
United Nations in 1945, only a year after the IMF and World Bank, is some
evidence of the parity of political and financial globalization. Vladimir
Bukovsky, possibly the most famous Soviet dissident after Alexander
Solzhenitsyn, spent twelve years in Soviet prisons and psychiatric hospitals
due to his opposition to communism. He gave his opinion on the U.N. in a recent
interview:
It was meant to serve the
"progressive causes", such as advancement of socialism,
"national liberation", unilateral disarmament of the West, redistribution
of wealth from the "rich North" to the "poor South" or just
plain anti-Western propaganda. (19)
Whilst the U.N. has pursued
that goal through international aid and inter-governmental agencies, its sister
financial organizations have been the key drivers for international socialism
and the first world financial empire. In September 1963, President Kennedy
addressed the annual conference of the IMF/World Bank and described the intent
behind the creation of these institutions:
Twenty years ago, when
the architects of these institutions met to design an international banking
structure, the economic life of the world was polarized in overwhelming, and
even alarming measure on the United States... Sixty percent of the gold
reserves of the world were here... There was a need for redistribution of the
financial resources of the world.. And there was an equal need to organize a
flow of capital to the impoverished countries of the world. All this has come
about. It did not come about by chance but by conscious and deliberate and
responsible planning.(20)
Under the Bretton Woods
agreements, The World Bank was to make loans to under-developed countries and
the IMF was to promote monetary cooperation between nations by maintaining
fixed exchange rates between their currencies. Under the IMF quota system, the
majority of the donated capital to the IMF comes from Western governments,
especially the U.S.. In 1970, the IMF came up with the "SDR " scheme
for increasing quota capital. Special Drawing Rights, which are merely
government promises to pay, increase the quota by 25%.(21) The IMF now has
reserves against which its sister organization the World Bank can obtain loans
from western commercial banks for developing countries. These loans can be
obtained at a very low rate of interest because western governments offer to
bail out the World Bank with "callable capital" if it gets into
trouble. The callable capital is about ten times as much as the quota capital.
Over the last fifty years a torrent of Dollars, Pounds, Francs, Deutsche Marks
and Yen gushed through the World Bank/IMF directly into the hands of foreign
dictators and used to build the one system dictators knew how to build:
Socialism and despotism.(22)
The following chapters show
that what appeared here to be simple foreign investment, was actually laying
down the gangplank for the captains of Western industry and finance to board
the ship, loot it, and sail off into the sunset with most of the Third World's
natural resources and industries. Financial globalization has been achieved
through economic piracy masquerading as international credit.
3.4
CONTROL OVER WESTERN GOVERNMENT
Before the bankers could
channel billions of dollars to foreign dictators and set up inter-governmental
structures, they needed Western politicians who were amenable to their plan. By
controlling policy-making groups, education and the media, the bankers have
helped to make international socialism more politically acceptable than it
otherwise would be. There have also been very significant instances where the
financial elite have selected and sponsored witting servants for the top jobs
in politics to further their globalist aims. For example, Rothschild agent
Colonel Mandell House personally chose Woodrow Wilson - the most unlikely of
all political candidates - and secured his nomination for President on the
Democratic ticket in 1912. It was House who convinced the Morgan group, and
others with power in politics and the media, to throw their support to Wilson,
allowing him to win the election and become the 28th President of the United
States. Under Wilson, the United States got itself a central bank - the Federal
Reserve system - and entered into a World War. Col. House moved into the
Whitehouse with the President for six years and remained his most important
adviser. In his memoirs, President Wilson said,
Mr. House is my second
personality. He is my independent self. His thoughts and mine are one.(23
More recently,
representing the most powerful money families in Europe, Helmut Kohl was the
spearhead for European monetary and political union during his sixteen year tenure
as German Chancellor 1982-1998. Between 1959 and 1969 Helmut Kohl worked for
the 'Verband der Chemischen Industrie' (Association of the Chemical Industry),
the largest lobby organization of the chemical-pharmaceutical industry - the
Rockefeller/I.G. Farben cartel.(24) These interests
systematically promoted Helmut Kohl's political career in order to further
their global expansion plans. Kohl's chancellorship ended in scandal when it
was revealed that he had accepted millions of Deutsche Marks in bribes, the
source of which he refused to disclose.(25)
On 19 September 2000, an
article appeared in The Daily Telegraph by Ambrose Evans-Pritchard which
pullled all this together in just a few paragraphs (26). It began:
DECLASSIFIED American
government documents show that the US intelligence community ran a campaign in
the Fifties and Sixties to build momentum for a united Europe. It funded and
directed the European federalist movement.
The documents confirm
suspicions voiced at the time that America was working aggressively behind the
scenes to push Britain into a European state. One memorandum, dated July 26,
1950, gives instructions for a campaign to promote a fully fledged European
parliament. It is signed by Gen William J Donovan, head of the American wartime
Office of Strategic Services, precursor of the CIA.
The article went on to
describe how the Rockefeller and Ford Foundations set up an organization called
the American Committee for a United Europe in 1948 which was run by CIA chiefs
on their behalf. The documents show that ACUE financed the European Movement,
the most important federalist organization in the post-war years. In 1958, for
example, it provided 53.5 per cent of the movement's funds. Furthermore, the
European Youth Campaign, an arm of the European Movement, was wholly funded and
controlled by Washington. The Belgian director, Baron Boel, received monthly
payments into a special account. The leaders of the European Movement -
Retinger, the visionary Robert Schuman and the former Belgian prime minister
Paul-Henri Spaak - were all treated as hired hands by their American sponsors.
Also,
A memo from the European section, dated June 11, 1965, advises the
vice-president of the European Economic Community, Robert Marjolin, to pursue
monetary union by stealth.
It recommends suppressing
debate until the point at which "adoption of such proposals would become
virtually inescapable".
What the Telegraph article
didn't mention was that all of the OSS-CIA-ACUE principals involved in the
"European federalist movement" - Donovan, Smith, and Dulles - were
also Council on Foreign Relations members (27)
More evidence of
this nature was recently obtained from the secret archives of the Soviet Union.
Prime Minister Yeltsin outlawed the Communist party in 1991 but when he was
challenged in the courts, he needed evidence of its criminal past. He turned to
Vladimir Bukovsky for assistance in finding the evidence in the secret archives
of the Politburo. In 1992, Mr Bukovsky was granted access to the archives for
half a year, and copied as many documents as he could using a portable scanner
and computer. Even the very small proportion of documents copied revealed much
that was embarrassing to both Western and Soviet leaders. Consequently, these
archives - including the documents which Mr Bukovsky still has on his computer-
have been classified again! His 44 page booklet entitled E.U.S.S.R.,
published in December 2004, reveal some truly astonishing facts about the
collapse of the Soviet Union.(28)
By 1987, Gorbachev had
decided that perestroika included the convergence of the U.S.S.R. and Europe
into a "Common European Home". This idea was supported by Europe's
social democrats whose political leaders went in secret to Moscow before the
dissolution of the U.S.S.R. to confirm that the European Community would
include most of the Soviet states. However, behind these political leaders were
the financial elite, in particular the members of the Trilateral Commission.
One of the Politburo documents records a meeting which took place on 18th
January 1989 between Gorbachev and key members of the Trilateral Commission -
Rockefeller, Kissinger, Nakasone and Giscard d'Estaing. They encouraged the
Soviets to integrate into the world's economic and financial institutions
(GATT, IMF) and also into the European Community. Giscard announced that there
would be a European state within twenty years and asked Gorbachev which East
European countries would be allowed to join. Kissinger then asked what the
Soviets thought of the concept of 'Europe from the Atlantic to the
Urals'.
On 19 July 1990, Jacques
Delors, President of The European Commission visited Moscow and confirmed in
secret that he wanted the Soviet Union to be part of the future European state.
However three months before, his close friend and European co-chairman of the
Trilateral Commission, Georges Berthoin had met with Gorbachev's European
advisor, Vadim Zagladin. Berthoin was the ambassador who set out Delors' views
ahead of time. One of the possiblities Delors asked him to discuss was whether
the USA and Japan should also be integrated with Europe and the Soviet Union.
This idea reflected the inter-continental membership of the Trilateral
Commission.
As we near our final
destination of one world government and the New World Order, it's very
important to realize who planned the journey. Why have the richest and most
powerful men in the world done everything possible to conceal what they have
been doing? If we are on the road to utopia, why the need for secrecy?
Chapter 3
End Notes
1. Carroll Quigley, The Anglo
American Establishment, GSC and Associates,1981, ch's 3-5.
See also G Edward Griffin, The Future Is Calling (Part Two) p.5 at
http://www.freedom-force.org/futurecalling2.pdf
2. Quigley op cit.,pp.5-7 and 190-
91; and Griffin, op cit., p.7
3. Quigley, op cit., p.184. See also
Spartacus Educational at
http://www.spartacus.schoolnet.co.uk/PRastor.htm
4. The Council on Foreign Relations
website.
See http://cfr.org/about/board.php
5. Griffin, op cit.
6. Royal Institute of International
Affairs website
http://www.riia.org/index.php?id=14
and CFR website
http://www.cfr.org/about/memberfaq.php
7. The Trilateral Commission website
http://www.trilateral.org/about.htm
8. Emma Jane Kirby, Elite Power
Brokers Secret Meeting, BBC, London, 15 May 2003. See
http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/world/europe/3031717.stm
9. Official Bilderberg press release
and participant list, Chantilly, Virginia, U.S.A., 30 May - 2 June 2002. See http://www.propagandamatrix.com/bilderberg_2002.html
10. The Banned Articles of C.
Gordon Tether, Goodhead News Press - Bicester - 1977 ISBN 0 905821 009. See
http://www.bilderberg.org/bilder.htm#banned
11. Martin Wolf, A Partnership
heading for a Destructive Separation, Financial Times, London, 21
May 2003. See http://www.bilderberg.org/2003.htm#worse
12. The Club of Rome website.
See http://www.clubofrome.org/archive/declaration.php
13. Donella H. Meadows and Dennis L.
Meadows, The Limits To Growth, 1972 Potomac Books, pp.9-10
14. The Ford Foundation website.
See http://www.fordfound.org/about/financial.cfm
15. The Rockefeller Foundation
website.
See http://www.rockfound.org/Documents/180/intro.html
16. The Rockefeller Brothers Fund
website.
See http://www.rbf.org/about/history.html
17. The Carnegie Endowment website.
See http://www.ceip.org/files/about/about_home.asp
18. The Hidden Agenda, An
interview with Norman Dodd conducted by G Edward Griffin. Transcript at
http://store.yahoo.com/realityzone/hiddenagenda2.html
19. Jamie Glazov, A Conversation
With Vladimir Bukovsky, FrontPageMagazine.com, 30 May 2003. See
http://www.frontpagemag.com/Articles/ReadArticle.asp?ID=8132
20. G. Edward Griffin, The
Creature from Jekyll Island, American Media, Fourth Edition, 2002,
pp.109-110
21. What is the International
Monetary Fund ?, IMF.
See http://www.imf.org/external/pubs/ft/exrp/what.htm#where
22. Griffin, op cit., pp.89-95.
23. G. Edward Griffin, The Future
is Calling, part 3.
See http://www.freedom-force.org/futurecalling3.pdf
24. Dr Matthias Rath, The
Pharmaceutical Business with Disease, The Dr Rath Health Foundation. See
http://www4.dr-rath-foundation.org/
PHARMACEUTICAL_BUSINESS/health_movement_against_codex/
health_movement22.htm
http://www4.dr-rathfoundation.org/
PHARMACEUTICAL_BUSINESS/health_movement_against_codex/
health_movement21.htm
25. allrefer.com, an on-line
encyclopedia.
See http://www.1upinfo.com/encyclopedia/K/Kohl-Hel.html
26 Ambrose Evans-Pritchard, Euro-
Federalists financed by U.S. Spy Chiefs, The Daily Telegraph, 19
Septemeber 2000. See http://www.telegraph.co.uk/
27. William F. Jasper, Global
Tyranny.. Bloc by Bloc, The New American, 9 April
2001
See http://www.stoptheftaa.org/artman/publish/article_8.shtml
28. Vladimir Bukovsky and Pavel
Stroilov, EUSSR, Sovereignty Publications, December 2004. ISBN
0-9540231-1-0
Chapter 4
COMMUNISM AND FASCISM
The bedrock of the New World
Order is a global financial empire owned and controlled by Western bankers and
industrialists. It has been laid down using a two pronged strategy. The first
was to finance corrupt and socialist regimes in developing countries in order
to stifle the growth of domestic free enterprise causing them to become
dependent on Western industry and finance. The second was a form of
international economic piracy, where the World Bank and IMF fired a broadside
of debt at Third World economies, knocking out their engine of growth, and
allowing the Western multinationals to climb aboard and plunder their national
resources and natural industries.
The success of the strategy
can be judged on the one hand by looking at progress towards free-market
economies and property rights around the world, and the other, the extent to
which developing countries are beholden to Western corporations. To reach a
moral conclusion about it, one might also consider the impact of the strategy
on human rights, because the cartel has financed communist and fascist regimes
alike, with absolutely no qualms about the human cost.
The emblem which best
represents it is the skull and cross-bones motif of Yales' famous secret
society, The Order of Skull and Bones. Many members of the cartel have belonged
to it including generations of the Bush family. This emblem is the universal
symbol of both and piracy and lethality, thereby representing the economic
poison swallowed by most Third World nations. The Order was founded in 1832 by
William Russell whose family fortune was built upon the global trade in opium,
a substance almost as addictive and destructive as the drip-feed of Western
currency.
4.1 THE
HEART OF THE ISSUE: POWER AND PROPERTY RIGHTS
There is a staggering
correlation between private property rights and political freedoms. GNP per
capita in the U.S. is above $20,000 but in former Eastern Bloc countries it
averages between $730 and $5000.(1) Whilst governments of lesser
developed countries have had access to an unlimited supply of money from
abroad, private enterprise has been stifled because the citizens of these
countries have been denied access to capital by politicians. Hernando de Soto's
highly acclaimed book The Mystery of Capital(2) documents how much 'dead capital'
exists in developing countries. This refers to private property which cannot be
used as collateral to obtain loans or buy stock in another business because the
owner has not been given adequate property rights by the state. De Soto
concludes:
They have houses but not
titles; crops but not deeds; businesses but not statutes of incorporation. It
is the unavailability of these essential representations that explains why
people who have adapted every other Western invention, from the paper clip to
the nuclear reactor, have not been able to produce sufficient capital to make
their domestic capitalism work.(3)
He estimates that nearly 5
billion people are legally and economically disenfranchised by their own
governments. Very few property owners hold government-licenced titles outside
of North America, Canada, Australia, Japan and Western Europe. The total value
of this dead capital has been calculated to be 9.3 trillion dollars which is
forty-six times as much as all the World Bank loans of the past three decades.
4.2
LESSONS FROM HISTORY
NAZI GERMANY
The Nazis were financed
by German industries such as Krupp and I.G. Farben and their owners and
directors held key positions in Hitler's government. However, German industry
was itself partly financed by British and American bankers. Much of the capital
for the expansion of I.G. Farben came from Wall Street, primarily Rockefeller's
National City Bank; Dillon Read & Company, also a Rockefeller firm;
Morgan's Equitable Trust Company; Harris Forbes & Company; and even the
predominantly Jewish firm of Kuhn Loeb & Company. In 1928, Henry Ford
merged his German assets with those of I.G. Farben.(4) 40% of Ford Motor A.G. of Germany
was transferred to I.G. Farben and Edsel Ford joined the board of American
I.G.. A decade later, in August 1938, Henry Ford received the Grand Cross of
the German Eagle, a Nazi decoration for distinguished foreigners.(5) During the Allied bombing raids over
Germany, the factories and offices of I.G. Farben were spared on instructions
from the U.S. War Department.
RUSSIA
Without the
intervention of the German government, Round Table leaders and associated Wall
Street financiers, the Bolshevik revolution would never have succeeded. The
popular Kerensky revolution which over-threw the Tsar occurred in February
1917. It was relatively moderate in its policies and attempted to accommodate
all revolutionary factions including the Bolsheviks who were the smallest
minority. The second revolution in October 1917 was a coup d'etat by the
Bolsheviks who had succeeded in recruiting sufficient military support with the
financial backing of Round Table and Co.(6)
Prominent American financiers
included J.P. Morgan controlled Guaranty Trust Company and William Boyce
Thompson, a director of the Federal Reserve Bank of New York and leader of the
Red Cross mission to Russia during the revolution.(7) British funding came from banker
and founding member of Round Table, Lord Milner.(8)
When private property was
outlawed after the revolution, foreign money and corporations were needed to
prevent the economy and the communist regime from collapsing. It has remained
that way ever since: A symbiosis of the two powers whereby Western financial
support for Russia's ailing economy has been channeled into the pockets of the
international bankers via the companies they control. With domestic capitalism
outlawed, revolutionary Russia was right from the start a 'captured market' for
the Western bankers. This model has been used in country after country
throughout the world.
All the banks in Russia were
nationalized after the revolution except the Petrograd branch of Rockefeller's
National City Bank. In 1922 the first Soviet international bank, the
Ruskombank, was created by a cartel of Tsarist, German, Swedish, American and
British bankers. In exchange for Russian gold, a steady stream of large and
lucrative (i.e. non-competitive) contracts were awarded to British and American
businesses connected to Round Table.(9)
Russia's gold reserves were
soon depleted therefore game could only continue with the support of the
Western taxpayer. With the end of the U.S. Government's Lend-Lease programme
after WWII, which transfused $11 billion in military aid to the Soviets, the
bankers reverted to the core mechanism it has used to build foreign
dictatorships: Bank loans. Western (mostly American) taxpayers have bailed out
the Soviets with hundreds of billions of dollars. Before the Revolution, the
Ukraine was the bread basket of Europe. Afterwards Russia could not produce
enough food to feed itself and has relied on millions of tons of subsidized
food imports from the West. As Lenin recognized, the capitalists would have to
make the rope with which the communists could hang them.(10)
The Western
military-industrial complex helped to build Eastern-Bloc heavy industry, from
oil-drilling equipment to chemical processing plants, air-traffic radar
systems, equipment to produce precision bearings, helicopter engines, laser
technology, truck plants and nuclear power plants. The German company, Junkers Aircraft
, literally created Soviet air power. Acknowledging this apparent contradiction
between geo-politics and international business, Secretary of the Navy,
John Lehman, addressed the graduating class at Annapolis in 1983:
Within weeks, many of you will
be looking across just hundreds of feet of water at some of the most modern
technology ever invented in America. Unfortunately, it is on Soviet ships.(11)
These facts demonstrate that
the Cold War and post-Cold War era concepts are invalid in terms of economics.
The same financial system has always operated. The change of communists to
'social democrats' after the fall of the Berlin Wall was simply a name change
aimed at persuading the Western public to believe that the world is becoming
more liberal and democratic. In fact, the bankers now own everything of
significance in communist and capitalist countries alike. It is no coincidence
that the purported demise of the Soviet Union began at the end of the 1980s to
coincide with the admission of the Soviet Union into the World Bank/IMF club.
According to the World Bank's website:
It was only after radical
changes had been made in the country's policy in the late 1980s that the Soviet
leadership began to show interest in establishing ties with the World Bank and
the IMF. The meeting of the Group of Seven in London in 1991 resulted in the
admission of the Soviet Union to these international organizations as an
associate member.(12)
Rather than a change of
policy, this was actually putting the same old policy into high gear. Senior
oligarchs in the communist party and the KGB simply stole the country's oil and
gas industries during the economic chaos of the 1990s. More of Russia's assets
are now open to foreign buyers. Witness BP's recent deal to merge its Russian
oil assets with TNK, a big private oil company jointly owned by billionaires Mikhail
Fridman and Viktor Vekselberg. The BP deal gives the combined company an
enterprise value of around $18 billion. Russia now has one of the largest
number of billionaires in the world and possibly the highest billionaire-to-GDP
ratio in the world according to Forbes Magazine.(13) At the same time Royal Dutch /
Shell announced a $15 billion investment in Russian gas production and a gas
pipeline to northern Europe.(14)
In his book Globalization
and its Discontents former World Bank chief economist, Joseph Stiglitz,
describes how the privatization programme in Russia led to a robber baron economy
and a catastrophic decline in GDP. Surprisingly, Stiglitz views this as yet
another sorry mistake by an ideologically motivated World Bank/IMF. By 1992 $50
billion in loans and aid from various western sources rained down on the former
Soviet states only to disappear without trace. In 1998 a Group -of -Seven/ IMF
meeting authorized a $22 billion bailout. In 1999 it was discovered $20 billion
had been stolen by Russian officials.(15)
Amnesty International
currently has a major campaign for basic human rights in Russia. Torture is
still institutionalized, anyone, even a child, who is taken into police custody
for questioning is at risk of torture and ill-treatment. Methods of police
torture commonly reported include beatings, electric shocks, rape, the use of
gas masks to induce near-suffocation, and tying detainees in painful positions.
Up to a million men, women and children are in prisons and pre-trial detention
centres in the Russian Federation, many are held in conditions that amount to
cruel, inhuman and degrading treatment. Conditions are particularly harsh in
the pre-trial detention centres owing to chronic overcrowding. Cells are filthy
and pest-ridden, with poor lighting and ventilation, and contagious diseases
are rife (over 100,000 inmates have tuberculosis). Tens of thousands of
children in Russia are languishing behind bars. Children also suffer torture
and ill treatment in pre-trial detention centres and prisons. Since coming to
power, Vladamir Putin has recently strengthened the FSB, the old internal
security arm of the KGB, inhibited free speech, pursued politically motivated
persecution of businessmen and pursued a four year war of aggression in
Chechnya involving substantial atrocities against civilians.(16)
CHINA
The communist revolution
in China was also backed by Wall Street. In 1946, The American Government
imposed an arms embargo on the Nationalist Government when it was on the verge
of defeating the communists. Congress voted to send millions of dollars of arms
to the Chinese government but the aid was deliberately delayed for months. When
it did arrive, the rifles didn't have any bolts in them and were useless.(17)
China joined the World
Bank/IMF in 1980. By 1996, it was the largest recipient of World Bank loans.
With Western dollars, China has purchased power-generating equipment, oil-field
exploration, fleets of jumbo jets, steel mills, satellite communications
systems and huge amounts of high-tech military hardware.(18) Three years ago, Bill
Clinton authorized Donald Rumsfeld's company ABB Inc. to sell two light water
nuclear reactors to North Korea.(19) Starting in 1996,
Russian and Chinese military units began to purchase U.S. made super-computers
for nuclear weapons research. These super-computers can run American nuclear
bomb design software and codes with little or no modification. They are
identical to the computers at U.S. weapons labs right down to the vendor
support.(20)(21)
Despite the fact that
China has substantial trade with the West, evidenced by all the consumables in
our shops which are made in China, Amnesty International details human rights
abuses on a massive scale:(22) The continued use of
the death penalty during the ongoing "strike hard" campaign resulting
in high numbers of executions, often after unfair or summary trials; the
continued use of 'Re-education through Labour', a system which allows for the
detention of millions of individuals every year without charge or trial in contravention
of international human rights standards; the persistence of serious allegations
of torture and ill-treatment within China's criminal justice system, including
police stations; and increasing arrests and detentions of Internet users or
so-called "cyber-dissidents" in violation of their fundamental rights
to freedom of expression and information. Joseph Stiglitz states that China
began its transition to a market economy in the late 1970s(23) but the one-child
policy, first adumbrated by Deng Xiaoping in 1979, was in place nationwide by
1981. The 'technical policy on family planning', still in force today, requires
IUDs for women of childbearing age with one child, sterilization for couples
with two children (usually performed on the woman), and abortions for women
pregnant without authorization. By the mid-eighties, according to Chinese
government statistics, birth control surgeries-abortions, sterilizations, and
IUD insertions-were averaging more than thirty million a year. Many, if not
most, of these procedures were performed on women who submitted only under
duress.(24)
CONCLUSION
The Western cartel has
supported the bloodiest regimes in human history all in the cause of financial
globalization and the New World Order. The next chapter shows that the same
game has been played in developing countries throughout the world.
Chapter 4 End Notes
1. UC Atlas of Inequality.
1999 statistics of GNP per capita.
See http://ucatlas.ucsc.edu/gnp/gnppl.html
2. Hernando De Soto, The Mystery
of Capital,(New York: Basic Books, 2000). See also the article by Dr
Michael Coffman, Why Property Rights Matter on Discerning The Times
website at http://www.discerningtoday.org/PropertyRights3.pdf
3. De Soto, op cit., p.6
4. G. Edward Griffin, The
Creature from Jekyll Island, American Media, Fourth Edition, 2002, p.295
5. Anthony C. Sutton, Wall Street
and the Rise of Hitler, GSG and Associates, 1976, p.93
6. Griffin,op cit., pp.285-6
7. Sutton, op cit., p.170
8. Griffin, op cit., p.274
9. Ibid p.292
10. Ibid pp.296-299
11. Ibid p.303
12. The World Bank Group in
Russia, The World Bank Group.
See http://www.worldbank.org.ru/ECA/Russia.nsf/
ECADocByUnid/A729CBDBA81E84EF85256C45005D369F?Opendocument
13. Paul Klebnikov, Out of
Russia's ashes--treasure, Forbes Magazine, 17 March 2003. See http://www.forbes.com/global/2003/0317/074.html
14. Royal Dutch/Shell and BP
expand to Russia, Chemical Newsflash, sponsored by BASF AG, 24 June 2003,
http://www.chemicalnewsflash.de/en/news/010703/news2.htm
15. Griffin, op cit., pp.129-130
16. Amnesty International briefing
on the human rights situation in the Russian Federation. See http://www.amnesty.org/russia/briefing.html
17. Dr. Stanley Monteith, The
Brotherhood of Darkness, Hearthstone Publishing, 2000, p.20
18. Griffin, op cit., p.301
19. Randeep Ramesh,The two faces
of Rumsfeld, The Guardian, London, 9 May 2003. See
http://www.guardian.co.uk/korea/article/0,2763,952289,00.html
20. Charles Smith, Brokering our
own demise, WorldNetDaily, 30 November1999. See
http://www.worldnetdaily.com/news/article.asp?ARTICLE_ID=20542
21. Charles Smith, China and
covert nuclear commerce, WorldNetDaily, 11 May 1999. See
http://www.worldnetdaily.com/news/article.asp?ARTICLE_ID=20512
22. Amnesty International, People's
Republic of China: Continuing abuses under a new leadership - summary of human
rights concerns, 1 October 2003. See
http://web.amnesty.org/library/Index/ENGASA170352003?open&of=ENG-CHN
23. Joeseph Stiglitz, Globalization
and its Discontents, Penguin Books, 2002, pp.117-118
24. Steven W. Mosher, President
Population Research Institute, China's One-Child Policy: Coercive from the
Beginning. Testimony Submitted to the International Relations Committee of
the U.S. House of Representatives for the Hearing on "Coercive Population
Control in China: New Evidence of Forced Abortion and Forced
Sterilization," 17 October 2001. See http://www.pop.org/main.cfm?EID=305
Chapter 5
LESSER DEVELOPED COUNTRIES
5.1
EMPOWERING THIRD WORLD GOVERNMENTS
AFRICA
Mr Ian Smith, Prime
Minister of Rhodesia 1964-1979, often said: "we were never beaten by our
enemies - we were betrayed by our friends". The West essentially promised
white leaders in South Africa that they would be allowed to continue practicing
apartheid if they would stop arming Rhodesia in her war against communism.
Between 1979 and 1980, Rhodesia fell into Marxist dictatorship under Mugabe and
had its name changed to Zimbabwe.(1) The World Bank provided loans to
Mugabe up until May 2000.(2) This is not an academic issue since
millions face starvation because of Mugabe's Marxist policy of seizing the
nation's farms. Ominously, Mugabe has turned to communist China to run farms in
Zimbabwe.(3)
In the
1980s the world saw starving children in Ethiopia, but what they did not
realize was that this was a planned famine. The Marxist regime of Mengistu
Haile Mariam undertook nationalization of agriculture and massive population
resettlement program modeled on Stalin and Mao's starvation programmes in the
1930s and 40s which killed millions. Meanwhile the World Bank continued to send
Mengistu millions of dollars, much of it intended for the ministry of
agriculture undertaking the resettlement programme.(4)(5) The Wall St.
Journal recently reported on a study by the The Free Africa Foundation
which concluded that,
In country
after country in Africa, there has been no accountability in the use of World
Bank loans... Billions in World Bank loans have been embezzled in Africa and
rarely anyone is held accountable and prosecuted.(6)
It comes as
no surprise then that by its own admission, the World Bank's purported policy
of strengthening African free market economies by lending $50 billion for
'Structural Adjustment programs' and other projects over the past thirty years
has been an abject failure. That's because their real purpose was the exact opposite:
The destruction of the property rights and the creation of socialist
dictatorships. What else could possibly have happened after handing over $50
billion to undemocratic governments with no accountability?
Given a
political system that is based upon a patronage system and governments run by
uniformed bandits, the commitment to reform is almost non-existent as genuine
economic reform would be politically suicidal. The result is a 'reform
charade,' where "reforming" governments take one step forward and
three steps backward.(7)
The Bank's
own reports in the 1980s revealed that it played a major role in nationalizing
the development process throughout the Third World. Regarding these so-called
harsh conditionalities imposed by the structural adjustment loans, a 1985
confidential bank report by leading development experts concluded that 'the
SAL's seemingly hard and all-encompassing conditionality is largely illusory'.
The bank and some proponents of foreign aid claim that a wave of privatization
swept the Third World but actually 'privatization was almost all talk'. World
Bank loans either go directly to the recipient government or must be guaranteed
by the government. So, by inevitably increasing the politicization of Third
World economies, World Bank aid was the economic tranquilizer dart which
created a weaker domestic market for the foreign multinationals to feed on.(8)
LATIN
AMERICA
By 1982
almost every Third World government was running behind on its payments and
Latin America was no exception. Over the next seven years, multi-billion dollar
bailout packages failed to stem the economic decline. That's because they were
used to build cumbersome nationalized industries at the expense of the private
sector. For example, the western banks funded large government run companies
such as Petroleo Brasilerio S.A. in Brazil and Petroleus Mexicanos in Mexico.
By 1990 these companies were failing miserably and dragging the rest of the
economy down with them. Brazil was unable to produce enough petrol and Mexico
became a food importer. Brazil is now controlled by the military and government
run companies consume 65% of all industrial investment. Exactly the same
process brought Argentina's economy to its knees. It had an expanding middle
class until its government became the recipient of massive loans from the World
Bank and U.S. commercial banks during the 1980s. By 1989 inflation averaged
5000% and thousands of corporate bankruptcies followed. Government figures
showed that in 2002, about 100,000 people dropped out of the middle class each
week to become the new poor. A country that only 10 years earlier had Latin
America's highest standard of living was now on a level with Jamaica; half of
Argentina's 37 million people lived below the poverty level. The Government had
subsidy programmes for about 2 million malnourished Argentines, but millions
more got nothing. Some subsisted by scavenging through garbage. (10) (11)
Furthermore
the West has supplied physical weapons for military governments to spend their
free money on. Britain is the world's second largest arms exporter after the
U.S. with 20% market share.(12) A U.S. military
training school, the School of the Americas, has trained many of the worst
human rights violators and dictators in various Latin American countries,
including Roberto D'Aubisson from El Salvador and Manuel Noriega of Panama.(13)
ASIA
Joseph
Stiglitz's discussion of the role of bankruptcy laws in the 1997 Asian
financial crisis reveals how the IMF deliberately undermined domestic property
rights. Here the bankers exploited the absence of the legal framework for
implementing trusteeships when large numbers of firms were going bankrupt. The
IMF encouraged the state to get involved in restructuring the companies, i.e.
telling them how to run themselves instead of sorting out who really owns the
firm. Countries such as Thailand followed their advice and languished whilst
Korea and Malaysia ignored it and prospered.(14)
5.2 THE
SELL OFF
By the end
of the 1980s the banks had successfully empowered and corrupted Third World
governments with billions in bank loans. Liberal democracy and the free market
had been strangled. Now for the second play: The sell off. The directive for
the sell off came from the World Bank and IMF at the end of the 1980s as shown
by World Bank documents signed by James Wolfensen and leaked to a BBC
investigative journalist, Greg Palast. The World Bank flew in their teams who
dictated their plans, an average of 111 conditions in a pre-written document,
to each nation's finance minister. If he refused he would be denied any further
loans and the life blood which had sustained his government would be cut. These
conditions included selling off the natural resources and national industries
to foreign multinationals. In the case of Argentina, they required the nation
to give up its gas water and oil to Vivendi, Repsol, Enron and a few other
multinationals. In 1988 Jeb Bush made a call to an Argentine senator asking him
to sell a gas pipeline to Enron at one fifth of its market value. In return, a
percentage of the discount would be deposited in the senator's Swiss bank
account. The process has been called 'briberization' rather than privatisation.(15)
The Water
Barons report for the Center for Public
Integrity deals in-depth with the sale of national water supplies.
"Surgery without anesthesia," was how Menem described his policies in
1989 as he set out to make Argentina one of the world's leading models for
privatisation . Faced with rampant inflation - caused by the banks and who were
suddenly "reluctant" to make further loans - Menem won passage of the
National Administrative Reform Law, which declared a state of economic
emergency and gave him the power to privatize public utilities by decree. As a
result World Bank money came flowing back to Argentina. On 18 Dec. 1990, the
World Bank approved a loan (a bribe) of $300 million for "The new
adjustment projects in Argentina". None applauded louder than Santiago
Soldati, a businessman and close Menem ally who would end up as the lead
Argentine partner in the privatisation of water. Soldati later sold his interest
in the water company, making a tidy $100 million in the process. In 1993, the
Government granted a 30-year concession to run the water system to Aguas
Argentinas a consortium controlled by two French corporate giants, Compagnie
Générale des Eaux (now Vivendi )and Lyonnaise des Eaux (now Suez). Soon after,
the World Bank declared the Buenos Aires privatisation an overwhelming success,
and made it a model for privatisation s of water that followed in the
Philippines, Indonesia, Australia and South Africa.(16)
The
investigation showed that the enormous expansion of these water companies could
not have been possible without the World Bank and other international financial
institutions, such as the IMF, the Inter-American Development Bank, the Asian
Development and the European Bank for Reconstruction. In countries such as
South Africa, Argentina, Philippines and Indonesia, the World Bank has been
advising the leaders to 'commercialize' their utilities as part of an overall
bank policy of privatisation and 'free-market' economics. (17)
The World
Bank calculates that privatisation projects in developing countries in
2002 alone totaled (U.S) $24 billion.(18) Having become
impatient with the sluggish pace of progress on this issue, the World Bank
launched an internet toolkit for privatisation in developing countries,
providing on-line advice on how to sell off highways, water, waste systems,
ports, and telecoms industries!(19)
CONCLUSION
When making the case for
such a grand conspiracy as this, it is helpful to call a whistleblower to the
witness stand. Published in November 2004, the book entitled Confessions
of an Economic Hit Man by John Perkins ( now a New York Times
best seller) is a public confession by an insider about the real purpose of
Western loans to developing countries. Working in a private consulting firm,
Perkins was one of the 'economic hit men' who carried out the plan detailed in
the World Bank documents. Perkins describes a classical conspiracy between
government and big business. The U.S. National Security Agency recruited and
trained the 'economic hit men' to carry out their duties through private
consulting firms and other corporations. The beneficiaries of the conspiracy
were the international bankers and shareholders in the multi-national
corporations. Unable to repay the loans organized by the hit men, developing
countries had to surrender their national resources to their Western creditors.
What an
extraordinary scam: Destroy a country's domestic capitalism and free-markets,
get it into massive debt and then with financial gun to its head, shake it down
for everything it's got. It is even more extraordinary for the fact that,
because this piracy is conducted in international waters, it isn't even
illegal! One of the questions raised in the next chapter is whether or not
these agents have been acting, to some degree, on Her Majesty's (secret)
service.
Chapter 5 End Notes
1. Peter Hammond, Not Defeated
-Betrayed, Frontline Fellowship.
See http://www.frontline.org.za/
mission%20reports_prayer/not%20defeated_%20betrayed.htm
2. The Wall Street Journal,
Opinion, 5 August 2003 (Review & Outlook).
See http://www.freeafrica.org/commentaries15.html
3. Andrew Meldrum, Mugabe hires
China to farm seized land, The Guardian, London,13 February 2003.
See http://www.guardian.co.uk/zimbabwe/article/0,2763,894421,00.html
4. James Bovard, The World Bank
vs The World's Poor, Cato Policy Analysis 1987, pp.4-6. See http://www.cato.org/pubs/pas/pa092.html
5. G. Edward Griffin, The Creature
from Jekyll Island, American Media, Fourth Edition, 2002, p.100
6. The Wall Street Journal, op cit.
7. The Failure of World Bank
Programs in Africa, A Special Report by The Free Africa Foundation, March
2003. See summary at http://www.freeafrica.org/reports.html
8. Bovard, op cit.,
10. Griffin, op cit., ch's 5-6
especially pp.103-104 and 116
11. Daniel Santoro, The 'Aguas'
Tango: Cashing In On Buenos Aires' privatisation , The Water Barons. A
report for The Center for Public Integrity, 2003. See
http://www.icij.org/water/report.aspx?sid=ch&rid=50&aid=50
12. Brian Wheeler, How big is the
UK arms trade? BBC, London, 9 September, 2003. See http://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/business/3084718.stm
13. Anup Shah, Globalissues.org, 30
October 2001.
See http://www.globalissues.org/Geopolitics/ArmsTrade/TrainingViolators.asp
14. Joseph Stiglitz, Globalization
and its Discontents, Penguin Books, 2002, pp. 117-118
15. Greg Palast, The Best
Democracy Money Can Buy. Also see Greg Palast's website for discussions of
the book at
http://www.gregpalast.com/detail.cfm?artid=125&row=1.
http://www.gregpalast.com/detail.cfm?artid=128&row=1
http://www.gregpalast.com/detail.cfm?artid=198&row=1
16. Daniel Santoro, op cit.
17.Bill Marsden, Cholera and The
Age of The Water Barons, The Water Barons, A report for The Center
for Public Integrity. See http://www.icij.org/water/report.aspx?sid=ch&rid=44&aid=44
18.Private Participatiion in
Infrastructure Project Database, The World Bank Group.
See http://rru.worldbank.org/ppi/
19. Toolkits, The World Bank
Group. See http://rru.worldbank.org/Toolkits/
Chapter 6
PRIVATISATION IN THE WEST
6.1
PUBLIC-PRIVATE PARTNERSHIP
In Britain,
privatisation started under Margaret Thatcher at the beginning of the 1980s,
before the World Bank imposed the same policy on lesser developed countries.
Even now, the privatisation process is far from complete, but a report in The
Guardian newspaper summarized when the family silver was sold:
Cable &
Wireless: Oct 81, Amersham International: Feb 82, Britoil: Nov 82, Associated
British Ports: Feb 83, Enterprise Oil: Feb 84, Jaguar: July 84, British
Telecom: Nov 84, British Gas: Dec 86, British Airways: Feb 87, Rolls-Royce: May
87, BAA: July 87, British Steel: Dec 88, Regional water companies: Dec 89,
Electricity distribution companies: Dec 90.(1)
At the same
time, Margaret Thatcher introduced Compulsory Competitive Tendering (CCT) which
started the sell off of national and local government. John Major renamed this
Private Finance Initiative (PFI) in 1992, and the policy has continued unabated
under Tony Blair.(2) The Public-Private Partnership
(PPP) industry website boasts:
564 PFI
deals with a capital value of more than £35bn have been signed.(3)...There has been wide coverage on
the use of PPPs in health and education, but PPPs are being used in a diverse
range of projects like helicopter simulators for the Ministry of Defence and
the redevelopment of the main Treasury building... Chancellor Gordon Brown said
in a recent speech that "there should be no principled objection to PFI
expanding into new areas, such as the provision of employment and training
services, the renovation of schools and colleges, major projects or urban
regeneration and social housing.(4)
The most
ironic PPP initiative is the 'Strategic Transfer of the Estate to The Private
Sector ' (STEPS) by the Inland Revenue (IRS equivalent). In March 2001, it
signed a Private Finance Initiative deal, selling off its entire estate for
£220 million to Mapeley Steps Ltd. a company controlled by George Soros located
in the off-shore tax haven of Bermuda.(5)
Britain has led the field in PPPs, but almost every
government in the world has been implementing the PPP model.(6) Having firmly established
themselves in Europe, Africa, Latin America and Asia, the water companies are
expanding into the far more lucrative market of the United States. The U.S.
still has publicly owned water but that looks set to change as the French and
German multinationals are winning the battle in Congress to allow them to take
over America's aging water infrastructure.(7)
6.2 THE
POLICY COMES FROM THE TOP
Although the
World Bank introduced privatisation to developing countries with strong arm
tactics at the end of the 1980s, it now has an army of policy forums giving
intellectual credibility to it. The Water Barons investigation reveals
that the water companies have joined forces with the World Bank and the United
Nations to create an array of international think tanks, advisory commissions,
and forums that have dominated the water debate and established privatisation
as the dominant solution to the world's water problems. "What we have seen
during the 1990s has been the setting-up of a kind of global high command for
water," wrote Ricardo Petrella, a leading researcher on the politics of
water. The U.N. is now promoting PPP as a key component of the United Nations'
programme for sustainable development.(8)
At the same
time as the World Bank/ IMF imposed its privatisation policy on the Third
World, Prince Charles launched his Prince of Wales Business Leaders Forum.
Since 1990, when he conducted his first city conference in Charleston, North
Carolina, he has amassed over 5,000 multinational and national corporations
whom he works with in setting up public-private partnerships. This is a key
institution in the globalization machine, hence its members include 65 of the
world's biggest companies. As noted in chapter two, the multi-trillion dollar
shareholdings of the British, European and American elite are hidden behind
false fronts, trusts and Bank of England nominee accounts.(9)(10)
N. M. Rothschild
& Sons has guided the privatisation process, especially in the U.K. Their
website boasts:
1985 saw N.
M.Rothschild & Sons win the 'beauty contest' to advise the British
Government on the sale of British Gas. This was the most significant piece of
privatisation work to be undertaken by N. M. Rothschild& Sons, pioneers in
such business from 1971. Further advisory roles were taken with regard to the
privatisation of British Steel and British Coal as well as the regional
electricity and water boards. It would lead to business in over 40 countries
worldwide.
... [ in 2000] the British
Government appointed N M Rothschild & Sons as financial advisers for 3G
mobile phone licensing. The bank adopted an innovative and highly successful
auction process whereby telephone companies bid for the available licences, and
was subsequently approached by other governments worldwide to undertake similar
projects. (11)
Lord Wakeham was
the Conservative Chief Whip from 1983 to 1987 and Secretary for Energy from
1989 to 1992. He authorized Enron to buy into the privatized water and
electricity systems, and then, in 1994 when he resigned as leader of the House
of Lords, he joined Enron as a non-executive director and sat on its audit
committee. Lord Wakeham had also awarded a contract to N. M. Rothschild to
advise the Government on coal privatisation. In 1995 he became a director of N.
M. Rothschild.(12)
In November
2003, Oliver Letwin resigned his directorship of N. M. Rothschild, which he had
held since 1991, to become Shadow Chancellor of the Exchequer for the
Conservative party. He is author of the book 'Privatising the World' and has
worked as an adviser to foreign governments on privatisation.(13)
Norman Lamont was
the Tory Chancellor of the Exchequer from 1990-1993. After he graduated from
university, he worked for N. M. Rothschild for eleven years and was a director
of Rothschild Asset Management. After leaving government he became a director
of N.M. Rothschild 1993-1995.(14)
Eddie George was
Governor of the Bank of England from 1993-2003. After retirement, he joined the
Rothschild group and sits on the board of Rothschild Continuation Holdings
A.G., the Bank for International Settlements, Switzerland, and N. M. Rothschild
. (15)
SUMMARY
A Western
money monopoly was well established by the beginning of the twentieth century
but still remains hidden today. The money monopoly is dynastic and transcends
national borders enabling the Anglo-European-American elite to transfer all the
world's wealth into their hands and to create a global government under their
control - a new Dark Age of global feudalism or global fascism. Since the
late 1980s, the sale of the world's resources and industries to the
international bankers has accelerated. Now all that remains is to strip
Westerners of what remains of their property and the vision of John D.
Rockefeller's General Education Board will be fulfilled:
In our dreams
we have limitless resources, and the people yield themselves with perfect
docility to our molding hands...
- Fred Gates, "Occasional Paper No.1", 1904, General
Education Board
On the eve of the 2001
General Election, Prime Minister Tony Blair was interviewed by the BBC's
leading news presenter, Jeremy Paxman. There was an extraordinary exchange over
the question of whether or not someone can become too rich.(3) In describing the extent to which
money really is power, the rest of this book explains one of the reasons why
Tony Blair did not want to answer that question.
PAXMAN: Do
you believe that an individual can earn too much money?
BLAIR: I
don't really - it is not - no, it's not a view I have. Do you mean that we
should cap someone's income? Not really, no. Why? What is the point? You can
spend ages trying to stop the highest paid earners earning the money but in an
international market like today, you probably would drive them abroad. What
does that matter? Surely the important thing is to level up those people that
don't have opportunity in our society.
PAXMAN: But
where is the justice in taxing someone who earns £34,000 a year, which is about
enough to cover a mortgage on a one-bedroom flat in outer London, at the same
rate as someone who earns £34 million. Where is the justice?
BLAIR: The
person who earns £34 million, if they're paying the top rate of tax, will pay
far more tax on the £34 million than the person on £34,000.
PAXMAN: I
am asking you about the rate of tax.
BLAIR: I
know and what I am saying to you is the rate is less important in this instance
than the overall amount of tax that people would pay. You know what would
happen, if you go back to the days of high top rates of tax. All that would
happen is that those people, who are small in number actually, and you can
spend a lot of time getting after the person earning millions of pound a year,
and then what you don't do is apply the real energy where it's necessary on
things like the children's tax credit, the Working Families Tax Credit, the
minimum wage, the New Deal, all the things that have helped people on lower
incomes.
PAXMAN: But
where is the justice in it?
BLAIR: When
you say where is the justice in that, the justice for me is concentrated on
lifting incomes of those that don't have a decent income. It's not a burning
ambition for me to make sure that David Beckham earns less money.
PAXMAN: But
Prime Minister, the gap between rich and poor has by widened while you have
been in office.
BLAIR: A
lot of those figures are based on a couple of years ago before many of the
measures we took came into effect. But the lowest income families in this
country are benefiting from the government. Their incomes are rising. The fact
that you have some people at the top end earning more
PAXMAN: ..Benefiting
more!
BLAIR: If
they are earning more, fine, they pay their taxes.
PAXMAN: But
is it acceptable for gap between rich and poor to widen?
BLAIR: It
is acceptable for those people on lower incomes to have their incomes raised.
It is unacceptable that they are not given the chances. To me, the key thing is
not whether the gap between those who, between the person who earns the most in
the country and the person that earns the least, whether that gap is.
PAXMAN: So
it is acceptable for gap to widen between rich and poor?
BLAIR: It
is not acceptable for poor people not to be given the chances they need in
life.
PAXMAN: That
is not my question.
BLAIR: I
know it's not your question but it's the way I choose to answer it. If you end
up going after those people who are the most wealthy in society, what you
actually end up doing is in fact not even helping those at the bottom end.
PAXMAN: So
the answer to the straight question is it acceptable for gap between rich and
poor to get wider, the answer you are saying is yes.
BLAIR: No,
it's not what I am saying. What I am saying is that my task is
PAXMAN: You
are not saying no.
BLAIR: But
I don't think that is the issue
PAXMAN: You
may not think it is the issue, but it is the question. Is it OK for the gap to
get wider?
BLAIR: It
may be the question. The way I choose to answer it is to say the job of
government is make sure that those at the bottom get the chances.
PAXMAN: With
respect, people see you are asked a straightforward question and they see you
not answering it.
BLAIR: Because
I choose to answer it in the way that I'm answering it.
PAXMAN: But
you are not answering it.
BLAIR: I
am answering it. What I am saying is the most important thing is to level up,
not level down.
PAXMAN: Is
it acceptable for gap between rich and poor to get bigger?
BLAIR: What
I am saying is the issue isn't in fact whether the very richest person ends up
becoming richer. The issue is whether the poorest person is given the chance
that they don't otherwise have.
PAXMAN: I
understand what you are saying. The question is about the gap.
BLAIR: Yes,
I know what your question is. I am choosing to answer it in my way rather than
yours.
PAXMAN: But
you're not answering it.
BLAIR: I
am.
PAXMAN: You
are answering another question.
BLAIR: I
am answering actually in the way that I want to answer it. I tell you why I
want to answer it in this way. Because if you end up saying no, actually my
task is to stop the person earning a lot of money earning a lot of money, you
waste all your time and energy, taking money off the people who are very
wealthy when in today's world, they probably would move elsewhere and make
their money. What you are not asking me about, which would be a more fruitful
line of endeavour, is what are you doing for the poorest people to give them a
boost.
PAXMAN: Let's
talk about tax. You have promised...
BLAIR: Why
don't we talk about the poorest of society and what we are doing for them.
PAXMAN: I
assume you want to be Prime Minister. I just want to be an interviewer. Can we
stick to that arrangement?
So, remembering
the question put to Tony Blair of whether or not someone can become too rich,
the second section of this book examines 'the art of killing quietly'.
Chapter 6 End Notes
1. Larry Elliott and Jill Treanor, A
whole world sold on sell-offs, The Guardian, London, 22 Nov. 2000.
See http://www.guardian.co.uk/Thatcher/Story/0,2763,401129,00.html
2. Timeline: outsourcing and the
public sector, The Guardian.
See http://society.guardian.co.uk/microsite/
outsourcing_/story/0,13230,933819,00.html
3. Chief Secretary to the Treasury,
Rt Hon Paul Boateng MP, 11 June 2003, Completed Projects, PPP Forum
website. See http://www.pppforum.com/completed.html
4. Frequently Asked Questions,
Ibid..
See http://www.pppforum.com/faq.html
5. Stefan Armbruster, Revenue
sell-off to tax haven firm, BBC, London, 23 Sept. 2002. See http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/low/business/2263208.stm
6. PPP websites: Canada http://www.pppcouncil.ca/index.asp
Netherlands http://www.pppcentre.com/
Ireland http://www.ppp.gov.ie/
USA http://www.ncppp.org/councilinstitutes/index.html
7. Erika Hobbs, Low Rates, Needed
Repairs Lure 'Big Water' to Uncle Sam's Plumbing, The Water Barons,
a report for The Center for Public Integrity.
See http://www.icij.org/water/report.aspx?sid=ch&rid=54&aid=54
8. Public Private Partnership,
United Nations Economic Commission for Europe website, Introduction. See http://www.unece.org/operact/ppp/introduction.htm
9. Joan M. Veon, synopsis of Prince
Charles the Sustainable Prince.
See http://www.womensgroup.org/APPENDIX.html
10. The International Business
Leaders Forum website, members section. See http://www.pwblf.org/csr/csrwebassist.nsf/content/f1b2a3.html
11. N.M. Rothschild website,
Timeline
http://www.rothschild.info/history/default.asp?doc=articles/chistory2-1
12. Andrew Clark and David Hencke, Master
fixer who ended up in a fix, The Guardian, 30 January 2002
http://www.guardian.co.uk/enron/story/0,11337,641545,00.html
13. Oliver Letwin, Political
Profile, BBC News Online
http://news.bbc.co.uk/vote2001/hi/english/key_people/newsid_1179000/1179357.stm
14. Lord Lamont of Lerwick, Benador
Associates
http://www.benadorassociates.com/lamont.php
15. Nestle, CorporateWatch
http://www.corporatewatch.org.uk/profiles/food_supermarkets/nestle/nestle3.html
Chapter 7
THE
ECONOMY
7.1 THE
FUNCTION OF POVERTY
The standard of living of the average American
has to decline...
- Paul Volcker, Chairman of The Federal Reserve, New York Times, 18
October 1979, p.1, Volcker Asserts U.S Must Trim Living Standard.
'Money is power'. Well, to be precise, it's the gap between
the rich and poor that counts. The objective of the elite is to maintain the
capitalist structure as it is with one vital difference. There will be no
middle class in the New World Order. Under public-private partnership, the
middle class, free markets, and consumer choice will be replaced with a
neo-feudal society in which the Money Trust dictates to an impoverished
populace through a supranational technocracy. This is international socialism,
run for the benefit of the financial elite who own the economy and control the
emerging continental Politburos. The polite name for it is 'The Third Way', but
less deferential commentators call it 'corporate fascism'. The corporations
need government to restrict consumer choice in the market place, allowing the
cartel to determine what we can buy, sell, or even do in our own homes. The
'Third Way' is the path to utopia for our self-appointed philosopher kings,
advocated by the likes of Bill Clinton, Tony Blair, and Gerhard Schroder -
their senior political puppets. There is no difference between ostensibly right
and left wing political parties about the eventual destination, even if they
appear to be travelling at different speeds towards it.
Real power, then,
is achieved when the ruling class controls the material essentials of life,
granting and withholding them as if they were privileges, as George Orwell
reflected:
From the moment
when the machine first made its appearance it was clear to all thinking people
that the need for human drudgery, and therefore to a great extent for human
inequality, had disappeared. If the machine were used deliberately for that
end, hunger, overwork, dirt, illiteracy, and disease could be eliminated within
a few generations But it was also clear that an all-around increase in wealth
threatened the destruction... of a hierarchical society. In a world in which
everyone worked short hours, had enough to eat, lived in a house with a
bathroom and a refrigerator, and possessed a motorcar or even an airplane, the
most obvious and perhaps the most important form of inequality would already have
disappeared. If it once became general, wealth would confer no distinction.
Such a society could not long remain stable. For if leisure and security were
enjoyed by all alike, the great mass of human beings who are normally stupefied
by poverty would become literate and would learn to think for themselves; and
when once they had done this, they would sooner or later realize that the
privileged minority had no function, and they would sweep it away. In the long
run, a hierarchical society was only possible on a basis of poverty and
ignorance... It is deliberate policy to keep even the favoured groups somewhere
near the brink of hardship because a general state of scarcity increases the
importance of small privileges and thus magnifies the distinction between one
group and another... The social atmosphere is that of a besieged city, where
the possession of a lump of horseflesh makes the difference between wealth and
poverty.
The difference
between riches and poverty is often the difference between pleasure and
pain. Orwell concluded this idea in the torture episode at the end of 1984.
How does
one man assert his power over another, Winston?' By making him suffer.
Obedience is not enough. Unless he is suffering, how can you be sure that he is
obeying your will and not his own? Power is in inflicting pain and
humiliation... Progress in our world will be progress towards more pain.(1)
In The
Creature from Jekyll Island, G. Edward Griffin discusses the relationship
between 1984 and The Report From Iron Mountain: On the Possibility
and Desirability of Peace by Leonard Lewin. It has never been established
whether or not this report published in 1966 was written by a U.S. government
think tank or if it was an elaborate political satire. On 26 November,1967, the
report was reviewed in the book section of the Washington Post by
Herschel McLandress, which was the pen name for Harvard professor John Kenneth
Galbraith. Galbraith, who also had been a member of the Council on Foreign
Relations, said that he knew firsthand of the report's authenticity because he
had been invited to participate in it. Although he was unable to be part of the
official group, he was consulted from time to time and had been asked to keep
the project a secret. Furthermore, while he doubted the wisdom of letting the
public know about the report, he agreed totally with its conclusions. For the
purposes of Griffin's comparison, it makes no difference whether it is a
satire. The report credits Orwell for many of its ideas and it is a blueprint
for what has occurred since. Importantly, it agreed with Orwell's view that
poverty is a prerequisite for a hierarchical society:
The
continuance of the war system must be assured, if for no other reason, among
others, than to preserve whatever quality and degree of poverty a society
requires as an incentive, as well as to maintain the stability of its internal
organization of power.
The
economic destruction of the world's middle class is well advanced. Personal
debt, bankruptcies, and unemployment are soaring while investments are
destroyed in the stock-market and incomes decline. Like Manchurian Candidates,
the Western middle class have played their essential part in creating the
techno-bureaucracy of the new feudalism which will enslave them. This chapter
describes seven significant methods being used to reduce living standards
around the world. These are: 1. money supply and taxation; 2. free trade;
3.free movement of labour; 4. environmentalism; 5. wars; 6. the criminal
justice system; and 7. disease.
7.2
MONETARY AND FISCAL POLICY
Stock cultivates
land; stock employs labour. A tax which tended to drive away stock from any
particular country, would so far tend to dry up every source of revenue, both
to the sovereign and to the society.
- Adam Smith, The Wealth of Nations
THE BURDEN
OF TAXATION
In 1900 the
combined national and local tax burden in the U.S. was a mere 5.7% of
income. By year 2000 it reached an all time high of 33%. (2) The U.K.'s tax burden has grown
from 8.5 % of GDP in 1900 to 31% in 1963 and to a peak of 39% in 1982. It
is now around 38%.(3)(4) The E.U.'s tax burden
now averages 40.5%.(5)
The burden
of taxation on middle income bracket families has grown in line with the
overall increase. In 1958 the median two-earner American family ($68,605) paid
17.9% of its income in taxes. In 1998 that percentage was 37.6 % in 1998. In
year 2000, taxes claimed a greater share of the median two-income family's
income (39.0 percent) than food (8.9 percent), clothing (3.9 percent), housing
(15.9 percent), and transportation (6.9 percent), combined.(6)The U.S now has the same household
taxation levels as Britain reached at the end of the 1970s and where they
remain today: between 35 and 40% of household income.(7)
HIGH
LABOUR TAXES
One of the
most confounding economic trends in the United States during the past 20 years
has been the relative stagnation of workers' real wages. One of the primary
reasons for flat wages is that taxes and other government mandates on employers
have been expanding steadily, crowding out worker take-home pay. Combined
Federal Income taxes and payroll taxes increase the average cost of employing a
manufacturing worker by 28%.(8)
In Europe
the situation is even worse, but due to the rigidity of the labour market it
has caused high unemployment rather than driving wages down. In 1970, the
tax-to-GDP ratio of the E.U. was similar to America but then it grew by 8
percentage points largely due to an expansion of the welfare state. The tax
hike was largely imposed upon labour. The average effective tax rate on labour
is about 10 percentage points higher in Europe than in the U.S. with the
exception of the U.K, Ireland and Portugal whose rates are similar. The average
effective tax rate imposed on labour in 1997 reached 38% compared to 24% in the
U.S. This largely accounts for the high unemployment rate.(9)
THE HIDDEN
TAX: INFLATION
Inflation
is another form of taxation. It is an indirect tax therefore it falls as
heavily on the poor as it does on the rich. In the early stages of inflation,
the business class actually benefits from the easy credit. The government
causes inflation by going into debt therefore is one of the major collectors of
this tax. As described at the beginning of this book, the central bank prints
money for the government to borrow. As John Maynard Keynes explained:
Lenin is
said to have declared that the best way to destroy the capitalist system was to
debauch the currency. By a continuing process of inflation, governments can
confiscate, secretly and unobserved, an important part of the wealth of their
citizens. By this method they not only confiscate, but they confiscate
arbitrarily; and, while the process impoverishes many, it actually enriches
some... The process engages all the hidden forces of economic law on the side
of destruction, and does it in a manner which not one man in a million is able
to diagnose.
- John Maynard Keynes, The
Economic Consequences of the Peace, 1919, Ch. 6
Alan Greenspan elaborates:
Stripped of its
academic jargon, the welfare state is nothing more than a mechanism by which
governments confiscate the wealth of the productive members of a society to
support a wide variety of welfare schemes. A substantial part of the
confiscation is effected by taxation. But the welfare statists were quick to
recognize that if they wished to retain political power, the amount of taxation
had to be limited and they had to resort to programs of massive deficit
spending, i.e., they had to borrow money, by issuing government bonds, to
finance welfare expenditures on a large scale... The abandonment of the gold
standard made it possible for the welfare statists to use the banking system as
a means to an unlimited expansion of credit.... As the supply of money
(of claims) increases relative to the supply of tangible assets in the economy,
prices must eventually rise. Thus the earnings saved by the productive members
of the society lose value in terms of goods. When the economy's books are
finally balanced, one finds that loss in value represents the goods purchased
by the government for welfare or other purposes with the money proceeds of the
government bonds financed by bank credit expansion.
- Alan Greenspan, Gold and Economic
Freedom, The Objectivist, July 1966 (10)
This new
money can be expanded up to ten times when it passes through commercial banks
therefore their private borrowers are also tax collectors as Congressman Ron
Paul suggests:
An astute
stock investor or home builder can make millions in the boom phase of the
business cycle, while the poor and those dependent on fixed incomes can't keep
up with the rising cost of living.(11)
The
inflationary effect of lending is exacerbated when borrowers get into trouble
and the debts are "rolled over", "re-scheduled" and
eventually "bailed out". A non-performing loan causes inflation because
the freshly printed money injected into the economy via the borrowing
corporations and individuals has not been accompanied by a sufficient increase
in production to keep up repayments. There have been some major corporate
bailouts in the U.S. amounting to billions of dollars: Penn Central railroad and
Lockheed in 1970, Commonwealth Bank of Detroit 1972, New York City 1975,
Chrysler 1978, First Pennsylvania Bank of Philadelphia 1979 and Chicago's
Continental Illinois in 1982. All of these were saved from bankruptcy by
Congress acting as lender of last with the guarantee of freshly printed money
from the Fed. This is inflationary not just in the final stage where money is
sourced from the Fed but in the first, second and all the other intermediary
stages on the way to default. (12)
The main
event in the bail-out Super Bowl has not been played at home. It's the game
between Third World governments and the IMF/World Bank. All of these
non-performing loans to foreign governments cause domestic inflation when the
new money eventually returns to our shores in exchange for our products and
services. Loans to most Third World governments started to fail by 1982. By
1983 third world governments owed $300 billion to banks and $400 billion to
western governments.(13)
In
preparation for the bail-out phase of the international lending Super Bowl, the
U.S. central bank was brought onto the field in 1980, when Congress passed the
Monetary Control Act authorizing the Fed to print money for foreign
governments.(14)
Since then, the size of bailout packages has become mind-boggling.
Mexico is just
one example of the IMF/World Bank Third World bailout system. In 1982 it owed
$85 billion to the banks, an inflationary loss to the American taxpayer which
is being sustained to this day by central banks who initially made new loans
and eventually underwrote almost the entire debt. In 1982 the IMF organized a
$4.5 billion loan from Western central banks, and in 1989, a further $7.5
billion. This is the roll-over and reschedule play, whose purpose is to enable
interest payments to continue on the original non-performing commercial loans
and prevent them going into default and bankrupting the commercial banks.
However the day of reckoning inevitably arrives: Mexico could no longer afford
even the interest payments. On 31 January 1995, President Clinton, acting
independently of Congress, authorized a $50 billion package of loan guarantees:
$20 billion from the U.S Exchange Stabilization Fund, $17.8 billion from the
IMF, $10 billion from the Bank of International Settlements and $3 billion from
commercial banks.(15)
Joseph
Stiglitz declared one of the functions of the central bank /IMF/WorldBank to be
a banker's welfare system. In relation to the $95 billion bailout package
during the 1997 Asian crisis:
The money
served another function: it enabled the countries to provide dollars to the
firms that had borrowed from western bankers to repay the loans. It was thus,
in part, a bailout to the international banks as much as it was to the country.(16)
Whilst the
commercial banks profit from the interest rates, which are often vastly
inflated for debtor governments, the Western taxpayer pays off the loans
through inflation at home. This system is designed to go on forever, draining
the West of its wealth in order to build socialist dictatorships abroad and
enrich the banking elite. The total foreign debt of low and middle income
countries rose from $1.4 trillion in 1990 to $2.3 trillion in 2001.(17)
To
summarize inflation: There are three bands of thieves who work as a cartel. The
central banks acting as lender of last resort have enabled the commercial banks
and the government to expand the money supply at our cost by increasing
government deficit spending, sustaining non-performing loans and bailing out
major corporate failures. Since 1971 when Nixon destroyed the last remnants of
the Gold Standard, the U.S. national debt has increased from $408 billion to
$6.8 trillion, a 1600% increase. In 1971, M3 money supply was $776 billion;
today it stands at $8.9 trillion, a 1100% increase. During that time the dollar
has lost almost 80% of its purchasing power.(18) In addition to all
the other state and federal taxes, the hapless taxpayer has paid another 5% per
year in inflation.(19)
A 1999 UK
Parliamentary report shows that inflation in Britain accelerated after WWII.
The pre-war annual inflation rate was about 2.5% and the post -war rate
averaged 6%. Over the whole century, the Pound lost 98.5% of its purchasing
power.(20)
It is no coincidence that during this period the gap between rich and poor and
the size of government has grown significantly.
DEPRESSIONS:
MONETARY AND FISCAL TIGHTENING
In
Globalization and its Discontents, Joseph Stiglitz describes how the
contractionary policies of the IMF exacerbated the 1997 east Asia crisis. In any
economic downturn, there is a standard government response: stimulate demand by
either cutting taxes, increase expenditures, or loosen monetary policy. The IMF
pushed exactly the opposite course. By continuing to advocate contractionary
policies the IMF caused the contagion to spread from one country to the next as
exports decreased. The IMF monetary remedy was to impose interest rate hikes of
more than 25%, throwing fuel onto the fire.(21) This had the effect of driving
even more capital out of the country as it pushed companies towards bankruptcy.
Furthermore it imposed restructuring in the banking sector which closed down
any banks with significant non-performing loans. In Indonesia, sixteen private
banks were closed which caused a run on the remaining private banks and a
retreat of capital to the state run banks. The effect on the Indonesian banking
system and the economy was disastrous.(22) Riots followed when
welfare, especially food and fuel subsidies for the poor, were cut back.
Businessmen and their families were targeted. This exacerbated the retreat of
capital out of the country since riots do not restore business confidence.
According
to Greg palast's interviews with Stiglitz, "IMF riots" were virtually
written into the 111 conditionalities formulated at the end of the 1980s. One
of the IMF condionalities on Ecuador was to raise the price of cooking gas by
80% at the same time as they were cutting back pensions and laying off
government workers. Poor Andean Indians came down from the hills and set fire
to cars in the capital bringing troops onto the streets.(23) In Argentina, when the banks put
their interest rates up to 21-70%, the government had to change the law against
loan-sharking because the banks would have been in breach of it.
Stiglitz laments
that deepening a recession not only causes more pain today but also more pain
tomorrow. An economy which has a deep recession may grow faster as it recovers,
but it never makes up for lost time. The deeper today's recession, the lower
income is likely to be twenty years from now.(24)
The IMF was
not the first to use fiscal tightening as a weapon of economic warfare. In
1920-21, America went through an agricultural depression. This was caused
solely by the monetary policy of the Government and Federal Reserve. The
farmers had borrowed large amounts of money to buy land at the instance of the
government. They had become very prosperous. However, with an eye on closing
down the smaller banks in the South West, the Wall St. controlled Fed decided
to drastically cut credit in May 1920. Unable to keep up repayments, thousands
of farmers were bankrupted and brought down their local banks with them. G.
Edward Griffin describes this episode as "Country-Duck Dinner in New
York."(25)
However, this was just the starter before the main course. At the behest of the
Wall St. Money Trust, the Open Market Committee was formed in 1922, to
coordinate the purchase of Treasury bonds by the twelve regional Reserve banks.
From 1923 onwards low interest rates caused new money to flood into the
economy causing a massive speculative boom on the stock market. By 1929, half
of retail transactions were on credit.(26) On 9 August 1929, the Fed started
selling Treasury bonds in the open market and reversed its easy credit policy.
It raised interest rates on loans to commercial banks to 6% and the money
supply rapidly contracted; speculators who had borrowed money to purchase
shares could no longer keep up repayments to their brokers. The pin had been
inserted. On 29 October 1929, an avalanche of selling on Wall Street wiped out
millions of investors. The bankers and their preferred clients had exited the
market long before only to re-enter at rock bottom and devour stock like sharks
in a feeding frenzy. Some of the greatest fortunes in America were made in this
fashion.
Today,
consumers in the U.K. and U.S. hold record levels of debt. These extreme debt
ratios make us very vulnerable to the maneuvers used in the past. Figures from
the U.K. Office for National Statistics showed that consumers now owed an
average of £5,330 ( about $8500) in unsecured debt, which excludes mortgages.(27)
CONCLUSION
Fiscal and
monetary policy has been used by the bankers to redistribute wealth to
themselves and the corporations they control as well as to national
governments. Whilst taxation policy is overt, a hidden transfer of wealth is
achieved by monetary policy- the public endure inflation whilst the debtor
governments grow in size and the bankers grow rich collecting interest on the
loans that cause it. The fleecing of the Western taxpayer accelerated during
the post-War period, with the creation of the IMF/World bank.
7.3 FREE
TRADE AGREEMENTS
GATT/WTO
On 1
January 1995, The World Trade Organization replaced The Global Agreement on
Tariffs and Trade (GATT) which had regulated global trade tariffs since 1947.(28) Three months before, Sir James
Goldsmith, a British billionaire,gave a speech to the U.S. senate in which he
warned about the effect global free trade would have on Western employment and
wage levels.(29)
Goldsmith argued that GATT and the theories on which it is based were flawed.
If implemented, it would impoverish and destabilize the industrialized world
while at the same time cruelly ravaging the third world. The principle of
global free trade is that anything can be manufactured anywhere in the world to
be sold anywhere else. That means that these new entrants into the world
economy are in direct competition with the workforces of developed countries.
In most developed countries, the cost to an average manufacturing company of
paying its workforce is an amount equal to between 25 percent and 30 per cent
of sales. If such a company decides to maintain in its home country only its
head office and sales force, while transferring its production to a low-cost
area, it will save about 20 percent of sales volume. For every French employee,
a company could have recruited 47 Vietnamese. Many economists believe that the
growth in service industries will compensate for lost jobs in manufacturing.
However even service industries will be subjected to substantial transfers of
employment to low-cost areas.
On the
other hand, the real cost to consumers of cheaper goods will be that they will
lose their jobs, get paid less for their work and have to face higher taxes to
cover the social cost of increased unemployment. According to figures published
by the U.S. Department of Labor, since 1973 real hourly and weekly earnings, in
inflation-adjusted dollars, have already dropped respectively by 13.4 per cent
and 19.2 per cent, and that was before the 1995 GATT negotiations known as the
Uruguay Round. If 4 billion people enter the same world market for labour and
offer their work at a fraction of the price paid to people in the developed
world, it is obvious that such a massive increase in supply will reduce the
value of labour. Organized labour will lose practically all its negotiating
power.
Regional
free trade zones should only be established between countries with similar
levels of economic development. The 1957 Treaty of Rome between France,
Germany, Italy, Belgium, the Netherlands and Luxembourg created the European
Economic Community, the largest free market in the world. Within the EEC, there
would be no tariffs, no barriers, and a free and competitive market. Trade with
nations outside the EEC would be subject to a single tariff. This concept was known
as community preference. In other words, priority would be given to European
jobs and industry. About twenty years ago, quietly, the technocrats who run
Europe started to alter this fundamental principle and move progressively
towards international free trade. Ever since, unemployment in Europe has
swollen despite growth in GNP. The 1992 Treaty of Maastricht enshrines this
change and makes global free trade one of the fundamental principles on which
the new Europe is to be built.
Regarding
the economic success of Hong Kong, South Korea and Taiwan, special economic
concessions granted by the West combined with their cheap and skilled labour
made them successful. Over the past thirty years the balance of trade between
these countries and the West has resulted in a transfer of tens of billions of
dollars to them. However, a balance of trade in monetary terms can disguise
huge job losses because, as Mr Goldsmith noted, he could employ 47 Vietnamese
for the price of one Frenchman.
JOB LOSSES
DUE TO NAFTA
The U.S.
has lost millions of manufacturing jobs due to a growing trade deficit over the
past three decades. This trend accelerated when The North Atlantic Free Trade
Agreement (NAFTA) was signed by the U.S., Canada and Mexico, designed to remove
tariff barriers over a fifteen year period. NAFTA eliminated 766,030 actual and
potential U.S. jobs between 1994 and 2000 because of the rapid growth in the
net U.S. export deficit with Mexico and Canada. The majority of the job losses
were in the manufacturing sector so workers who found jobs in the service
sector are paid on average 23% less. Almost all new American jobs being created
are in this sector and wages in the manufacturing sector are kept down due to
the threat of job relocation overseas. The growth in U.S. trade and trade
deficits has put downward pressure on the wages of "unskilled" (i.e.,
non-college-educated) workers in the U.S., especially those with no more than a
high school degree. This group represents 72.7% of the total U.S. workforce and
includes most middle and low wage workers. A large body of economic research
has concluded that trade is responsible for at least 15-25% of the growth in
wage inequality in the U.S. (U.S. Trade Deficit Review Commission 2000,
110-18).(30)(31)
In some areas of the U.S. the loss of manufacturing jobs to Mexico has caused
disturbing levels of poverty. Since George Bush won Ohio in the 2000
presidential elections, the state has lost one in six of its manufacturing
jobs. A string of local factories have relocated to Mexico in the last two
years. Two million of the state's 11 million population resorted to food
charities in 2002, an increase of more than 18% from 2001.(32)
WHITE
COLLAR JOB LOSSES
A study by
Forrester Research predicts that U.S. companies will transfer 3.3 million
service jobs overseas by 2015, compared with just 102,000 jobs shifted in 2000.
The job exports are predominantly in the areas of information technology
(including software and product development), customer service, back-office
accounting and sales.(33) On 10 August 2003, USA
Today warned that white collar workers are going to experience the
devastating job losses that occurred in manufacturing in the previous thirty
years. Almost any professional job that can be done long distance is suddenly
up for grabs. Jobs done by financial analysts, architectural drafters,
telemarketers, accountants, claims adjusters, home loan processors and others
at higher levels of the labour food chain are being farmed out to workers in
other countries. "We're not just talking about call-center jobs, but all
kinds of jobs," says Deloitte Consulting analyst Christopher Gentle.
"It doesn't leave any part of the corporation untouched." Major U.S.
companies, including such giants as IBM, Microsoft and Procter & Gamble, are
leading the pack. Tens of thousands of jobs already have been shipped out, and
analysts project that millions more will go -- just as the fragile economy
attempts a rebound. "We see it as a threat to America's middle-class work
force, in terms of wages and benefits," says Marcus Courtney, president of
Washington Alliance of Technology Workers in Seattle. "The service sector
is not immune to the forces of globalization. We're talking about highly
skilled, best-paying jobs. It's raising the concern of workers."(34)
In the
U.K., HSBC Bank just announced that it is shipping 4000 back office jobs from
the U.K. to Asia. By 2006, that will have increased to 7000, 13% of its current
U.K. workforce.(35)
7.4 OPEN
BORDERS
Whilst free-trade
allows capital to travel to developing countries in search of cheap labour, lax
immigration controls have allowed cheap labour to travel to the West in search
of capital.
The
immigrant population in the United States has increased to 33 million, a five
percent increase in the last two years. The new Census Bureau data show that
immigrants account for 11.8 percent of the U.S. population. In California 27%
of the population are foreign born. The immigrant population in the U.S. is now
larger than the entire population of Canada.(36) 9 million Mexicans make up 30% of
these foreign born residents. Over a third of them are illegals.(37)
BLUE
COLLAR WORKERS
Throughout
the economic boom of the 90s, when the unemployment rate got as low as 3.9
percent, economists marveled at the U.S. economy's ability to grow jobs without
sparking wage-led inflation. Many speculated that the waves of low-paid
immigrants had created a "safety valve," keeping average wages low
enough for the economy to grow without an increase in prices. An article in the
Labor Department's "Monthly Labor Review" has laid out just how
important those foreign-born workers were for the U.S economy: foreign-born
workers earned about 75.6 cents for every dollar earned by the native born in
2000.(38)
Economic theory suggests that immigration that is complementary to the native
workforce can boost wages all round. The most extreme example is Middle East
countries that have oil but no oil expertise, so importing oil industry workers
from the West makes the locals rich. In contrast, substitute workers are likely
to reduce the wages of those they compete with in the labour market while
boosting the profits of the owners of capital. However, the lower cost of
production associated with cheaper labour makes goods cheaper and keeps wage
inflation down. George Borjas, professor of political economy at Harvard
University, an authority on the economics of migration, is sceptical of claims
that immigration boosts wages when it goes beyond meeting skills shortages.
"I find very sizeable negative effects of immigration on wages," he
says. "The numerical effect is strong and the statistical significance is
strong. It will turn the economics of migration on its head."(39)
The
National Academy of Sciences estimates that approximately 44 percent of wage
depression among low-skilled Americans ( 70% of workforce) during 1980-1994 was
due to immigration. Also an estimated 1,880,000 American workers are displaced
from their jobs every year by immigration.(40)(41)
The American
food and agriculture system has become dependent on foreign-born workers, a
substantial number of whom are illegals. Until 15 or 20 years ago, meatpacking
plants in the United States were staffed by highly paid, unionized employees
who earned about $18 an hour, adjusted for inflation. Today, the processing and
packing plants are largely staffed by low-paid non-union workers from Mexico
and Guatemala. Many of them start at $6 an hour. A few years ago, the
Immigration and Naturalization Service estimated that about 25 percent of
meatpacking workers in the Midwest were probably illegals.(42) A government study estimated that
nearly 40 percent of farm labourers are illegals.
WHITE
COLLAR WORKERS
Immigration
has also suppressed wages of white collar workers because U.S immigration has
granted huge numbers of working visas. More than 100,000 American computer
programmers are unemployed but when those who are underemployed or working in
other jobs because they cannot find programming jobs, the total grows to about
half a million. At the same time, more than 450,000 H-1B visa workers are
employed as programmers in the United States.(43)
I.T.
companies are subcontracting thousands of jobs to outsourcing companies such as
Tata, Infosys Technologies, and Wipro Technologies, the three largest Indian
software servicing companies, who can provide Indian employees who will work
for a third of the wages.(44) Furthermore a 2001 National
Research Council report found that H-1Bs have an adverse impact on overall wage
levels. The Independent Computer Consultants Association reports that the use
of cheaper foreign labour has forced down the hourly rates of U.S. consultants
by as much as 10 to 40 percent.(45)
BY DESIGN NOT BY
ACCIDENT
None of
this has come about by chance: Since 1986, Congress has passed 7 amnesties for
illegal aliens. The 1986 Immigration Reform and Control Act (IRCA) gave amnesty
- legal forgiveness - to all illegal aliens who had successfully evaded justice
for four years or more or were illegally working in agriculture. As a result,
2.8 million illegal aliens were admitted as legal immigrants to the United
States. Amnesties to date total 3,356,021.(46) Cheered on by editorials in the The
Wall St Journal,(47) President of Mexico
Vincente Fox, is currently negotiating a blanket amnesty of millions of Mexican
workers.(48)
Republicans and Democrats are proposing different pieces of legislation
which, if all passed, would give amnesty to all 8-11 million illegals. This is
one of many steps being taken to merge Mexico and the U.S. as a prelude to a
Pan-American Union from Alaska to Chile.(49)
UK
Research
indicates that, on current trends, we can now expect a net inflow of at least 2
million non E.U. citizens per decade.(50) Total net Immigration
from outside the E.U. has more than trebled in the past five years and is still
rising. Each year nearly a quarter of a million people come to live in Britain.(51)
However
this is nothing compared to the problem looming from the newly enlarged E.U.
The floodgates for cheap labour opened on 1st May 2004 when 10 former Eastern
Bloc countries join the E.U. making their 73 million citizens eligible to work
anywhere within the EEA. Created in 1992 The European Economic Area (EEA)
consists of the 15 member states of the European Union (EU) plus Norway,
Iceland and Liechtenstein. There is free movement of people, goods and services
within the area. So long as nationals of the countries are exercising their
freedoms under these the various treaties, they are not strictly subject to
immigration control, and may work or set up in business without restriction.
These rights extend also to members of the households of EEA nationals
accompanying them to the U.K.. 13 countries have applied to become new members:
10 of these countries -Cyprus, the Czech Republic, Estonia, Hungary, Latvia,
Lithuania, Malta, Poland, the Slovak Republic, and Slovenia joined on 1st May
2004. They are currently known by the term "acceding countries".
Bulgaria and Romania hope to do so by 2007, and Turkey is currently negotiating
its membership.(52)
The E.U.
estimates that around 335,000 people will migrate each year from Eastern Europe
after the barriers to free movement come down, including 100,000 workers. This
may be a deliberate understatement of the tidal wave of cheap labour which is
about to demolish wage levels in Western Europe.(53)
Another
revolution is quietly taking place in another aspect of immigration aimed
directly at the middle class. The Government has been clamping down on illegal
immigration but massively expanding legal migration for skilled workers, most
noticeably through expanding the work permit scheme to about 200,000 people
this year. David Blunkett, the Home Secretary, has said he is proud to have
produced the largest work permit programme of any country. These workers will
be able to bring their families and, on past form, most will be accepted for
settlement after 4-5 years if they so wish. This massive expansion of the work
permit scheme therefore represents a major new avenue of immigration. The
Government has also set up the Highly Skilled Migrant Programme, which has so
far brought in 3,000 of the of the world's brightest and best. The scheme makes
it easier for foreign students to carry on working in the U.K. after their
course finishes. No doubt many will come from poor countries and will accept
significantly lower salaries than native workers.(54)(55)
The effect
of immigration policy on the labour market is the same as in the U.S.. While
the highly skilled in London enjoy wages up to 80 per cent higher than the
national average, a recent report by Incomes Data Services showed that
shelf-fillers in London suffer wages 10 per cent below the national average.
Immigration has pushed unemployment 2 per cent higher than it would otherwise
be. National unemployment has been at just over 5 per cent for two years now,
and in London, where most immigrants live, unemployment is the second highest
in the UK at 6.6 per cent.(56) Britain's top labour
economist, Professor Richard Layard of London School of Economics, who helped
to design Labour's welfare to work programme, stated in a letter to the Financial
Times:
There is a huge
amount of evidence that any increase in the number of unskilled workers lowers
unskilled wages and increases the unskilled unemployment rate. If we are
concerned about fairness, we ought not to ignore these facts. Employers gain
from unskilled immigration. But the unskilled do not.(57)
CONCLUSION
The elite
have promoted free trade and open borders with full knowledge of their
destructive consequences. Poor workers are glad to work for higher wages either
by migrating to the West or by working in the new steel factory at home. This
analysis has not addressed their plight, which is already well documented, but
has shown the serious damage to employment and wage levels in the West.
7.5 THE
ENVIRONMENTAL MOVEMENT
THE REPORT FROM IRON MOUNTAIN, 1966
The purpose
of the study was to analyze methods by which a government can perpetuate itself
in power. The authors concluded that, in the past, war has been the only reliable
means to achieve that goal. Under world government, however, war would be
impossible so the challenge was to find other methods for controlling
populations and keeping them loyal to their leaders. It concluded that a
suitable substitute for war would require a new enemy which posed a frightful
threat to survival. Neither the threat nor the enemy had to be real, they
merely had to be believable. Several surrogates for war were considered,
including a staged space-alien invasion, but the only one holding real promise
was the environmental pollution model. This was viewed as the most likely to
succeed because firstly, it could be related to observable conditions such as
smog and water pollution - in other words, it would be based partly on fact
and, therefore, believable. Secondly, predictions could be made showing
end-of-earth scenarios just as horrible as atomic warfare. Accuracy in these
predictions would not be important. Their purpose would be to frighten, not to
inform. Not only does the environmental pollution model justify expansive and
authoritarian government, it also requires citizens to impoverish themselves
thereby widening the gap between leaders and followers.
Matching
the Iron Mountain brief, part of the environmental movement aims to
reduce living standards in the West, especially in the U.S.. The questionable
intellectual credibility for this plan was provided in the benchmark
publication from Massachusetts Institute of Technology, The Limits To
Growth, commissioned by The Club of Rome in 1972. The book introduced the
concept that the environment would be irrevocably damaged if its "carrying
capacity" was breached. On current trends it predicted total collapse of
industrial civilization in the second half of the twenty-first century unless
capital and population growth were severely limited. Whilst polices designed to
reduce consumption under the rubric of 'sustainable development' are high on
the political agenda, real environmental health and pollution issues are either
being swept under the carpet or being created by the petrochemical-
pharmaceutical cartel. The last chapter of this book proves that,
actually, the elite regard human beings as Earth's primary contaminant.
FINANCING
ENVIRONMENTALISM
A few years
after the Report from Iron Mountain was published in 1966, the
environmental movement was hijacked by the banking cartel. Instead of staying
focused on scientific study of conservation, it became a catch-all for a
radical political agenda, now spearheaded by ex-KGB chief Mikhail Gorbachev and
his Western banker colleague Stephen Rockefeller.(58)
Dr Michael
Coffman's fascinating article Why Property Rights Matter, details the
high-level funding of environmentalism:
In a
dazzling display of raw power, foundations with interlocking directorates
funded the Nature Conservancy in 1996 to the tune of $203,886,056, or 60
percent of its annual revenue. Initially the foundations banded together under
the name Environmental Grantmakers Affinity Group of the Council on
Foundations. Under the umbrella of Rockefeller Family Fund 136 foundations
formed the Environmental Grantmakers Association (EGA) in 1987 which has grown
to over 200 by the end of the twentieth century. Congressman Richard Pombo
(R-CA) claimed in 1999 that there are "3,400 full time employees,
including leaders who often make $150,000 or more, as well as a small army of
outside contractors such as scientists, lobbyists, lawyers, and public affairs
specialists" in Washington DC. Citing a 1999 Boston Globe article,
Congressman Pombo said: …"foundations invest at least $400 million a year
in environmental advocacy and research. The largest environmental grant-maker,
Pew Charitable Trusts, gives more than $35 million annually to environmental
groups ".....When the additional 2,300 foundations that donate to
environmental activism are considered, plus the billion dollars or so
contracted to environmental organizations by various agencies of the federal
government, the Boston Globe [ newspaper] estimates the total funding for
environmental activism to be around four billion dollars annually!".(59)
Substantial
financing and leadership of the United Nations came directly from the corporate
elite as well as from national governments. In 1946 John D. Rockefeller
Jr. brought the U.N. to America by gifting $8 million for the purchase of the
land for the U.N. building in New York. Canadian multi-billionaire and
Rockefeller associate, Maurice Strong, was the first Director of the U.N.
Environmental Program (UNEP) created after The Stockholm Conference, ('Earth
Summit 1') in 1972. Mr Strong was secretary general of all three Earth Summits
1972, 1992, and 1997. He initiated The Earth Charter Project in 1994, the 'Ten
Commandments' of sustainable development. Gorbachev was co-chair of The Earth
Charter Commission and Stephen Rockefeller was Chair of the drafting committee.
The ceremony to launch the Earth Charter initiative in May 2000, involved the
presentation of the document to regular Bilderberg attendee, Her Majesty Queen
Beatrix of The Netherlands. This illustrates how top-down the environmental
movement is, despite its significant grass-roots support.(60)
The Earth
Charter developed an earlier Rockefeller initiative, the 1972 Rockefeller
Brothers Fund report entitled Use of Land: A Citizen's Policy Guide
to Urban Growth. This was a bench-mark publication on subjecting property
rights to government censure.(61) Ted Turner is another
multi-billionaire environmentalist. In September 1997 he set up The United
Nations Foundation to distribute funds to U.N programmes with a gift of (U.S.)
$1 billion.(62) Former Nazi SS officer and I.G.
Farben employee, Prince Bernhard of The Netherlands was one of the founders of
The World Wildlife Fund in 1961.(63) Britain's Prince
Philip was the first President of the World Wildlife Fund UK (WWF) from its
formation in 1961 to 1982, and International President of WWF (later the World
Wide Fund for Nature) from 1981 to 1996. Since 1985, World Wildlife Fund has
invested over 1.5 billion dollars in 11,000 projects in 130 countries.(64) Prince Philip also founded the
Alliance of Religions and Conservation in 1995.(65) Prince Charles set up
The Prince of Wales Business Leaders Forum in 1990 to promote environmental
issues in the business world and it now has support from 65 major multinational
corporations.(66)
RURAL
CLEANSING
Less than 5
percent of the U.S. is urban, but urban areas comprise 77.2 percent of the
population. The population density in the U.S. is only 77.7 people per square
mile, compared to the U.K. which is 629.4. The reason the environmental lobby
has been so successful in the U.S. since the 1970's is that the courts have
generally ruled in favour of the primacy of public use when judging property
rights. In the spirit of Rousseau, the thrust of the 1972 Use of Land report
supported the premise that development rights of private property owners should
be censured by the government. Environmental protection areas would be
protected "not by purchase but through the police power of the federal
government." The Endangered Species Act was passed the following year, a
key weapon for restricting property rights.
The
plundering of rural America has gotten so bad that a Wall Street Journal editorial
on 26 July 2001, called it "rural cleansing". The WSJ cites
the case in which the federal court forced the Bureau of Reclamation to cut off
irrigation water in April 2001 that undeniably belonged to 1400 farmers in the
Klamath Basin Irrigation Project, a watershed straddling the California and
Oregon border. The action turned their once lush green farmland to swirling
dust reminiscent of the Oklahoma dust bowl days of the 1930s Great Depression.
The suit began in 1988 when two sucker fish were listed as
"endangered" under the Endangered Species Act of 1973. The coho
salmon was later added as a threatened species. Citing the U.S. Endangered
Species Act, Oregon District Judge Ann Aiken ruled in Federal Court on April 6,
2001, to give all the water to the endangered species. The decision was the
result of a lawsuit brought by the Oregon Natural Resources Council (ONRC).(67)
The WSJ claimed
, "The goal of many environmental groups - from the Sierra Club to
the…ONRC - is no longer to protect nature. It is to expunge humans from the
countryside." Just as in the Klamath basin example, the WSJ
determined that,
The
strategy of these environmental groups is almost always the same: to sue or
lobby the government into declaring rural areas off-limits to people who live
and work there. The tools for doing this are the Endangered Species Act and
local preservation laws, most of which are so loosely crafted as to allow a
wide leeway in their implementation. In some cases the owners loose their
property outright. More often the environmentalists' goal is to have
restrictions placed on the land that either render it unusable or persuade
owners to leave of their own accord.
Congressman
Richard Pombo laments this attack on America's natural resource-based
industries:
Federal policies
implemented as a result of environmental advocacy financed by private
foundations are trampling on property rights. They are shutting down the timber
industry, the mining industry and the oil and gas industry. These policies are
creating misery in rural areas dependent on resource production. Small
communities and families in rural areas are reeling, while environmental groups
are collecting rewards of six figure grants from rich, private foundations. Why
is this sort of activity subsidized by the taxpayer?
The land
grab is also being directed by the federal government. President Clinton used
the 1906 Antiquities Act to set aside tens of millions of acres of federal land
as national monuments preventing any commercial use. In 1998 he initiated the
Clean Water Action Plan which withdraws thousands of miles of federal roads and
also imposes buffer zones of natural habitat on private land along millions of
miles of streams and rivers.(68) Following the 1968 U.N. Conference
on Man and the Biosphere, the U.S. government instituted their own program
called The United States Man and the Biosphere Program-U.S. MAB. There are
currently 47 biosphere reserves and 20 World Heritage Sites in America, as
designated by the U.N.. The counties surrounding the biosphere reserves/World
Heritage Sites are "buffer zones." At some point there will be no
human activity in the biospheres and the buffer zones are to protect the
biospheres where there will be limited human activity.(69) This plan first appeared as part of
The Wildlands Project, a grandiose design to transform 50% of the U.S. into a
biosphere cleansed of modern industry and private property and the rest into
buffer zones. The U.S. Senate came close to endorsing this plan in 1994 when
considering ratifying the U.N. Biodiversity Treaty. At the eleventh hour it was
pointed out that the study on which the Treaty was based, the 1994 Global
Biodiversity Assessment, endorsed the Wildlands Project strategy.(70) The Biodiversity Treaty also
proposes an unaccountable U.N. Trusteeship Council to regulate any human
activity that presents potential harm to biological diversity.
With 1.8
million acres Ted Turner, billionaire and radical environmentalist, is now the
largest land owner in America. According to Forbes Magazine,
Despite his
reputation as a die-hard conservationist, the cable pioneer makes plenty of
money off his land. He sells bison meat to restaurants (including his own). He
opened some of his New Mexico holdings to gas and coal exploration. Timber is
harvested and sold. Hunting and fishing fees generate $5 million a year.
"I'm doing things as natural as I can and trying to make some money at the
same time" (71)
URBAN
SPRAWL?
The key
principles of The Use of Land were adopted at the 1976 U.N. Conference
on Human Settlements (Habitat I) held in Vancouver:
Land... cannot
be treated as an ordinary asset, controlled by individuals and subject to the
pressures and inefficiencies of the market. Private land ownership is also a
principal instrument of accumulation and concentration of wealth and therefore
contributes to social injustice... Public control of land use is therefore
indispensable.
"Smart
growth" advocates seek to preserve land in a natural or agricultural state
by encouraging individuals to live in denser communities that take up smaller
tracts of land per housing unit. Such communities also encourage residents to
rely more on walking or public transit than on cars for mobility, and they more
closely mix retail and other commercial facilities with residential units to
foster easy access to jobs and shopping. The density of the average U.S.
suburban area is 1-3 housing units per acre. The Sierra Club's definition of
urban efficiency is 100 units per acre. Reaching that goal, however, would
require living arrangements that are 2.4 times as dense as all Manhattan, twice
as dense as central Paris, and ten times that of San Francisco. At least
nineteen states have state growth-management laws or task forces to protect
farmland and open space. Dozens of cities and counties have adopted urban
growth boundaries to contain development and prevent the spread of urbanization
to outlying and rural areas. Portland Oregon is a model for smart growth and
since the 1970s it has had the most stringent planning laws in the U.S..(72) The Federal Department of Housing
and Urban Development (HUD) partially funded a 2002 report called Growing
Smart Legislative Guidebook: Model Statutes for Planning and the Management of
Change by the American Planning Association (APA). This report not only
applies the smart growth principle to future land use, but also to current land
use by introducing the idea of "amortization of non-conforming uses.
" This will require the local government to seize property without just
compensation where property owners fail to adjust the use of their property to
fit revised zoning ordinances or new plans for a particular geographical area
in the community.(73)
REGULATING
CONSUMPTION
One of the
key concepts of the sustainable development agenda is "Factor 10".
This theory proposes exponential decrease in resource use especially in OECD
countries which are required to reduce material consumption by 90%. (74) The 1994 statement of
the Factor Ten Club demands and end to private property:
The process of
dematerialization must involve a shift in thinking toward the 'life-cycle'
approach, meaning that improvements are in no way limited to products, but can
and will have to incorporate changes in the way products are produced,
packaged, transported, sold, used, reused, cascaded, recycled and disposed
of... Use-sharing, renting, leasing and borrowing are just a few examples of
concepts which result in reduced material flows.
It
also demands increasing the cost of capital (natural resources) in relation to
labour using taxation.(75)
Whereas the
first U.N. Habitat Conference in 1974 dealt with land use issues, Habitat II in
June 1996 dealt with consumption issues. The underlying theme was that people
of the world would have to pay a tax for the usage or depletion of a resource
in addition to the service provided. Therefore, if you pay $1.00 per thousand
cubic feet for water consumed, they are then saying that they want you to pay
another $1.00 for the depletion of the water used. What the World Bank and IMF
are working on is to find a formula to measure how much a person produces at
their job and at home. From that amount they would then subtract out how much
of the Earth's resources they use such as water, energy, food, material, heat,
etc.. If the net figure is a plus, the person is adding back to the Earth's
resources. If it is a negative, he is taking away from the earth's resources
and is therefore a bad global citizen.(76)
The
conference identified Public-Private Partnership as instrumental to this task.
The Public-Private Partnerships for the Urban Environment initiated by the
United Nations Development Programme (UNDP) became operational in 1996, the
year of the Habitat II conference. (77) This is the key
socio-economic component of the global feudal state. Whilst property is
transferred into the hands of a private ruling elite, the use of that property
by the masses will be regulated by a large body of laws restricting consumption
and consumer choice.
As
described in chapter 6, Prince Charles' Prince of Wales Business Leaders Forum
(PWBLF) was set up in 1990 to promote Public-Private Partnership. The official
website of PWBLF makes specific reference to key role of PPP market regulation
in the New World Order:
The
International Business Leaders Forum is an international educational charity
set up in 1990 to promote responsible business practices internationally that
benefit business and society, and which help to achieve social, economic and
environmentally sustainable development, particularly in new and emerging
market economies. From the outset, the Forum has pursued three pathways:
· in making
the case that in the new world order,[emphasis added] well-led and competitive
businesses have a positive role to play in development challenges, through
responsible core business practices and engagement with society
· in showing
that - while partnership and collective action is difficult - in the networked
society it is essential to combine business skills and resources with community
support and public accountability
· in demonstrating
that scale can only be achieved and economic exclusion addressed through
`enabling environments' in which governments, international institutions and
the media play a part.(78)
This is
preparation for the strait jacket of U.N. environmental and social legislation
being fastened onto to the global economy. its main purpose is to reducing
living standards, restrict consumer choice, and limit property rights in order
to empower the ruling elite.
THE GLOBAL
WARMING SCAM
Whilst
there are many real and serious environmental problems, man-made global warming
is a contrived political issue. The end of earth scenarios linked to global
warming have been successful in mobilizing public opinion in favour of reducing
industrial activity in order to cut CO2 emissions. However, an independent
petition organized by the Oregon Institute for Science and Medicine signed by
17,000 independent scientists states that increased CO2 levels do not cause
deleterious changes in climate or weather; indeed they lead to increased plant
growth.(79)
Iron
Mountain style propaganda has resulted in a raft of anti-car measures being
introduced across the developed world. Private motoring has to rank as one of
the highest achievements in personal freedom of the twentieth century. Now the
elite are doing everything possible to curtail that freedom. A tax on carbon is
now one of the major proposals of advocates of global taxation(80) and the U.K.
government has already announced plans to impose satellite vehicle tracking and
road tolls (see chapter 12).
7.6 WAR AS
A MEANS OF PLANNED WASTE
The
blueprint for the economic destruction of the U.S through war is the policy
paper entitled Rebuilding America's Defenses written by the
neo-conservative think-tank Project for the New American Century in year 2000.
(81) It recognizes the need to pursue an indeterminate series of wars in order
to protect American interests. The U.S. Government has also stated that the War
on Terror may never end.
In 1984
George Orwell outlined the real Machiavellian purpose of war:
The primary
aim of modem warfare... is to use up the products of the machine without
raising the general standard of living... The essential act of war is
destruction, not necessarily of human lives, but of the products of human
labour. War is a way of shattering to pieces, or pouring into the stratosphere,
or sinking into the depths of the sea, materials which might otherwise be used
to make the masses too comfortable...
The Report
From Iron Mountain repeats Orwell's conclusion:
The
production of weapons of mass destruction has always been associated with
economic "waste." The term is pejorative, since it implies a failure
of function. But no human activity can properly be considered wasteful if it
achieves its contextual objective... In the case of military "waste,"
there is indeed a larger social utility. In advanced modern democratic
societies, the war system... has served as the last great safeguard against the
elimination of necessary social classes... The continuance of the war system
must be assured, if for no other reason, among others, than to preserve
whatever quality and degree of poverty a society requires as an incentive, as
well as to maintain the stability of its internal organization of power.
7.7
CRIMINALIZING SOCIETY
OVERALL ECONOMIC COSTS OF CRIME
U.S.
expenditure on prisons is currently $ 46 billion a year. The overall cost of
crime in terms of lost productivity is in excess of $1 trillion per year.(82) Put another way, total loss of
productivity due to crime is 10% of GDP (10.4 trillion in 2002). Including
stolen assets the figure is $1.7 trillion. This has not come about by chance.
Increasing the crime rate has been deliberate policy of the U.S. government
over the last two decades and drug crime has been central to it.
THE WAR ON
DRUGS
The total
economic cost of drug abuse and drug crime in the U.S between 1992 and 2000 is
calculated at $1.1 trillion, increasing each year from $102 billion in 1992 to
$160 billion in 2000.(83) Lost productivity
accounted for 69% and health costs 9%. Imprisonment is the single largest cause
of lost productivity, accounting for 30% of the total.
THE
COCAINE IMPORT AGENCY (CIA)
In March
1998, the CIA Inspector General testified that there had existed a secret
agreement between the CIA and the Justice Department, wherein "during the
years 1982 to 1995, the CIA did not have to report the drug trafficking by its assets
to the Justice Department."(84)(85) As Michael Levine
commented,
"..[to]a
trained DEA agent this literally means that the CIA had been granted a license
to obstruct justice in our so-called war on drugs; a license that lasted, so
the CIA claims, from 1982 to 1995." That understanding remained in effect
until August of 1995, when Attorney General Janet Reno rescinded the agreement.
The CIA collusion with allied drug traffickers led to the formation of a
protected narcotics pipeline, resulting an increase in supply and drop in
price. Former DEA agents have repeatedly pointed out that 50%-70% of the
cocaine entering the U.S. went via drug cartels that enjoyed CIA protection.(86)
Despite the
exponential growth in spending on the alleged "drug war", illicit
drugs are cheaper and purer than they were two decades ago, and continue to be
readily available. Between 1981 and 1998, the price of heroin and cocaine
dropped sharply while their levels of purity rose.
DRUG
OFFENDERS ACCOUNT FOR THE EXPLODING PRISON POPULATION
In 2001 the
Federal Bureau of Investigation's Uniform Crime Reports (UCR) estimated that
there were 1,586,900 State and local arrests for drug abuse violations in the
U.S. an increase of 200% from the half million in arrests 1982 when the War on
Drugs began. This accounted for 11.5% of all arrests.(87) The War on Drugs has
resulted in the arrest, prosecution and incarceration of tens of thousands of
persons each year for crimes associated with the sale, possession and use of
illegal drugs. 500,000 drug offenders are in prison, 25% of a two million
prison population.(88)
In 1986 and
1988 Congress enacted mandatory minimum sentencing laws, which forced judges to
deliver fixed sentences to individuals convicted of a crime, regardless of
culpability or other mitigating factors. The most common mandatory sentences
are for 5 and 10 years, and are based on the weight of the drug or the presence
of a firearm. Simple possession of any quantity of powder cocaine by first-time
offenders is considered a misdemeanor, punishable by no more than one year in
prison but simple possession of crack cocaine results in a five-year mandatory
sentence.(89)
The average sentence for a first time, non-violent drug offender is longer than
the average sentence for rape, child molestation, bank robbery or manslaughter.(90) While the intent
was to punish high-level drug offenders, the laws have had the opposite
effect-jailing low-level drug offenders for unusually long sentences.
Enforcement agencies focus their efforts on those minor actors in the trade who
are the most easily arrested, prosecuted, and penalized, rather than on the
middle and high-level criminals who are drug dealing's true masterminds and
profiteers who are able to trade information in return for significantly reduced
prison sentences.
Before the
sentencing guideline concept took root, however, state lawmakers began enacting
mandatory minimum penalties for drugs. This began in 1973 with the passage of
the notorious "Rockefeller drug laws" in New York (named after then
Gov. Nelson Rockefeller) requiring mandatory 15-year prison sentences for sales
of small amounts of narcotics.(91)
THE PRISON
ECONOMY
By
increasing rates of crime and incarceration, the U.S. Government has not only
reduced living standards but has laid the foundations for the new coercion
economy. The warning from past and present events is that private corporations
can meet a substantial portion of their labour requirements through slave
labour. There's nothing wrong with putting prisoners to work providing they are
genuine criminals and basic human rights are upheld. However, in both Nazi
Germany and modern day China, slave labourers were not criminals, they were
enemies of the state or targets of genocide; they were ruthlessly abused,
tortured and murdered. Private corporations were glad to use labour under these
conditions. For this reason, the exponential growth of the U.S. prison
population accompanied by a deterioration of civil liberties is cause for
serious concern. Also, when prison labour starts to become significant, as it
now is in China, that has a negative effect on wage and employment levels.
The number
of inmates in state and federal prisons has increased more than six-fold from
less than 200,000 in 1970 to 1,440,655 by the end 2002. An additional 665,475
are held in local jails. As of 30 June 2002, the nation's prison and jail
population exceeded 2 million for the first time in history. At the end of
2002, 1 of every 143 Americans was incarcerated, the highest incarceration rate
in the world. The number of persons on probation and parole has been growing
dramatically along with institutional populations. There are now 6.7 million
Americans incarcerated or on probation or parole, an increase of more than 265
percent since 1980.(92)
In
the U.K. the prison population was about 45,000 in 1990. By 2009 it could be as
high as 107,000 according to home office predictions.(93)
The 1979
U.S. Federal Prison Industries Enhancement Certification Program gave private
industry the green light to put state and federal prison inmates to work. Major
companies such as Texas Instruments, Honeywell, Hewlett-Packard, Siemens,
Microsoft and Boeing sub-contract some low-end assembly work to prisons. They
can pay the same or lower wages as they would in Mexico but can use the 'made
in USA' label.(94) (95)
In July 2003 Dell Computer Corp. was admonished by an environmental group
for running a primitive recycling operation that exposed prisoners to toxic
chemicals.(96)
NAZI SLAVE
LABOUR
The use of
slave labour by two major German industrial giants was scrutinized at the
Nuremberg Trials. I.G. Farben had an estimated 83,000 slaves at its Auschwitz
factory and Krupp industries use around 75,000 slaves. However the full scale
of slave labour was brought to light in 1999 when The American Jewish Committee
presented the results of their investigations.(97) Aware of this
investigation, major companies employed their own historians to look for
skeletons in their closets. Deutsche Bank's company historian discovered that
it helped finance the construction of Auschwitz from which tens of thousands of
slaves were taken.(98)
In February
1999 thirteen major corporations who used slave labour came clean and agreed to
set up a compensation fund for the victims to head off law suits: Allianz AG,
BASF AG, Bayer AG, BMW AG, DaimlerChrysler AG, Deutsche Bank AG, Degussa-Hüls
AG, Dresdner Bank AG, Friedr. Krupp AG, Hoesch-Krupp, Hoechst AG, Siemens AG
and Volkswagen AG. In December 1999, The American Jewish Committee produced a
list of 257 companies that used slave labour. More than 50 companies on AJC's
initial list of 257 firms, including multi-nationals Shell & DEA Oil GmbH,
and Ford Motor Co, joined the general compensation fund. Ten days after the
list was issued, negotiators agreed on a fund totaling $5.2 billion dollars.
Professor Ulrich Herbert of, University of Freiburg, an expert on Nazi slave
labour points out that the firms identified on the AJC list account for just a
fraction of all German companies that used slave or forced labour. Indeed,
virtually every industrial company of any size in Germany used slave or forced
labour. The total number of slaves is estimated at 12 million. German
historians estimate that of the thousands of companies that used forced and
slave labour, more than 500 are still in operation.(99)(100)
The compensation
fund is now called The German Economy Foundation Initiative, whose stated
purpose is,
...guaranteeing that all German companies, including foreign affiliates
and parent companies, will be protected against lawsuits relating to the Nazi
era and that they will be able to work on international markets under
conditions of comprehensive and lasting legal security.(101)
CHINA
The Laogai
Research Foundation is a non-profit organization dedicated to collecting
information about China's vast system of forced-labour camps. The foundation
was started by Hongda Harry Wu, who has written three books on his experiences
as a Chinese prisoner for over 19 years. Currently, there are estimated eight
million prisoners in China's slave labour camp system known as 'Laogai'. As a
tool of political repression, the Laogai serves to silence all voices of
political dissent throughout China. Once in the Laogai, inmates are forced to
confess their "crimes," denounce any anti-Party beliefs and submit to
a regime of reeducation and labour. Although Chinese law forbids torture and
the use of torture to extract confessions, the practice remains widespread in
the Laogai. Anyone in China can be held for up to three years in with no trial
or sentencing procedure of any kind. All that is necessary is the directive of
any official in China's Public Security Bureau. All prisoners in the Laogai are
forced to labour. Labour conditions vary from region to region and camp to
camp. There are many reports of prisoners working up to 16 to 18 hours a day to
meet labour quotas that are enforced through withholding of food rations.
Prisoners also often labour in highly unsafe conditions including work in mines
and with toxic chemicals. Sometimes conditions are less arduous with more
reasonable working hours and more humane treatment. Prisoners do not receive
payment for their labour or any profit generated from the products they
produce. According to documented evidence gathered by the Laogai Research
Foundation and other human rights and media organizations, the practice of
harvesting the organs of executed prisoners in China began sometime in the late
1970s. Organs harvested from prisoners are used in transplant operations for
privileged Chinese and for foreigners. According to the statistics of Amnesty
International, China executes more prisoners every year than the rest of the
world combined.
The
deliberate application of forced labour by the Chinese government has spawned
an entirely new field in China's economy: the economics of slavery. One
theorist clearly defined this policy in the following statement:
The
fundamental task of our Laogai facilities is punishing and reforming criminals.
To define their function concretely, they fulfill tasks in the following three
ways: (1) Punishing criminals and putting them under surveillance; (2)
Reforming criminals; (3) organizing criminals in labour and production, thus
creating wealth for society. Our Laogai units are both facilities of
dictatorship and special enterprises.
- Criminal Reform Handbook, PRC
Ministry of Justice, Laogai Bureau,Shaanxi People's Publishers, 1988 (102)
Western
companies are still using slave labour today on a huge scale by trading with
China. The U.S. imports approximately $70 billion worth of Chinese goods.(103) The import of Chinese
forced labour-made goods into the U.S. is illegal, according to section 1307 of
the Tariff Act of 1930, which makes it is illegal to import any product that is
produced in whole or in part by prison labour of any kind. In 1992, the need to
directly confront the Chinese regarding this issue became apparent, leading to
the signing of a document known as the "Memorandum of Understanding
Between the United States of America and the People's Republic of China on
Prohibiting Import and Export Trade in Prison Labor Products". In the most
recent State Department Report on Human Rights from 1999, U.S. authorities
admit that the MOU has been "nearly impossible" to enforce and that
Chinese authorities have been "uncooperative. When a product is labeled
"Made in China," it may hide the fact that it was made in the Laogai
by Chinese prisoners. Until China reveals the extent of their Laogai
production, and U.S. companies are willing to release the location of all of
their manufacturing facilities in China, there is no way for the Western
consumer to be certain that s/he is not financially contributing to the Laogai
system.
Examples
include Chrysler's joint venture in China to make Cherokees called Beijing Jeep
Company and Volkswagen's joint venture in China to make the Santana model
called Shanghai Volkswagen Automobile Company. The Laogai foundation
investigation showed they were sourcing parts from prison labour.(104) The success of
China's prison economy is evidenced by all the "made in China" toys
in our shops. The China National Toy Association (CNTA) is actually a front for
People's Armed Police (PAP) and the Chinese Army (PLA) Laogai system.(105)
7.8
DISEASE
Spending on
health care in the U.S. is projected to rise from 14% of GDP (2000) ($1.42 trillion
), to 17% in 2011.(106) Total health care
expenditure in the E.U. averages 8% of GDP. (107) The pharmaceutical companies
are the major beneficiaries of disease as indicated by their market value. At
the time of writing, Britain's GlaxoSmithKline was Britain's fourth largest
company. Pfizer was America's fourth largest company and the fourth largest in
the world. Novartis was Switzerland's largest company, 35% larger than second
place Nestle. The world's top ten drug/healthcare companies had a total market
value of $ 1.1 trillion (see chapter 2).
What we are
witnessing is on the one hand is a form of indenture through illness, a
pharmaceutical feudalism. As disease increases so does the tariff that society
pays to the petrochemical sorcerers who provide symptomatic treatments and
abuse their power over medical research to block any curative or preventative
treatments. However the other Orwellian economic goal of public health policy
is to make us poorer. Nothing illustrates this second point better than the
emergence of extremely disabling new diseases during the 1980s which are
described in the final chapter of this book. The economic consequences of
Western public health policy are clear from the statistics of disability,
unemployment and healthcare spending. The percentage of the population who are
disabled is similar in Europe and the U.S.. In the E.U., disability is
estimated to affect 10-20% of each country's population and the U.K. and U.S.
both have 15% disabled.(108)(109) So much for the
medical 'breakthroughs' of the twentieth century. In the U.K. 3.8 million
disabled people of working age are out of work, 11% of the total 34 million of
working age. In the U.S., 13 million disabled people of working age are out of
work 8.5% of the total 159 million of working age. Incomes of households with
at least one disabled person are 20-30% lower than the incomes of all
households. For Federal Reserve Bank Chairman Paul Volcker and Co. who require
a substantial decline in living standards in the West, these statistics
represent success not failure of the healthcare system.
CONCLUSION
The dream of prosperity
for all is dying out around the world. Developing countries which had an
expanding middle class in the early 1980s have been ransacked. Almost 5 billion
people on the planet do not have basic property rights enjoyed in the West. At the
same time, Westerners are getting poorer year by year. In the U.K., the
enormous increase in house prices has made home ownership an impossibility for
most young people.
Chapter 7
End Notes
1. George Orwell, 1984, part
3 chapter 2. Full text available on-line at http://www.mondopolitico.com/library/1984/1984_c21.htm
2. Special Report: America
Celebrates Tax Freedom Day, The Tax Foundation, April 2003.
http://www.taxfoundation.org/SR122.pdf
3. Jane Hough, The Burden of
Taxation, economic policy and statistics section, House of Commons
library,10 May 2001, ref. 01/51, appendix.
See http://www.parliament.uk/commons/lib/research/rp2001/rp01-051.pdf
4. Technical Appendix, Tax
Freedom Day website.
See http://www.taxfreedomday.co.uk/technical-appendix.htm
5. How The UK Compares, Tax
Freedom Day website. See http://www.taxfreedomday.co.uk/uk-compares.htm
6. New Study Profiles Total Tax
Burden of Median American Family, The Tax Foundation, 9 March 2000
http://www.taxfoundation.org/prmedianfamily.html
7. Jane Hough op cit., p.21 Table 4
8. Dean Stansel, The Hidden
Burden Of Taxation: How the Government Reduces Take-Home Pay, Cato
Policy Analysis No 302, 15 April 1998. See http://www.cato.org/pubs/pas/pa-302.html
9. Isabelle Joumard, Tax systems
in European Union Countries, OECD, economics department working papers No.
301, 29 June 2001, ref ECO/WKP(2001)27 pp.10-16. See
http://www.oecd.org/dataoecd/4/7/1897173.pdf
10. Alan Greenspan, Gold and
Economic Freedom, The Objectivist,1966. See http://www.gold-eagle.com/greenspan041998.html
11. Ron Paul, Congressman, speech in
the House, Money as a Moral Issue, Paper Money and Tyranny, 5 September
2003. See
http://www.house.gov/paul/congrec/congrec2003/cr090503.htm
12. G. Edward Griffin, The
Creature from Jekyll Island, American Media, Fourth Edition, 2002, Ch. 3
13. Ibid., pp.116 and 120
14. Ibid., p.115
15. Ibid. pp116-119
16. Joseph Stiglitz, Globalization
and its Discontents, Penguin Books, 2002, p.95
17. 2003 World Development
Indicators, The World Bank, 4.16 External Debt, pp 246 -249. See
http://www.worldbank.org/data/wdi2003/pdfs/table%204-16.pdf
18. Today's Conditions, Ron
Paul op cit.
http://www.house.gov/paul/congrec/congrec2003/cr090503.htm
19. U.S. Inflation Rates, Simple
and User Friendly Calculator-Database Applications, Russell Software Inc.
See. http://www.russellsoftware.com/inflarates.htm
20. Joe Hicks & Grahame Allen, A
Century of Change:Trends in UK Statistics since 1900, social and general
statistics section, House of Commons library, ref. 99/111, 21 Dec.1999.
See http://www.parliament.uk/commons/lib/research/rp99/rp99-111.pdf
21. Sliglitz, op cit., p109
22. Ibid., pp.116-117
23. World Bank Secret Documents
Consumes Argentina: Alex Jones Interviews Greg Palast,
4 March 2002. Transcript at Greg
Palast's website. See
http://www.gregpalast.com/detail.cfm?artid=125&row=1
24. Stiglitz, op cit., p.122
25. Griffin, op cit., Ch 23
26. Ibid., p.487
27. Rate rise forecast prompts
debt warning, BBC, London, 6 November 2003. See
http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/business/3245969.stm
28. W.T.O. website.
See http://www.wto.org/english/thewto_e/gattmem_e.htm
29. Sir James Goldsmith, The New
Utopia: GATT and Global Free Trade, Federal Document Clearing House
Congressional Testimony,
Senate Commerce GATT Implementation, 5 October 1994. See
http://desip.igc.org/gatt01.html
30. Robert E. Scott, NAFTA's
Hidden Costs: Trade agreement results in job losses,
growing inequality, and wage suppression for the United States, Economic
Policy Institute, April 2001.
See http://www.epinet.org/content.cfm/briefingpapers_nafta01_us
31. Dean Baker and Mark Weisbrot, Will
new trade gains make us rich? An assessment of the prospective gains from new
trade agreements, Center for Economic Policy and Policy Research
3 October 2001.
See http://www.cepr.net/will_new_trade_gains_make_us_ric.htm
32. Long queue at drive-in soup
kitchen, A Special Report, The Guardian, London, 3 November
2003. See http://www.guardian.co.uk/uselections2004/story/0,13918,1076608,00.html
33. Philipp Harper, Will your job
move to India?, MSNBC Money Central, 30 Sept 2003. See
http://moneycentral.msn.com/content/invest/extra/P62115.asp
34. Michelle Kessler and Stephanie
Armour, Increasing export of white-collar jobs is cause for concern, USA
Today, 10 August 2003. See copy on the website of The Salt Lake Tribune
http://www.sltrib.com/2003/Aug/08102003/business/82527.asp
35. Anger as HSBC cuts 4,000 UK
jobs, BBC, London, 17 October 2003. See http://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/business/3199598.stm
36. Immigrant Population Climbs
to 33 Million, Federation for American Immigration reform website, October
2003. See
http://www.fairus.org/Research/Research.cfm?ID=2186&c=54
37. Immigration's Impact on the
U.S, op cit..
See http://www.fairus.org/Research/Research.cfm?ID=2174&c=2
38. John McAuley, Immigrants Keep
U.S. Economy Supple, Minnesota Star Tribune, 4 Sept. 2002. See copy on
Numbers USA website http://www.numbersusa.com/text?ID=1259
39. Anthony Browne, Cost of the
migration revolution, The Times, London, 01 March 2003.
See http://www.timesonline.co.uk/article/0,,630-595093,00.html
40. Lower Wages for American
Workers, Federation for American Immigration Reform (F.A.I.R.),October
2002.
See http://www.fairus.org/
ImmigrationIssueCenters/ImmigrationIssueCenters.cfm?ID=1211&c=15
41. National Academy of Sciences
Immigration Study, F.A.I.R., October 1997.
See http://www.fairus.org/ImmigrationIssueCenters/
ImmigrationIssueCenters.cfm?ID=1223&c=15
42. David Barboza, 'Meatpackers'
Profile Hinges on Pool of Immigrant Labor'
New York Times, 21 December 2001.
See copy on Numbers USA website http://www.numbersusa.com/text?ID=885
43. High-tech worker visas, Numbers
USA website, 2003
http://www.numbersusa.com/interests/hightech.html
44. Brian Grow with Manjeet
Kripalani, A Visa Loophole as Big as a Mainframe, BusinessWeek,
10 March 2003. See
http://www.businessweek.com/magazine/
content/03_10/b3823111_mz021.htm
45. Deleting American Workers:
Abuse of the Temporary Foreign Worker System in the High Tech Industry. Federation
for American Immigration reform website, 2003. See
http://www.fairus.org/Research/Research.cfm?ID=1614&c=55
46. Why Amnesty Isn't the
Solution, F.A.I.R. See
http://www.fairus.org/ImmigrationIssueCenters/
ImmigrationIssueCenters.cfm?ID=1185&c=13
http://www.numbersusa.com/interests/amnesty.html
47. Robert L. Bartley, Open Nafta
Borders? Why Not?, The Wall St Journal Editorial Page, 2 July
2001. See
http://www.opinionjournal.com/columnists/rbartley/?id=95000738
48. Dane Schiller and Guillermo X.
Garcia, Fox feels buoyed by U.S. visit, San Antonio Express-News , 7
November 2003. See http://news.mysanantonio.com/
story.cfm?xla=saen&xlb=180&xlc=1080723
49. Dan Stein, Why Legalization
Programs for Illegal Aliens Won't Solve the Problem, 17 October 2003,
F.A.I.R. See http://www.fairus.org/Media/Media.cfm?ID=2253&c=35
50. Who Are We? Migration
Watch UK website.
See http://www.migrationwatchuk.org/
default.asp?menu=whoweare&page=whoweare.asp
51. Ibid., Key Points:Is there a
problem?
http://www.migrationwatchuk.org/
default.asp?menu=isthereaprob&page=isthereaproblem.asp
52. EU enlargement, E.U.
website.
See http://europa.eu.int/comm/enlargement/enlargement.htm
53. Steve Schifferes, Who gains
from immigration? BBC, London, 17 June 2002. See
http://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/business/2019385.stm
54. An overview of UK migration, Migration
Watch UK. See
http://www.migrationwatchuk.org/
default.asp?menu=overview&page=overview.asp
55. Anthony Browne, op cit.,
56. Ibid.
57. Sir Andrew Green, Government
grasping at straws to justify immigration policy, The Daily Telegraph,
London, 22 September 2003. See copy on the website of Migration Watch UK
http://www.migrationwatchuk.org/p_Telegraph_22Sept_2003.asp
58. Green Cross International,
founded by Mikhail Gorbachev. See
http://www.greencrossinternational.net/index1.html
59.Dr Michael Coffman, Why
Property Rights Matter, pp.13-14
See http://www.discerningtoday.org/PropertyRights3.pdf
Short Version http://www.discerningtoday.org/PropertyRights2.pdf
See also http://www.ega.org/
60. Earth Charter Initiative,
Newsflash, July 2000. See
http://www.earthcharter.org/news/index.cfm?id_activity=445&actual=0
and http://www.earthcharter.org/innerpg.cfm?id_page=93
http://www.earthcharter.org/innerpg.cfm?id_menu=38
61. Coffman, op cit.,
62. The Turner Foundation. See
http://www.turnerfoundation.org/news/PRDetail10.asp
63. NationMaster.com encyclopedia.
See
http://www.nationmaster.com/encyclopedia/Prince-Bernhard-of-the-Netherlands
64. About WWF, WWF website.
See
http://www.wwf.ru/pskov/eng/aboutwwf/aboutwwf.htm
65. Interview with Prince Philip,
Alliance of Religions and Conservations website. See
http://www.arcworld.org/news.asp?pageID=1
66. Who are we and what do we
stand for? International Business Leaders Forum website.
See http://www.iblf.org/csr/CSRWebAssist.nsf/content/g1.html
67. Coffman op cit., p8
68 Dr Michael Coffman, Globalizing
Mining in America, Mining Voice Magazine Volume 6(2):26-35. See http://www.discerningtoday.org/globalizing_america.htm
69. Joan M Veon, Tyranny by
Another Name - Protecting the Environment. See
http://www.womensgroup.org/TRYANNY.html#SOFC
70. Coffman op cit.,
71. Monte Burke and William P.
Barrett, This Land Is My Land, Forbes Magazine, 6 October 2003. See http://www.forbes.com/free_forbes/2003/1006/050.html
72. Dr Michael Coffman, The Smart
Growth Fraud, NewsWithViews.com, 15 July 2003.See
http://www.newswithviews.com/Coffman/mike.htm
73. Wendell Cox, Forfeiting the
American Dream: The HUD-Funded Smart Growth Guidebook's Attack on
Homeownership, Backgrounder #1565, The Heritage Foundation, 2 July 2002.
See
http://www.heritage.org/Research/SmartGrowth/BG1565.cfm
74. Concepts, Instruments for
Change, International Institute for Sustainable Development, Canada. See http://www.iisd.org/susprod/principles.htm
75. 1994 Declaration of The Factor
Ten Club. See
http://www.techfak.uni-bielefeld.de/~walter/f10/declaration94.html
76. Joan Veon, op cit.
77. Public Private Partnership
for the Urban Environment, UN Department of Social and Economic Affairs,
Division for Sustainable Development. See http://www.unece.org/operact/ppp/introduction.htm
78. Mission, Strategy and
distinguishing characteristics, International Business Leaders Forum. See http://www.iblf.org/csr/csrwebassist.nsf/content/f1a2a3.html
79. Global Warming Petition,
Oregon Institute for Science and Medicine. See
http://www.oism.org/pproject/s33p37.htm
80. James A. Paul and Katarina
Wahlberg, Global Taxes for Global Priorities, Global Policy Forum and
the Heinrich Böll Foundation, March 2002
See http://www.globalpolicy.org/socecon/glotax/general/glotaxpaper.htm
81. Rebuilding America's Defenses, Project For the New American Century,
2000. See
http://www.newamericancentury.org/
82. David Anderson, The
Aggregate Burden of Crime, Journal of Law and Economics, January 1999. See
http://papers.ssrn.com/sol3/papers.cfm?abstract_id=147911 and synopsis at David
A Anderson http://www.argmax.com/mt_blog/archive/000260.php
83. The Economic Costs of Drug
Abuse in The United States 1992-1998, Executive Office of the President,
Office of National Drug Control Policy,Washington, D.C. 20503, September 2001.
See
http://virlib.ncjrs.org/more.asp?category=51&subcategory=129
and
http://www.whitehousedrugpolicy.gov/publications/pdf/economic_costs98.pdf
84. Lisa Ronthal, CIA admits drug
trafficking, cover-up, WorldNetDaily.com, 27 Oct.1998. See http://www.worldnetdaily.com/news/article.asp?ARTICLE_ID=20384
85. Allegations of connections
between CIA and the Contras in cocaine trafficking to the United States: Report
by The CIA Inspector General.(96-0143-IG). See
http://ciadrugs.homestead.com/files/index-cia-ig-rpt.html
86. The CIA and drugs, See http://ciadrugs.homestead.com/files/outline.html#intro
87. Drugs and Crime Facts,
U.S. Dept. of Justice, Bureau of Justice Statistics. See
http://www.ojp.usdoj.gov/bjs/dcf/enforce.htm
88. Economic Consequences of the
War on Drugs, The Drug Policy Alliance. See
http://www.drugpolicy.org/library/factsheets/economiccons/fact_economic.cfm
89. Crack Vs Powder Cocaine
Sentencing, Families against Mandatory Minimums.
http://www.famm.org/si_crack_powder_sentencing.htm
90. Mandatory Sentencing, The
Drug Policy Alliance. See http://www.drugpolicy.org/library/
factsheets/mandatorysentance_factsheet_library.cfm
91. History of Mandatory
Sentences, Families against Mandatory Minimums. See
http://www.famm.org/si_history_of_mandatory.htm
92. Drug Policy and The Criminal
Justice System, 2001, The Sentencing Project, Washington D.C. See http://www.sentencingproject.org/pdfs/1035.pdf
93. Rachel Councell and John Simes, Projections
of long term trends in the prison population to 2009 England and Wales,
Home Office, 9 Dec. 2002. See
http://www.homeoffice.gov.uk/rds/pdfs2/hosb1402.pdf
94. Jennifer Sullivan, Made on
the Inside for Use on the Outside, Wired News, 02 Dec. 1997. See http://www.wired.com/news/business/0,1367,8867,00.html
95. Slavery With a New Name, Prison
Activist Resource Center, California. See http://prisonactivist.org/factsheets/pic.pdf
96. David Koenig, Dell drops
recycling company that used prison labor, San Francisco Chronicle, 03 July
1997
http://www.sfgate.com/cgi-bin/article.cgi?file=/
news/archive/2003/07/03/national1638EDT0671.DTL
97. American Jewish Committee. See http://www.ajc.org/
98. Thane Peterson and Joan Warner Holocaust
Reparations: German CEOs Unlock Their Vaults, Business Week Online, 22 Feb
1999. See
http://www.businessweek.com/1999/99_08/b3617102.htm
99. Carol J. Williams, Corporate
Profit: Fortune 500 Companies Profit from Nazi Slave Labor,
Los Angeles Times, 8 December 1999.
See copy at http://www.worldfreeinternet.net/news/nws187.htm
100. Hagalil.com
http://www.hagalil.com/shoah/zwangsarbeit/ajc-liste.htm
101. Members, German Economy
Foundation Initiative Steering Group.
See Members http://www.stiftungsinitiative.de/eindex.html
102. FAQ's, The Laogai
Research Foundation
http://www.laogai.org/en/aboutlg.html
103. Congressman Sherrod Brown,
Brown wins house approval of measure enforcing ban on goods made with slave
labor, Press Release,13 July 2000.
See http://www.house.gov/sherrodbrown/labor713.html
104. Immoral and Illegal, The
Laogai Research Foundation, Case #2: Shanxi Province Number 3 Prison (also known
as Shanxi Linfen Automobile Manufacturing Plant). See
http://www.laogai.org/reports/immoral.htm
105. Charles Smith, GI Joe and
the Chinese slave trade, WorldNetDaily.com, 8 Sept 1998.
See http://www.worldnetdaily.com/news/article.asp?ARTICLE_ID=20477
106. Marc Leduc, Healing
Daily.com.
See http://www.healingdaily.com/conditions/health-spending.htm
107. Bringing mental health
issues into the mainstream of a health-conscious society,
Health and Consumer Protection Directorate-General, EU Commission Press
Release, Brussels, 6 April 2001. See http://europa.eu.int/
comm/dgs/health_consumer/library/press/press129_en.html
108. Disability: Some Facts,
Employer's Forum on Disability. See
http://www.csreurope.org/
uploadstore/cms/docs/CSRE_Disability_statistics.pdf
109. Andrew Houtenville,
Disability & Employment in the USA: National Overview based on 2000 Census,
Disability World. See
http://www.disabilityworld.org/09-10_02/employment/overview.shtml
Chapter 8
THE NEW
POLITICAL SYSTEM
8.1 THE FUTURE OF DEMOCRACY
The socio-economic structure of the New
World Order is a world of 'have mores' and 'have nothings', with virtually no
middle class beyond the few useful but expendable hatchet men. The descent into
neo-feudalism also necessitates political disenfranchisement and legal
alienation, i.e. the rewinding of a thousand years of historical progress
towards freedom and democracy.
Is there really a
plan for world government of this nature or is this just conspiracy theory?
Vladimir Bukovsky's classified Politburo documents reveal that, in the years
leading up to the collapse of the Soviet Union, Gorbachev was meeting with
European socialist leaders and the international financial elite, discussing
the convergence of Soviet states with the new European state. Speaking in
private with Argentine President Carlos Menem on 25th October 1990, Gorbachev
said:
One of my aides
has written sometime ago that we need to create a world government. People were
laughing at him at that time. But now?
C. Menem. Some
40 years ago, Peron was speaking of continentalism which would enable us to go
for a world government.
M. Gorbachev.
I believe we should think about enhancing the UN role. It could not realise its
potential for 40 years and only now did it get such an opportunity. Here is a
proto-type of the world government for you.
Mr Bukovsky's
experience of socialism leads him to believe that there is no limit to the
expansionist plans of the E.U.. Romano Prodi has already drawn up a map of the
sphere of E.U. interests which includes the whole of the Middle East, North
Africa and Turkey. The dreams of the financial elite and the Socialist
International are one and the same, because, as Bukovsky reflects, 'no utopia
has ever worked in a limited space, be it a village, a town, a continent or a
planet'.
Of course none of
this could be done openly, which is why the Russians quickly sealed the
Politburo archives again. It is being accomplished using the socialist tactic
of incrementalism. The U.N., with its gentle light blue emblem, is presented to
the public as an institution of peace and social justice, serving as the
sheep's clothing for the pack of wolves who sponsor it. Whilst the U.N. is
still largely a fig leaf for one-world government, real political power blocs
are being constructed on the basis of this cosy 'big idea'. Americans would be
well advised to look at the E.U. to appreciate just how cosy this big idea isn't.The
differences between the Anglo-American political tradition and the principles
underpinning the European Union were recently summarized by Ashley Mote, Member
of the European Parliament and author of Vigilance: A Defence of British
Liberty.
Traditionally,
in the U.K. and the U.S., the state draws its power from, and is answerable to
the people. In the E.U., the state exists in its own right and the people
answer to it. A significant example of this shift of philosophy can be
seem in the announcement of a new mission statement for Britain's
gigantic tax collection and welfare agency, the Inland Revenue, proudly
displayed on the homepage at www.inlandrevenue.gov.uk:
The Inland
Revenue is here to ensure that everyone understands and receives what they are
entitled to and understands and pays what they owe, so that everyone
contributes to the UK's needs.
'so that
everyone contributes to the UK's needs'? Are they suggesting that British
citizens exist to serve the state? What happens if one chooses not to
'contribute' to the U.K.'s needs and who defines how one should 'contribute'?
In
the U.K. and U.S., our rights and freedoms are our birth right. In the E.U.,
there are no rights or freedoms , only privileges that can be withdrawn.
In
the U.K. and U.S., no man is above the law. In the E.U., the bureaucrats have
given themselves immunity from prosecution.
In
the U.K. and U.S., the Government can be replaced by the people every few
years. In the E.U., the governing Commission is not elected by the people or
the European Parliament, it is appointed by the heads of member states.
In
the U.K. and U.S., everything is allowed unless specifically forbidden. In the
E.U. everything is implicitly forbidden unless the E.U. decides to allow it.
These principles are
firmly embedded in the political organization of the European Union. Although
there is notionally a separation of powers between the Executive and
Legislature, in reality power is firmly in the hands of the Executive. The 25
Commissioners who constitute the government of the E.U. are not Members of the
European Parliament (MEPs) but are appointed every five years by a qualified
majority of the heads of each member state in the European Council. Although
the Parliament has to approve the appointment of the Commission, and it can by
two-thirds majority vote to sack it, it cannot approve or reject the
appointment of individual Commissioners or sack them individually. A 'motion of
censure' has never achieved the necessary majority, and if it ever did, the
Parliament would not have the power to appoint a new Commission. In 1999, Neil
Kinnock was a member of the Santer Commission which was forced to resign
because of serious financial corruption. Mr Kinnock was appointed to the
replacement Commission as Commissioner in charge of tackling E.U. fraud!
Jeffrey Titford,
MEP for the Eastern Region and member of the U.K. Independence Party (UKIP), was
one of many MEPs dismayed by certain appointments to the new Commission in
January 2005:
When my colleague
Nigel Farage MEP recently rose to his feet in the European Parliament and
denounced the new European Commission, he was vilified and threatened with
legal action. Mr Farage had asked fellow MEPs whether they would ‘buy a used
car from this man’, when he revealed that M. Jacques Barrot, had received an 8
month suspended sentence and was barred from elected office in France for 2
years, after being convicted in 2000 of embezzling FFR 25m (US$ 3.8m) from
government funds by diverting it into the coffers of his party.
Britain has an
equally impressive representative in the person of Peter Mandelson, selected by
Tony Blair and duly appointed in January 2005 as Commissioner for Trade. He was
forced to resign not once, but twice from Blair's Government due to allegations
of corruption. In December 1998, it was revealed that Mandelson had bought a
home in Notting Hill in 1996 with the assistance of an interest-free indefinite
loan of £373,000 from Geoffrey Robinson, a millionaire Labour MP who was also
in the Government but was subject to an inquiry into his business dealings by
the Department of Trade and Industry which Mandelson headed. Out of office for
only ten months, he was re-appointed Secretary of State for Northern Ireland,
in October1999. On 21 January 2001, Mr Mandelson resigned again after it was
discovered that, whilst he was managing the Millenium Dome Project, he had
phoned the Home Office on behalf of Srichanda Hinduja, an Indian businessman
who was seeking British citizenship. Mr Hinduja had offered £1 million to the
failing Dome project. With a track record like this, Mandelson was destined for
a top job in Brussels.
Under the 1957 Treaty
of Rome, the E.U. Commission has the exclusive right to draft legislation
meaning that the Parliament cannot initiate legislation or repeal it. The
Commission also has the right to 'its own power of decision' as the 'guardian
of the Treaties' allowing it to issue its own Regulations as, for
example, to enforce the Common Agricultural and Fisheries Policies. Unlike
Directives, Regulations immediately become law as soon as they have gone
through the European Parliament and do not have to be ratified by the national
parliaments of member states.
However, under
the consultation procedure there are major areas of E.U. legislation over which
the European Parliament has no power at all. The only legal requirement is that
Parliament states its opinion on proposed legislation. The E.U.'s fact sheet
entitled 'Decision Making in the European Union' describes this in more depth.
(See http://europa.eu.int/institutions/decision-making/index_en.htm)
There are three main procedures for
enacting new EU laws:
codecision;
consultation;
assent.
The main difference between them is
the way Parliament interacts with the Council [of Ministers]. Under the
consultation procedure, Parliament merely gives its opinion [emphasis
added]; under the codecision procedure, Parliament genuinely shares power with
the Council. The European Commission, when proposing a new law, must choose
which procedure to follow. The choice will, in principle, depend on the
"legal basis" of the proposal....
.... The areas covered by the
consultation procedure are:
Police
and judicial cooperation in criminal matters
Revision
of the Treaties
Discrimination
on grounds of sex, race or ethnic origin, religion or political conviction,
disability, age or sexual orientation
EU
citizenship
Agriculture
Visas,
asylum, immigration and other policies associated with the free movement of
persons
Transport
(where it is likely to have a significant impact on certain regions)
Competition
rules
Tax
arrangements
Economic
policy
"Enhanced
co-operation" - i.e. the arrangement allowing a group of member states to
work together in a particular field even if the others do not wish to join in
yet.
Even where the
Commission sends legislation to both the Council of Ministers and the
Parliament under 'codecision' procedure, the volume of Directives and
Regulations coming down from the Commission is so large that MEPs do not even have
time to read much of the legislation. Because they often haven't got a clue
what they are voting on, MEPs rely on civil servants to tell them how to vote.
Current British MEP Nigel Farage stated that on one occasion, MEPs were
required to vote on Directives 450 times in one 80-minute session. He freely
admitted that it was a farce and he voted as he was told.1 Again, in a BBC interview he said:
For example, I'm
told that on 21 July - the second day of this particular session - that I'm
going to be asked to vote on up to 500 motions in a morning with my electronic
voting pad. It seems to me that that's just impossible.2
The Lord's prayer contains 70 words, the Ten
Commandments 297, the American Declaration of Independence 300 and the Common
Market Directive on the export of duck eggs 26,911. Over 23,000 EU legal
acts are in force and around one third of British law now originates in
Brussels.3
Finally,
the European Parliament cannot even be called a talking shop. MEPs in the
smaller political groups are very lucky if they are given two 90 second slots a
week to speak in a debate. Informed, in-depth discussion, therefore, does not
exist within the European Parliament.4 In Britain, detailed transcripts
are recorded of Parliamentary matters and published for all to see (Hansard).
In the E.U., few of the proceedings are generally recorded or even made
available for public scrutiny. A search for the word 'minutes' on the useful
E.U. dictionary www.EUABC.com, revealed that, unlike other central banks,The
European Central Bank refuses to publish the minutes of its meetings. The
dictionary also introduces a new world 'comitology' to describe the work and
study of the many committees and working groups in the E.U. A Swedish scientist
has found approximately 1350 active working groups in the Commission most of
which operate without the full oversight of MEPs who cannot even get the lists
of names of the participants.
The corruption in the
Brussels bureaucracy is discussed in more depth in chapter 11,'the legal
apparatus of totalitarianism'.
ELECTRONIC
VOTING
Recent
events in the U.S. demonstrate why electronic voting is the modus operandi of
the European Parliament and the future of democracy under global feudalism: its
designed for fraud. Electronic touch screen voting is being rolled out across
the U.S. using software that does not permit any physical auditing or vote
counting, permits casting of multiple votes and can be remotely accessed in
order to change the election result. How could the public be persuaded to
accept this? Remember the 2000 election: After the debacle in Florida (and
actually in plenty of other locations around the U.S.), with its hanging chads
and pregnant chads and other punch-card problems, Congress passed the Help
America Vote Act in 2002. One of the functions of the new law was to provide $4
billion for states to use in updating their often antiquated voting equipment.
With federal money available, and the cautionary story of Florida as a warning,
states began turning in droves to electronic voting machines. This is the classical
'problem-reaction-solution' tactics of the wolf in sheep's clothing.5
The company
at the centre of the controversy is Diebold Election Systems Inc. of Ohio who
have sold 33,000 touch screen voting machines in the United States. Diebold
donated at least $195,000 to the Republican Party between 2000 and 2002, and
its CEO Walden O'Dell once pledged to "deliver" Ohio's electoral
votes for President Bush.6
In Georgia
during the 2002 elections, some voters using Diebold machines tried to vote for
one candidate, but the machine would instead register a vote for the opponent.
There were six electoral upsets in that election, including one in which the
incumbent senator, who was far ahead in the polls, lost by 11 points. Diebold
had changed the software used by the voting machines seven or eight times,
without anyone examining it, and then after the election the company
immediately overwrote the flash memory of all the cards used by those machines,
so it is now impossible to know what the vote counts really were.7
Researchers
at Johns Hopkins University and Rice University said they had uncovered bugs in
a Diebold Inc. voting system that could allow voters and poll workers to cast
multiple ballots, switch others' votes, or shut down an election early.
Encryption of sensitive data is absent: Diebold doesn't encrypt vote totals
before they are transferred to the Board of Elections over the Internet
allowing outsiders to reach into the system and change election tallies. A lack
of oversight in the development process could allow programmers to create
secret "back doors" for tampering as well. Diebold's source code is
kept secret. Voters do not get a paper receipt of their vote.8,9,10
This
information only came to public attention because in March 2003, someone hacked
into a web-server used by Diebold and copied thousands of messages posted to an
online discussion board used internally by Diebold employees to discuss its
voting machines, as well as actual code used in the voting machines. In August
2003, the documents were sent to journalists and the story became mainstream.11 Diebold responded by threatening
legal action for copyright infringement demanding that the offending material
be removed from internet sites. Computer programmers, ISPs and students at 20
universities, including the University of California at Berkeley and the
Massachusetts Institute of Technology, received cease and decist letters.
Unfortunately for Diebold, the files are now on servers all over the world.
Congressman Dennis Kucinich and Democratic Presidential candidate has taken up
the campaign against Diebold, posting the documents on his website.12
In response
to these revelations, in August, the Governor of Maryland ordered a third-party
audit of the software of Diebold's touch-screen voting machines. Maryland was
the first state to adopt a unified electronic voting system statewide. Just
days before the university report came out, Maryland awarded Diebold a $55.6
million contract to provide and service 11,000 additional Diebold machines to
be used throughout the state for the 2004 presidential primary.13The State of California is
investigating claims that Diebold illegally inserted software in to the
machines in the San Francisco Bay area after they had been publicly certified.14
In the wake
of concerns raised about security flaws in electronic voting systems, a
lobbying group is mounting a public relations and lobbying campaign to help
voting companies "repair short-term damage done by negative reports and
media coverage" instead of addressing the problem, further indicating that
the problem is by design not by accident.15
The British
Government is planning to introduce electronic voting in the UK. The initiative
has come from the Office of The Deputy Prime Minister, the same department
responsible for breaking up the country up into regions, as discussed below. 16
8.2
BANNING OPPOSITION TO WORLD GOVERNMENT
Don't be
surprised when in 2005 you read on the front page of the newspaper, 'It's
Official: Britain is Illegal '. Human Rights legislation is designed to outlaw
opposition to world government. Any statement or action which opposes world
government and supports the nation state will be a crime of "racism"
or " xenophobia". If the E.U. Framework decision on combating
racism and xenophobia becomes law or even more disastrously the U.N.'s Model
National Legislation for the Guidance of Governments in the Enactment of
Further Legislation Against Racial Discrimination, we will not legally be
able to oppose the dismantling of nation states and creation of world
government.
UK
The 1986 Public
Order Act, made it a criminal offence to actively stir up racial hatred.
The definition of race includes national origins.
EU
E.U. laws
against the nation state began with article 14 of the 1950 European
Convention for the Protection of Human Rights and Fundamental Freedoms. The
latest amendment to the convention, Protocol No 12, 4th November 2000 reads:
Article 1
- General prohibition of discrimination
· 1 The enjoyment of any right set
forth by law shall be secured without discrimination on any ground such as sex,
race, colour, language, religion, political or other opinion, national
or social origin, association with a national minority, property, birth or
other status.
· 2 No one shall be discriminated
against by any public authority on any ground such as those
mentioned in paragraph 1.17 [emphasis added]
The law is
now administered by the European Commission against Racism and Intolerance
(ECRI) set up by a Council of Europe summit held in Vienna in October 1993. It
was strengthened by a second summit held in Strasbourg in October 1997. ECRI's
task is to combat racism, xenophobia, antisemitism and intolerance.18 In 1997, the European Monitoring
Centre on Racism and Xenophobia (EUMC) was established to serve as the watchdog
and think-tank for the ECRI.19
Religious hatred, xenophobia and racism are not yet
crimes under British law.20 However, the E.U. Additional
Protocol to the Convention on Cybercrime, concerning the criminalization of
acts of a racist and xenophobic nature committed through computer systems,
ratified by 11 countries in November 2002, requires nation states to
criminalize dissemination of racist and xenophobic on the internet. As
discussed in chapter 11, the new European Arrest Warrant makes
Xenophobia and Racism two of 32 offences for which British citizens can be
extradited to E.U. countries in which they are crimes. This prevents UK citizens
expressing anti-globalist views on the internet because can they can be read in
a country which outlaws "hate speech."21,22,23
Worse
still, the pending Framework decision on combating racism and xenophobia aims
to make xenophobia and racism criminal offences in Britain and all other
European countries. The crimes include:
public
dissemination or distribution of tracts, pictures or other material containing expressions
of racism and xenophobia; directing of a racist or xenophobic group (by
"group" is meant a structured organization consisting of at least two
persons established for a specific period).... 5. Instigating, aiding, abetting
or attempting to commit the above offences will also be punishable.....10.
Member States will take the necessary measures to implement this framework
decision by 30 June 2004.24
THE
AMERICAN UNION
The Organization of
American States was founded in 1948, and now includes all 35 independent
countries of the Americas. Its purpose is the same as the E.U., a federal
super-state, though politicians will never admit to that. 25 Like the E.U. it is not a popular
idea, at least in the Northern hemisphere which has most to lose, therefore
opposition to it is being made illegal under the guise of protecting human
rights.
Article 1 of The American
Convention on Human Rights 1969, reads:
The States
Parties to this Convention undertake to respect the rights and freedoms
recognized herein and to ensure to all persons subject to their jurisdiction
the free and full exercise of those rights and freedoms, without any
discrimination for reasons of race,color, sex, language, religion, political or
other opinion, national or social origin, economic status, birth, or any
other social condition.26[emphasis added]
The 1988 San Salvador Protocol reads:
The State
Parties to this Protocol undertake to guarantee the exercise of the rights set
forth herein without discrimination of any kind for reasons related to race,
color, sex, language, religion, political or other opinions, national or
social origin, economic status, birth or any other social condition.
The rights
guaranteed under the Protocol include the right to work, healthcare,
social security and education.27
UN
The policy documents of
the U.N.'s Office of The High Commissioner for Human Rights, Committee for the
Elimination of Racism, Xenophobia and Related Intolerance, make it absolutely
clear that criticism of world government public and private, will be illegal.
The Model National Legislation for the Guidance of Governments in the
Enactment of Further Legislation Against Racial Discrimination actually
changes the meaning of the word racism to include xenophobia in true Orwellian
Newspeak. Xenophobia, patriotism or nationalism are the same as racism
according to the U.N. 28
2. In this Act, racial
discrimination shall mean any distinction, exclusion, restriction,
preference or omission based on race, colour, descent, nationality or
ethnic origin which has the purpose or effect of nullifying or impairing,
directly or indirectly, the recognition, equal enjoyment or exercise of human
rights and fundamental freedoms recognized in international law.
CRITICISM
OF WORLD GOVERNMENT WILL BE ILLEGAL
. Under
this Act and in accordance with international law, the freedom of opinion and
expression and the freedom of peaceful assembly and association shall be
subject to the following restrictions: 23. It shall be an offence to threaten,
insult, ridicule or otherwise abuse a person or group of persons by words or
behaviour which cause or may reasonably be interpreted as an attempt to cause
racial discrimination or racial hatred, or to incite a person or group of
persons to do so.
PUTTING A LINK ON YOUR WEBSITE TO
ANOTHER WEBSITE CRITICAL OF WORLD GOVERNMENT WILL BE ILLEGAL
26. It is
an offence to disseminate or cause to be disseminated, in a publication,
broadcast, exhibition or by any other means of social communication, any
material that expresses or implies ideas or theories with the objective of
incitement to racial discrimination.
TELLING YOUR FRIENDS AND FAMILY THAT
WORLD GOVERNMENT IS A BAD IDEA WILL BE ILLEGAL
27. The
actions referred to in paragraphs 23 to 25 of this Section are deemed to
constitute an offence irrespective of whether they were committed in public or
in private.
28. An
action which occurs inside a private dwelling and is witnessed only by one or
more persons present in that dwelling shall not constitute an offence.
NATIONAL
POLITICAL PARTIES AND GOVERNMENTS WILL BE ILLEGAL
30. Any organization
which undertakes to promote, incite, propagate or organize racial
discrimination against an individual or group of individuals shall be declared
illegal and prohibited. Under section 8 (c), punishment of offenders includes
suspension of the right to be elected to a public office.
It's worth
interjecting at this point that the E.U.'s constitutional affairs committee
have been chewing over a draft "Statute of European Political
Parties". The establishment of state-funded pan-European parties is
something that federalists desperately want. If a majority of MEPs were to
decide that a party was not abiding by their definition of human rights and
democratic values, it would be debarred. This was precisely the ruse used
across the Warsaw Pact. Parties were initially proscribed on grounds of being
fascist, and, before long, this definition came to apply to everyone except the
communists and their Peasant Party allies.29
NATIONAL
BORDERS WILL BE ABOLISHED
36. It is
an offence for any official or other servant of the State, or of a public
establishment, national enterprise or a legal entity receiving financial
assistance from the public authorities, to deny an individual or group of
individuals access to a right, privilege or benefit on racial grounds. 37. It
is an offence, on racial grounds: (a) To refuse to employ or refrain from
employing an individual or group of individuals for a vacant post for which the
persons concerned are qualified.
According
to The Daily Telegraph, the first judicial ruling equating xenophobia
with opposition to world government has already been made:
Is Euro-sceptic
dissent xenophobic? I ask the question only half in jest, because the EU
institutions have a habit of outdoing parody. The Advocate General of the
European Court of Justice issued an opinion on October 19 - Case C-274/99 P -
arguing that political criticism of the E.U. can be akin to blasphemy, and can
therefore be restricted. He denies it. Read the case for yourself - in Spanish
or French; English is not provided. He misuses a blasphemy case, Wingrove v
United Kingdom, as a building block in arguing for repressive powers to limit
free speech.30
The thought
police are already active in Britain. In January 2003, Robin Page, former
presenter of TV's One Man and his Dog and Daily Telegraph columnist,
was questioned by police after saying country dwellers should enjoy the same
rights as blacks, Muslims and homosexuals. Mr Page, was arrested on suspicion
of stirring up racial hatred after making a speech at a pro-hunting rally in
November which began: "If there is a black, vegetarian, Muslim,
asylum-seeking, one-legged, lesbian lorry driver present…I want the same rights
as you."31
8.3
CREATING REGIONAL GOVERNMENTS
The
political structure of the U.N global government will be built through
regionalism, also known as federalism. Nation states will be broken down into
smaller regions and subsumed by larger international power blocs, just as the
world was divided into Oceania, Eurasia and Eastasia in Orwell's 1984,
and into ten regions in Huxley's Brave New World. The E.U. super-state
is almost complete and it is the model for the Organization of American States.
The purpose of regionalism is to circumvent national government and to
centralize power under the U.N.
Within the
E.U. there are, at present, 111 separate regions. In many of the continental
countries a form of regional government has been common for decades, especially
in France, Germany, Spain, and Italy. Article 198 a of The Maastricht Treaty
1992 32
set up The Committee Of The Regions and since then, the U.K. government has
followed this agenda to break down the political structure of the U.K. so the
smaller pieces can be made accountable to Brussels rather than Westminster.
Northern Ireland, Scotland and Wales now have their own regional assemblies and
soon England will be broken up into nine regions, making twelve U.K. regions in
total. Already, in all twelve regions, Government Offices, Regional Development
Agencies and Regional Assemblies have been set up with non-elected members,
appointed to sit.33,34Referendums to set up
elected assemblies in England will be held in Autumn 2004.35 It is clear that British sovereignty
is to be completely surrendered to the E.U.
8.4 WORLD
GOVERNMENT OR WORLD WAR THREE
The
following predictions are based on current trends as they unfold and on an
understanding of the policy objectives of the elite. These predictions are
widely shared by students of the New World Order.
National
borders are ultimately defined by military competence. All of the U.N. edicts
and conventions mean nothing unless they can be enforced militarily upon
recalcitrant nations. The E.U. super-state will acquire its necessary army
through incrementalism, sometimes referred to as the "ratchet" system
since their is no mechanism for repealing E.U. laws. However the massive
geo-political restructuring needed to get all nations under a world army will
require something quite spectacular. Think-tanks, university grants and bribes
are not enough to bring about global government. The league of Nations and the
United Nations were forged from the heat of the first and second world wars.
Global government will be the fall-out from World War III. There is a three
pronged strategy being played out, masquerading as the Global War on Terror.
Firstly, America's super-power status will be destroyed. This will partly be
achieved in carrying out the second tactic which is to bring uncooperative
nations, especially those in the Middle East, under U.N. control. America's
military might will be exhausted by invading Third World nations and setting up
U.N. protectorates. Thirdly, threatened or actual conflict between nuclear
powers will persuade all nations to surrender their military power to the U.N.
thereby permanently relinquishing their sovereignty. This is why the West has
given nuclear technology to North Korea and China. At this point, before
hundreds of cities are annihilated ,there will be an emergency U.N. conference.
The agreement reached will be to surrender control all weapons of mass
destruction to a U.N. agency. The submission of all conventional armed forces
to U.N command will follow. Eventually all military forces will be U.N. 'Peace
Keeping' forces, whose purpose is to enforce the U.N. hegemony over rogue
states.
If this
sounds a little fantastic, consider this: NATO exercises for enforcing U.N.
embargoes on breakaway states have already begun. The first exercise of NATO'S
Response Force took place between 11th and 26th September 2003 in Galloway,
Scotland. This was a 'crisis response' operation called 'Exercise Northern
Lights' in which the mission was enforcing a U.N. arms embargo on a recently
formed country. 36
A second
exercise took place in Turkey on 20th November 2003. According to the NATO
website, "the forces rescued and evacuated the U.N. staff and civilians,
established an embargo, engaged in counter-terrorist operations and a show of
force".37
Like
American and European politicians, the Russians and Chinese oligarchs are happy
to play their part in this farce because they also dream of international
governance. Former party bosses are happy to assume the new role of 'World
Controllers' in the eastern regions of the Brave New World. The
neo-conservative government in the Whitehouse, like almost all previous
administrations, is 100% committed to the globalist plan to destroy the
independence of the U.S.. Once completed, the Donald Rumsfeld-initiated NATO
Response Force will put the boot behind the imperial decrees the Death Star wishes
to impose on rebel colonies.
The policy
of weakening the U.S. military really began in earnest under Bush Sr. during
the first Gulf War. 300,000 of the 700,000 troops deployed in Gulf War are now
seriously ill with Gulf War Illness.38 They are being denied cheap and
effective medical care for no apparent reason. Former Consultant to the Defense
Department, Dr Garth Nicolson, estimates that at least 25,000 have died since
the war ended. The others face permanent disability and destitution. Major Doug
Rokke was the U.S. Army's depleted uranium project director in 1994-95 who has
since campaigned tirelessly to expose the devastating health effects of DU
munitions. The report he has obtained from the U.S. Veterans Administration
states that, by August 2004, it had awarded permanent disability compensation
to almost 280,000 U.S. troops who served in the Gulf region between August 1990
and May 2004. 39
Meanwhile, the Veterans Administration refuses to acknowledge that there is a
Gulf War Illness, preferring to diagnose post-traumatic stress disorder.40 The cause of Gulf War Illness is
multi-faceted, invariably linked to depleted uranium munitions, experimental
vaccinations and exposure to chemical and biological weapons. All of these
factors lead back to the Western military-industrial complex controlled by the
elite, whose ultimate goal is to destroy America militarily and economically.
The troops who served in the first Gulf War have almost all been cycled out of
the military, so the poor new recruits currently serving in Iraq and
Afghanistan know little or nothing of their appalling fate. The policy seems to
be to give troops a limited operational lifespan, after which they are killed
or incapacitated to make way for the next round of cannon fodder. Meanwhile hundreds
of billions of dollars are being bled from U.S. taxpayers to finance this
destruction. As George Orwell concluded in 1984,
War is a way of
shattering to pieces, or pouring into the stratosphere, or sinking into the
depths of the sea, materials which might otherwise be used to make the masses
too comfortable...
In the next
chapter, we'll find out who really benefits from the The War on Terror, and
conjecture who the terrorists really are.
Chapter 8 End Notes
1. Sam Burcher, European
Directive Against Vitamins & Minerals, Institute of Science in Society.
See http://www.i-sis.org/vitamins2.php
2. Matthew Grant, What next for
the UKIP?, BBC, London, 13 July 1999. See http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/uk_politics/392150.stm
3. Dr Keith Strelling, E.M.U and
the Growth of Economic and Political Power in the E.U. See http://www.gtorrington.freeserve.co.uk/documents/strellng.htm
4. Understanding the E.U., transcript
of a video by The Silent Majority group.
See http://www.silentmajority.co.uk/eurorealist/reports/
5. Scott Granneman, Electronic
Voting Debacle, The Register,18 Nov.2003.
See http://www.theregister.co.uk/content/55/34051.html
6. Paul Festa, California voting
machine called into question, CNET News.com, 4 Nov. 2003.
See http://news.com.com/2100-1028-5102254.html?tag=nl
7. Scott Granneman op cit.
8. Ibid.
9. Kim Zetter, E-Vote Machines
Face Audit, Wired News, 12 Aug. 2003. See http://www.wired.com/news/technology/0,1282,59976,00.html
10. Analysis of an Electronic
Voting System, Johns Hopkins Information Security Institute Technical
Report, ref. TR-2003-19, 23 July 2003. See
Also see these websites for indepth
investigations into electronic voting fraud.
http://www.eff.org/
http://www.blackboxvoting.org/
11. Scott Grannemann, op cit.
12. Dennis J. Kucinich, Congressman
for the 10th District of Ohio, Voting Rights.
See http://www.house.gov/kucinich/issues/voting.htm
13. Kim Zetter, op cit.
14. Paul Festa, op cit.
15. Kim Zetter, E-Vote Firms Seek
Voter Approval, Wired News, 20 Oct. 2003. See
http://www.wired.com/news/business/0,1367,60864,00.html
16. Implementing electronic
voting in the UK, Office Of the Deputy Prime Minister, 2003. See http://www.odpm.gov.uk/stellent/groups/odpm_localgov/
documents/page/odpm_locgov_605189-01.hcsp#P50_3102
17. Treaties, Council of Europe website.
See http://conventions.coe.int/Treaty/en/Treaties/Html/177.htm
18. European Commission against
Racism and Intolerance website. See
http://www.coe.int/T/E/human_rights/Ecri/1-ECRI/
19. About Us, European
Monitoring Centre on Racism and Xenophobia (EUMC) website. See
http://www.eumc.eu.int/eumc/index.php?
fuseaction=content.dsp_cat_content&catid=2
20. House of Lords session 2002-03
32nd report, Select Committee on the European Union,
The proposed Framework Decision on Racism and Xenophobia-an update, 1
July 2003. See
http://www.parliament.the-stationery-office.co.uk/
pa/ld200203/ldselect/ldeucom/136/136.pdf
21. The Council of Europe Against
Racism website
http://www.coe.int/T/E/Com/Files/Themes/racism/default.asp
22. Philip Johnston, Britons face
extradition for 'thought crime' on net, The Daily Telegraph, London, 18
Feb. 2003, See http://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/main.jhtml?xml=
/news/2003/02/18/nxeno18.xml&sSheet=/news/2003/02/18/ixnewstop.html
23. House of Lords, op cit.
24. Framework decision on
combating racism and xenophobia, European Council website. See
http://europa.eu.int/scadplus/leg/en/lvb/l33178.htm
( summary of the resolution)
http://www.europapoort.nl/9294000/modules/
vgbwr4k8ocw2/f=/vgdmi7kxegzg.pdf
(the actual legislation)
25. Organisation of American States
website
http://www.oas.org/documents/eng/oasinbrief.asp
26. Article 1 of The American
Convention on Human Rights 1969, Inter-American Commission on Human Rights,
Organization of American States website. See
http://www.cidh.oas.org/Basicos/basic3.htm
27. Additional Protocol to the
American Convention on Human Rights in the Area of Economic, Social and
Cultural Rights ("Protocol of San Salvador"), November 1988,
Inter-American Commission on Human Rights, Organization of American States
website. See http://www.cidh.oas.org/Basicos/basic5.htm
28. Model National Legislation
for the Guidance of Governments in the Enactment of Further Legislation Against
Racial Discrimination, Office of The High Commissioner for Human Rights
website.
See http://www.unhchr.ch/html/menu6/2/pub962.htm
29. Daniel Hannan, Back in the
USSR for the EU's latest members, The Daily Telegraph, London, 1
June 2003. See
http://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/main.jhtml?xml=
%2Fnews%2F2003%2F06%2F01%2Fweu101.xml
30. Ambrose Evans-Pritchard, Opinion:
If this isn't a superstate in the making, then what is? The Daily Telegraph,
London, 15th November 2000.
http://www.telegraph.co.uk/opinion/main.jhtml?xml=%2Fopinion
%2F2000%2F11%2F15%2Fdo01.xml&secureRefresh=true&_requestid=102136
31. Sally Pook, Race claim
against Telegraph man dropped, The Daily Telegraph, London, 21
January 2003. See http://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/main.jhtml?xml=%2Fnews%
2F2003%2F01%2F21%2Fnpage21.xml&secureRefresh=true&_requestid=88226
32. The Consolidated Treaty
Establishing The European Community,
Title II, The Treaty Establishing The European Community, Part Five, Title
I, Provisions Governing The Institutions, Chapter 4, The Committee Of The
Regions:
Article 263 (ex Article 198 a).
See http://www.silentmajority.co.uk/eurorealist/treaty.html
Also see: Major Steps Towards a Europe of The Regions and Cities in an
Integrated Continent, a flowchart published by The EU Committee of The
Regions at
http://www.cor.eu.int/en/docu/etud/europe_cdr.pdf
33. Government Offices for the
English Regions, Office of The Deputy Prime Minister website. See http://www.rcu.gov.uk/GO/default.asp
34. What are Regional Chambers ? Office
of The Deputy Prime Minister website. See http://www.odpm.gov.uk/stellent/groups/odpm_regions/
documents/page/odpm_regions_607885.hcsp
35. Regional Governance,Ibid.,
http://www.odpm.gov.uk/stellent/groups/
odpm_regions/documents/page/odpm_regions_023393.hcsp
36. Ukrainian marines stop
drivers. BBC, London, 23 September 2003.
See http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/scotland/3131058.stm
and Scottish coast to host war games, BBC, London, 11 September
2003.
See http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/scotland/3100730.stm
37. Response Force demonstrates
capability in first exercise, NATO website. See http://www.nato.int/shape/news/2003/11/i031121a.htm
38. Ellen Tomson, Gulf War
Illnesses Affect 300,000 Vets, PioneerPlanet / St. Paul (Minnesota) Pioneer
Press, 19 September 2000. See http://www.gulfwarvets.com/pioneer.htm
39. Major Doug Rokke, interviewed on
Radio Liberty, 12 January 2005. Click here to
listen
40. Garth Nicolson Phd, Chief
Scientific Officer, What's New? The Institute of Molecular Medicine, 4
November 2001. See http://www.immed.org/whatsnew/WhatsNewAddition01-11-4.htm
Chapter 9
THE WAR ON TERROR
In some ways ...[Julia]... was far more acute than Winston, and
far less susceptible to Party propaganda. Once when he happened in some
connexion to mention the war against Eurasia, she startled him by saying
casually that in her opinion the war was not happening. The rocket bombs which
fell daily on London were probably fired by the Government of Oceania itself,
'just to keep people frightened'. This was an idea that had literally never
occurred to him. She also stirred a sort of envy in him by telling him that
during the Two Minutes Hate her great difficulty was to avoid bursting out
laughing.
- George Orwell, 1984
Some of the
most comprehensive sources on government sponsored terrorism are Paul J.
Watson's book, Order Out of Chaos: Elite Sponsored Terrorism and the New
World Order, and Alex Jones' book, 9-11 Descent into Tyranny. Most
of the citations can be checked at www.infowars.com,
www.prisonplanet.com
and www.propagandamatrix.com.
This chapter does little more than to summarize these works.
There are also some useful websites specifically on 9/11, such as www.septembereleventh.org,
www.911Truth.org,
www.letsroll911.org,
www.reopen911.org,
www.911inplanesite.com
and www.911citizenswatch.org.
9.1
CIA/MI6/Mossad/ISI: THE GLOBAL TERRORIST NETWORK
When
a government wants to do something unpopular, such as taking all our rights
away, it secretly creates a more immediate problem, such as demolishing
skyscrapers in Manhattan. To satisfy public demand that no more skyscrapers be
demolished in Manhattan, the government... takes all our rights away. The
people give thanks to Big Brother for his protection and look back with
nostalgia on their love affair with civil rights. This is 'problem-reaction-solution'
where the sponsors of an undesirable measure pose it as a solution to another
problem they secretly created.
This crude
device was described by Orwell in 1984. The Party sponsored Emmanuel
Goldstein's terrorist network, 'The Brotherhood' and pretended that Oceania was
engaged in continual wars against Eurasia and Eastasia. The external
threat justified the totalitarian system; anybody who opposed it was an enemy
of the state. In the same way today, anybody who supports freedom and opposes
war must be a member of Al-Qaeda.
It is worth
noting a few passages in 1984 to compare with the current 'War on
Terror'. Emmanuel Goldstein was once high up in the Party before before
becoming a counter-revolutionary:
He was the
primal traitor, the earliest defiler of the Party's purity. All subsequent
crimes against the Party, all treacheries, acts of sabotage, heresies,
deviations, sprang directly out of his teaching... He was the commander of a
vast shadowy army, an underground network of conspirators dedicated to the
overthrow of the State.
Goldstein was often seen on the
telescreen mouthing his specious claptrap:
He was abusing
Big Brother, he was denouncing the dictatorship of the Party, he was demanding
the immediate conclusion of peace with Eurasia, he was advocating freedom of
speech, freedom of the Press, freedom of assembly, freedom of thought, he was
crying hysterically that the revolution had been betrayed
Despite the daily arrests of members
of The Brotherhood, Goldstein himself was never caught:
...
although Goldstein was hated and despised by everybody, although every day and
a thousand times a day, on platforms, on the telescreen, in newspapers, in
books, his theories were refuted, smashed, ridiculed, held up to the general
gaze for the pitiful rubbish that they were in spite of all this, his influence
never seemed to grow less.... Somewhere or other he was still alive and
hatching his conspiracies: perhaps somewhere beyond the sea, under the
protection of his foreign paymasters, perhaps even -- so it was occasionally
rumoured -- in some hiding-place in Oceania itself.
It is
marvellous to behold the the brazen attempt by Western governments to pose
Osama Bin Laden as a real-life Goldstein in order to justify the watchful eye
of Big Brother and to take the world to the brink of a third world war.
There are many
historical examples of governments using problem-reaction-solution, either
committing atrocities and blaming it on their enemies or actually creating
enemies for political purposes. Emperor Nero burned Rome and blamed it on the
Christians. Hitler burned the Reichstag and blamed it on the communists. Both
used this as an excuse to persecute their political enemies. In March 1962,
U.S. Army General Lyman L. Lemnitzer presented a plan to the Defense Secretary
Robert McNamara for the invasion of Cuba. The Joint Chiefs of Staff had agreed
to stage terrorist outrages to be blamed on Fidel Castro, including hijacking
aircraft, sinking an American ship and violent terrorist attacks on U.S.
cities. Fake casualty lists in U.S. newspapers would cause a 'helpful wave of
indignation'. The official documents on Operation Northwoods were de-classified
in 2002 and are now available to read.(1)
Islamic
terrorism is a corner-stone of the elite's long range planning for a New World
Order. The hand of the globalists can be seen grooming Islamic jihad in the
Islamic heartlands of the Middle East and central Asia. According to a recent United
Press International report:
Israel and Hamas
may currently be locked in deadly combat, but, according to several current and
former U.S. intelligence officials, beginning in the late 1970s, Tel Aviv gave
direct and indirect financial aid to Hamas over a period of years... The
thinking on the part of some of the right-wing Israeli establishment was that
Hamas and the others, if they gained control, would refuse to have any part of
the peace process and would torpedo any agreements put in place.
Ariel
Sharon and his Likud party decided that it could discredit the PLO, whose aims
were moderate, and respond with even greater violence against the Palestinians
if they could link it to terrorist outrages.(2)
Similarly the U.S. government played a key role in
nurturing its nemesis, Al-Qaeda. By the 1970s the Bushes and the Bin Ladens
were owning airports and oil companies together. The majority owners of the
world's largest military investment company, the (U.S)$18 billion Carlyle
Group, are the Bushes - and until October 2001- the Bin Laden family. Former
British Prime Minister John Major is also on its board. The Carlyle Group has
been one of the main beneficiaries of the war in Iraq.(3)
The
policy of recruiting Muslim mercenaries to oppose the Soviets in Afghanistan
began under President Carter in 1979. Bush Sr. was CIA Director 1975-1979 and
U.S. Vice President 1981-1989. The Mujahdeen received American arms and
military training care of the CIA's ally, Pakistan Intelligence (ISI)
throughout the 1980s. However the same policy continued after the Soviets
withdrew from Afghanistan in 1989 and the Cold War came to an end. Pakistani
support for the Taleban during the Afghan civil war resulted in financial and
military assistance going to the Bosnian Muslim Army in the early 1990s and
later to the KLA in Kosovo. From 1992 onwards the ethnically driven
disintegration of Yugoslavia was a key juncture for the role of the U.N. as
international policeman.(4)(5)
Paul J.
Watson's avid attention to the daily news reaped its reward on 7th October 2002
when he saved stories posted on the websites of several British newspapers. A
Ministry of Defence D-notice gagging order was issued to stop the press
covering the trial of former MI5 agent David Shayler who was charged with
breaking the Official Secrets Act. The gagging order came on the same day that
the press reported that the government had pressured the judge in Shayler's
trial to accept public interest immunity (PII) certificates requiring the press
and the public to leave the court if sensitive security and intelligence issues
were raised. By the evening of 7th October, the D-notice had forced the London Guardian
to erase an article which originally stated:
Government
officials and lawyers persuaded two cabinet ministers to sign the PII
certificates after they learned that Mr Shayler intended to defend himself at
the trial.(6)
However the Evening Standards' article
containing some of Shayler's allegations still remains on its website:
Shayler will be
defending himself during the trial. He is expected to claim that British Secret
Service agents paid up to £100,000 to Osama Bin Laden for an assassination
attempt on Colonel Gadaffy in 1996.(7)
The
CIA-Pakistan-Bin Laden connection with 9-11 is strongly indicated by the transfer
of $100,000 to the lead hijacker Mohammad Atta by Director of Pakistani ISI
General Mahmoud Ahmad a few months before the attack. The same Director was in
Washington D.C. the week of the attack meeting with Colin Powell and the CIA
Director George Tenet.(8)(9)
Le Figaro newspaper
reported that between 4th and 14th July 2001, Osama Bin Laden was treated for
kidney infection at the the American hospital Dubai. He met with CIA station
chief Larry Mitchell and gave him precise information regarding an imminent
attack on the U.S. Although the CIA refuted the allegation, Le Figaro
refused to retract it stating the French Secret Service were a reliable source
for this story.(10)
Direct
evidence of U.S. Government protection of Al-Qaeda is the document 199I
WF213589 leaked to the BBC by FBI agents. Bush signed this national security
order instructing the FBI not to arrest members of Al -Qaeda.(11) Lawsuits have now been filed by FBI
agents against the Government in connection with this matter.(12)
Michael
Meacher was the former Environment Minister in Tony Blair's Government. He
wrote an article in for the Guardian newspaper in September 2003
suggesting that the U.S. Government had prior knowledge of the 9-11 attack and
allowed it to go ahead to justify their plan drawn up a year earlier to occupy
the Middle East. Mr Meacher detected a strong smell of
'problem-reaction-solution' in the air:
First, it
is clear the US authorities did little or nothing to pre-empt the events of
9/11. It is known that at least 11 countries provided advance warning to the US
of the 9/11 attacks. Two senior Mossad experts were sent to Washington in
August 2001 to alert the CIA and FBI to a cell of 200 terrorists said to be
preparing a big operation (Daily Telegraph, September 16 2001). The list they
provided included the names of four of the 9/11 hijackers, none of whom was
arrested.
He, like many
others, asked the question why when the first hijacking was suspected at
8.20am not a single fighter plane was scrambled to investigate from the
US Andrews airforce base, just 10 miles from Washington DC, until after the
third plane had hit the Pentagon at 9.38 am. There were standard FAA intercept
procedures for hijacked aircraft. Between September 2000 and June 2001 the U.S.
military launched fighter aircraft on 67 occasions to chase suspicious
aircraft. It is a U.S. legal requirement that once an aircraft has moved
significantly off its flight plan, fighter planes are sent up to investigate.
It appears that U.S. air defence was deliberately stood down on the morning of
9/11. (13)
Mr
Meacher concluded his article by pointing out the shortage of hydrocarbon fuel
in the coming decades and the need to take preemptive action to secure new
supplies. Whilst the loss of the World Trade Center was measured in billions
the oil and gas reserves of Kazakhstan, Uzbekistan and Turkmenistan are
estimated to be more than $3 trillion. Iraq has the second largest oil reserves
in the world after Saudi Arabia. In 1997, the Taleban were meeting with
representatives of Unocal to negotiate a pipeline deal for central Asia. However
by February 1998, Unocal was petitioning Congress for a stable secular Afghan
government due to the failure of these negotiations.(14) Pakistan, Afghanistan
and Turkmenistan signed an agreement for a $3.2 billion pipeline deal on 28
Decemeber 2002.(15)
The
BBC reported that Niaz Niak, a former Pakistan foreign secretary, was told by
senior American officials at a meeting in Berlin in July 2001, that military
action against Afghanistan would go ahead by the middle of October. It also
reported that before 9/11, U.S. Special Forces were massing on the border with
Tajikistan preparing for full scale invasion.(16)
But how did
the military-industrial complex pull off the events of 9/11? There is some
confusion over who the hijackers actually were. Four of the five named
hijackers supposedly on flight 11 which hit the north tower have since turned
up alive and well denying they had anything to do with the attack.(17) Northrop Grumman's RQ-4A Global
Hawk is a remote control reconnaissance aircraft developed for the U.S
Airforce. The U.S. Airforce Technology website reads:
In April 2001,
Global Hawk made aviation history when it completed the first non-stop flight
across the Pacific Ocean by an unmanned, powered aircraft, flying from Edwards
AFB, California, to the Royal Australian Air Force Base, Edinburgh, South
Australia.(18)
The military technology
for flying planes into buildings by remote control existed on 9/11. Original
mainstream media footage and witness testimony supporting this
possibility can be be found at www.letsroll911.org
and www.inplanesight.com.
9.2
PROLIFERATING WEAPONS OF MASS DESTRUCTION
As
suggested in the previous chapter, the War on Terror is designed to take the
world to the brink of World War III, as the necessary crisis (problem) to
precipitate the dawn of global government (reaction-solution). This is why the
elite have been proliferating weapons of mass destruction since the 1980s.
The U.S.
supported Saddam in the Iran/Iraq war between 1980 and1988. However,
turning Saddam Hussein into a credible threat to the West required a helping
hand from Uncle Sam. Donald Rumsfeld the U.S. Defense Secretary met Saddam in
1983 to ease the way for U.S. companies to sell Baghdad biological and chemical
weapons components.(19)
In 1994,
the Clinton administration initiated the 'Agreed Framework' with North Korea,
committing millions of dollars in aid for its nuclear programme, allegedly for
electricity generation. In year 2000, Clinton authorized Donald Rumsfeld's
company ABB Inc. to build two lightwater nuclear reactors in North Korea. In
January 2003, George Bush sought $3.5 million of taxpayers money for the same
nuclear programme.(20) The U.S. Government
claims that lightwater reactors cannot be used for nuclear weapons production,
even though the Congressional North Korea Advisory Group concluded in 1999
that,
If the 1994
Agreed Framework is implemented and two LWRs are eventually built and operated
in North Korea, the reactors could produce close to 500 kilograms of plutonium
in spent reactor fuel each year; enough for nearly 100 bombs annually if North
Korea decides to break its obligations and reprocess the material.(21)
Given that
Kim Jong-Il is a brutal dictator who has starved millions of his own people to
death, the U.S. Government is building the best enemy money can buy. The result
will be an escalation of the 'War on Terror'.
In 1996,
President Clinton changed the law and allowed advanced U.S. computer technology
to be sold to foreign military users. The super-computers sold to China and
Russia were designed for nuclear bomb development, advanced aircraft design,
anti-submarine warfare sensor development, and radar applications. These
super-computers can run American nuclear bomb design software and codes with
little or no modification. They are identical to the computers at U.S. weapons
labs right down to the vendor support.(22)(23)
We can only
prevent further massive terror attacks and a global conflagration by exposing
the cartel behind the curtain that is behind it all. Senator Gary Hart said at
a Council on Foreign Relations conference held the day after 9/11:
There is a chance
for the President of the United States to use this disaster to carry out what
his father - a phrase his father used I think only once, and it hasn't been
used since - and that is a new world order.(24)
Chapter 9
End Notes
1. David Ruppe, Friendly Fire, Book: U.S. Military Drafted Plans to
Terrorize U.S. Cities to Provoke War With Cuba, abcNEWS.com, 7 Nov. 2001.
See http://www.propagandamatrix.com/us_military_drafted_plans_to_terrorize_us_cities
and http://www.propagandamatrix.com/archiveprior_knowledge#northwoods
2. Richard Sale, Analysis: Hamas
history tied to Israel, United Press International,
18 Jun. 2002.
See http://www.upi.com/print.cfm?StoryID=18062002-051845-8272r
3.Judicial Watch, Bush Sr. in
Business with Bin Laden Family Conglomerate through Carlyle Group, 28 Sept.
2001.
See http://propagandamatrix.com/bush_senior_in_business_with_bin_laden.html
4.Michel Chossudovsky, Professor of
Economics, University of Ottawa, Who Is Osama Bin Laden?. See http://globalresearch.ca/articles/CHO109C.html
5.CIA worked in tandem with Pakistan
to create Taliban, Times of India, 7 March
2001. See http://www.propagandamatrix.com/cia_tandem_create_taliban.html
6. Patrick McGowan, Calls for
secret Shayler trial, Evening Standard, London, 7 Oct. 2002. See
http://www.thisislondon.co.uk/news/articles/1488303
7. Richard Norton-Taylor, Ministers
Issue Gag Orders for MI5 Trial, The Guardian, London, 7 Oct. 2002.
See
http://www.propagandamatrix.com/ministers_issue_gag_orders_for_mI5_trial.htm
8. Michel Chossudovsky, Professor of
Economics, University of Ottawa, The Role of Pakistan's Military
Intelligence (ISI) in the September 11 Attacks, 2 Nov. 2001. See
http://globalresearch.ca/articles/CHO111A.html
9. Manoj
Joshi, India helped FBI trace ISI-terrorist links, The Times of India,
Delhi, 9 Oct. 2001.
See http://www.timesofindia.com/
articleshow.asp?catkey=-2128936835&art_id=1454238160&sType=1)
10. Toby Rose, CIA agent 'met Bin
Laden in July', Evening Standard, London, 31 Oct. 2001. See
http://propagandamatrix.com/cia_agent_met_bin_laden_in_july.html
11.Greg Palast and David Pallister, FBI
claims Bin Laden inquiry was frustrated
Officials told to 'back off' on Saudis before September 11, The Guardian,
London, Nov.2001. See
http://www.guardian.co.uk/Archive/Article/0,4273,4293682,00.html
12. Judicial Watch, Active FBI
Special Agent files Complaint Concerning Obstructed FBI Anti-Terrorist
Investigations, 14 Nov. 2001. See http://www.judicialwatch.org/archive/2001/printer_1075.shtml
13. Michael Meacher, This war on
terrorism is bogus, The Guardian, London, 6 Sept. 2003 See http://politics.guardian.co.uk/comment/story/0,9115,1036688,00.html
14. Julio Godoy, US policy on
Taliban influenced by oil, Asia Times, 20 Nov. 2001.
See http://www.atimes.com/c-asia/CK20Ag01.html
15. Agreement On US 3.2 Billion
Gas Pipeline Project Signed, PakNews.com, 28 Dec. 2002.
See http://www.truthout.org/docs_02/12.30A.afgh.pipe.htm
16. U.S. 'Planned Attack on
Taliban', BBC, 18 Sept. 2001. See
http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/world/south_asia/1550366.stm
17.Paul J. Watson, Order Out of
Chaos: Elite Sponsored Terrorism and the New World Order, Alex Jones
Productions, 2003, p.160
18. Global hawk high endurance
unmanned reconnaissance aircraft, USA, Airforce Technology, Website for the
Defense Industry.
See http://www.airforce-technology.com/projects/global/
19. Tim Reid, How US helped Iraq
build deadly arsenal, The Times, London, 31 Dec.2002. See
http://www.timesonline.co.uk/article/0,,3-528574,00.html
20.Bush Seeks $3.5 Million for Group
Building N. Korean Reactors, Bloomberg, 17 Jan. 2003. See http://www.prisonplanet.com/011703nkorea.html
21.Clinton Deal Gave N. Korea
100-Nuke-Per-Year Capacity, Newsmax, 19 Oct. 2002. See http://www.prisonplanet.com/101902nkorea.html
22. Charles Smith, Brokering our
own demise, WorldNetDaily, 30 Nov. 1999. See
http://www.worldnetdaily.com/news/article.asp?ARTICLE_ID=20542
23. Charles Smith, China and
covert nuclear commerce, WorldNetDaily, 11 May 1999. See
http://www.worldnetdaily.com/news/article.asp?ARTICLE_ID=20512
24. Alex Jones Show Interview of
Greg Palast, Infowars.com, 5 April 2002. See
http://www.gregpalast.com/detail.cfm?artid=144&row=1=
Chapter 10
MARTIAL
LAW
From recent
pronouncements and legislative developments it appears both the U.S. and U.K.
governments may suspend Parliamentary democracy after the next major terror
attack. With the War on Terror expected to go on forever, we may soon find
ourselves under a form of indefinite martial law.What is likely to be the
purpose of this scenario for the police state planners? The populace will be
required to surrender rights to life, liberty and property for short term
expediency. This will be the window of opportunity the planners need to purge dissident
groups and exploit the popular panic to introduce permanent legal or
constitutional changes.
The former
objective is uppermost in the minds of the American police state
planners. Unlike their British counterparts, they have a large gun-owning New
World Order savvy population to contend with. This is not merely the Michigan
Militia, but the hundreds of thousands, possibly millions of ordinary Americans
who log on to free-thinking websites and listen to uncensored talk radio. Some
of these folk, especially the Christians, are targets of the regime and could
be dealt with in the manner of the Waco and Ruby Ridge atrocities.
In the U.K. the
planners are principally troubled by the eurosceptics who are creating serious
popular discontent about the European project. Their approach to the problem
may not be quite as 'hands on' as the bully boys in the U.S., but times of
crisis offer great opportunity for restricting communication, dirty tricks,
deception and propaganda.
10.1
LEGISLATION
HITLER'S ENABLING ACT
After
burning down the Reichstag building (home to the German parliament) on 27th
February 1933, the Nazis blamed it on the communists and persuaded
President Hindenberg to issue a decree invoking article 48 of the Weimar
constitution. This placed draconian restrictions on civil liberties which
enabled the Nazis to persecute their political opponents in the run up to the
elections on 5 March. However the elections failed to deliver Hitler the
two-thirds majority necessary to dismantle the constitution. Therefore he
continued to use the police state powers of article 48 to intimidate his
political opponents. On 23rd March the newly elected Reichstag convened and
passed the Enabling Act allowing Hitler to exercise dictatorial rule for
four years. In 1937 the act was renewed and remained in force until the
collapse of the regime in 1945.
UK
When the Draft
Civil Contingencies Bill was published in 2003, it created a furore among
civil liberties groups and Members of Parliament. One committee member, former
Tory whip, Lord Lucas of Crudwell, raised the prospect that "once a state
of emergency is declared [the government] can effectively tear up the rest of
the constitution and any bits of this bill [they do not like] and create a
republic...". Ms Chakrabati spokesman for Liberty agreed that the most
"colourful scenario" could see a secretary of state with
"absolute legislative power", theoretically mounting a threat to the
whole U.K. constitution.(1) Justified as a
"modernization" of the existing 1920 Emergency Powers Act,
the Bill proposed to give the police power to run the Internet, Utilities
including the phones, transport, local government, and the postal service.(2) If the new measures were
introduced, the Government would be able to prohibit any assembly or activity
it believed threatened national security. The laws would allow ministers to
declare a state of emergency by consulting Her Majesty The Queen but not
Parliament.
The Draft
Civil Contingencies Bill also allowed police to enforce "emergency
cordons" in major British cities in the event of a terrorist attack. The
new laws would allow police to stop the spread of infection by throwing
"health cordons" around areas hit by biological or chemical attacks,
according to the Sunday Times newspaper. It said that people would be
prevented from escaping from the affected area. Specially trained armed police
and military units would be sent in to enforce the cordons and control any
outbreak of disorder including looting. The Ministry of Defence told the
newspaper that a new civil contingency reaction force would have the option of
using live ammunition. The 7,000-strong force is to be deployed to 14 regions
in 2004.(3)
Plans have
been drawn up by the Government for a mass evacuation of London in the event of
a terrorist attack, reported The Sunday Times in Sept. 2003. Leaked
documents detail how residents could be herded into "rest and reception
areas" in the Home Counties. Disturbingly it talks about long term
rehousing if an attack made an area uninhabitable, raising the possibility of
internment and massive government orchestrated confiscation of valuable real
estate in the capital.(4)
These new
executive powers should also be seen in the context of a drive for a national
police force. The war against terrorism is set to be masterminded by a new U.K.
police force dubbed "Blunkett's Stormtroopers", Scotland on Sunday
revealed.(5)
The Civil
Contingencies Act was passed into law on 18 November 2004. I wrote two letters
to my M.P. expressing my own concerns about the Act and was delighted to
receive detailed replies from Ruth Kelly, Minister for the Cabinet Office on
both occasions. She would not accept my reasoning that the important difference
between the old and new legislation is that, whereas under the old Act,
emergency powers were explicitly restricted to protecting public interests, the
new Act makes no such stipulation, allowing them to be used to protect
government or financial interests with the associated abuses of power that
could entail. The exchange of letters is reproduced
on policestateplanning.com
USA
General
Tommy Franks, former leader of the coalition forces in Iraq says that if the
United States is hit with a weapon of mass destruction that inflicts large
casualties, the Constitution will likely be discarded in favor of a military
form of government. The General issued the warning in the December 2003 issue
of men's magazine Cigar Afficionado. If that happens, Franks said,
"... the Western world, the free world, loses what it cherishes most, and
that is freedom and liberty we've seen for a couple of hundred years in this
grand experiment that we call democracy."(6)
FEMA
The
legislation for a massive internment operation in the U.S. was created when
President Ronald Reagan was considering invading Nicaragua. He issued a series
of executive orders that provided the Federal Emergency Management Agency
(FEMA) with broad powers in the event of a "crisis" such as
"violent and widespread internal dissent or national opposition against a
U.S. military invasion abroad". From 1982-84 Colonel Oliver North assisted
FEMA in drafting its civil defence preparations. Details of these plans emerged
during the 1987 Iran-Contra scandal. They included executive orders providing
for suspension of the constitution, the imposition of martial law, internment
camps for over 21 million Americans, and the turning over of government to the
president and FEMA. Disturbingly, the full facts and final contents of Mr
Reagan's national plan remain uncertain. This is in part because President Bush
took the unusual step of sealing the Reagan presidential papers in November
2002. (7)
Recent photographs of several gigantic holding areas with guard towers and
razor wire are available to view at http://www.apfn.org/apfn/camps.htm(7
Some of the
emergency measures made public by FEMA strongly indicate that martial law
provisions drawn up by Col. Oliver North under Reagan will be fully
operational. On 14 February 2003 the Washington Post reported that
Washington DC area schools were planning to prevent parents from picking up
their own children in the event of a terrorist attack.(8) In Bolton, Massachusetts,
Nashoba regional school district told parents that they would not be allowed to
pick up their children during a red alert. Not only will they deny parents
their right to pick up their children, they will bus the children to a
"secret location".(9)
On 16
March 2003 a Ganett News Service headline read:
Red Alert? Stay Home, Await Word.
If the nation escalates to "red
alert," which is the highest in the color-coded readiness against terror,
you will be assumed by authorities to be the enemy if you so much as venture
outside your home." (10)
Furthermore
the Justice Dept. under Tom Ridge has indicated that the military will be used
by FEMA to police an emergency after they have revised the Posse Comitatus law.
"Posse Comitatus will constantly be under review as we mature this
command, as we do our exercises, as we interact with FEMA, F.B.I., and those
lead federal agencies out there," said Pentagon spokesman General Eberhart
in July 2002.(11)
The Posse
Comitatus Act that restricts the use of the military in domestic law
enforcement operations was enacted after the Civil War in response to the
perceived misuse of federal troops who were charged with keeping order in the
South.(12) However, documentary film-maker
Alex Jones reveals that Posse Comitatus is already dead. In Texas, U.S. Army
soldiers have been performing civilian law enforcement duties off base.
According to a U.S. Army SWAT Entry Team Leader with the 38th MP unit at Fort
Hood, the City of Killeen has been using the Fort Hood SWAT Team to serve
warrants and arrest civilians for at least the past two years.(13)
QUARANTINE
AND FORCED VACCINATION
Under The
Model State Emergency Health Powers Act drawn up for the Centers for
Disease Control (CDC) in November 2001, in the event of a bio-terrorist attack,
public health officials want to be able to close roads and airports, herd
people into stadiums and, if necessary, quarantine entire infected cities. The
"Mandatory Medical Examinations" section (602) of the law, persons
refusing to submit to medical examinations and/or testings are liable for
misdemeanors and forced isolation. If public health authorities suspect
individuals may have been exposed to broadly defined infectious diseases, or
otherwise pose a risk to public health, officials may issue detainment orders.
In the case of an urban attack, or even one suspected, thousands of people
could possibly be marshalled into isolation camps, according to the law. In
this case, physicians, assisted by police, will be required to perform state
medical examinations and tests. Under the law, "infectious diseases"
are very broadly defined. An infectious disease may, or may not, be transmissible
from person to person, animal to person, or insect to person. Isolation
regulations in the law provide the State with power to commandeer private
properties wherein individuals deemed infected, or exposed, might be housed
under quarantine. Section 604 of the Act details vaccination and treatment
protocols. Following these mandates, public health authorities may compel
people to be inoculated and/or drugged by the State. Individuals refusing to be
vaccinated or treated would be liable for a misdemeanor, subject to police
arrest, isolation or quarantine. The "model legislation" exempts the
State, its political subdivisions, including the Governor, public health
authorities, the police, or other State officials, from liabilities associated
with the death or injury to persons, or damage to property, as a result of
complying with, or attempting to comply with, the Act. Furthermore,
"Section 807" repeals existing state laws that are in conflict with
the Act. Under this part, for instance, previous laws granting medical,
religious, or philosophical exemptions to vaccination would be repealed.(14)(15)
Because the
all States did not pass this draft legislation unamended, on 13 November 2002,
the Homeland Security Act HR5710, which created the Department of
Homeland Security, contained a provision giving the Secretary of Department of
Health and Human Services (HHS) power to order the forcible innoculation of all
Americans with the Smallpox vaccine. He would only have to declare the
"potential" of a bio-terror attack to invoke such power.(16)(17)
10.2
FOREIGN TROOPS
Alex Jones
videoed a major urban warfare training exercise in Oakland California in 1999.
This is corroborated by the U.S. Defense Dept.'s own website on Operation Urban
Warrior at http://www.defenselink.mil/specials/urbanwarrior/.
Troops from Britain, Australia, and The Netherlands trained with U.S. military
and police in direct violation of the Posse Comitatus law forbidding the
military from assuming civilian police powers. Alex Jones commentates:
During Operation Urban Warrior,
actors posed as American citizens who were unconstitutionally seized from their
homes by the military and police. These Americans were rounded up and confined
behind barbed-wire. The actors were told to demand to be let free and state
that they had rights. They were also told to demand food and water. The troops
in turn were taught to ignore them and to order them to behave in an orderly
fashion. "Civil disobedience will not be tolerated", was one of the
many disturbing statements heard to emanate from the military's loud speakers.(18)
The Defense
Dept. states that part of the task was to "conduct a mid-intensity combat
operation in an urban environment against a backdrop of civil unrest, and
restore order. "(19) Urban Warfare
training has taken place in numerous cities over the 1990's including San
Antonio, Chicago, Kingsville (Texas), and Pittsburgh.
It is now
becoming clear exactly who is going to do the real dirty work against opponents
of the New World Order. The proposal for a NATO " rapid reaction force
" came from Trojan Horse Donald Rumsfeld in September 2002.(20) The agreement to
Rumsfeld's plan was achieved in Prague in November 2002. At the same time
Estonia, Latvia, Lithuania, Bulgaria, Romania, Slovakia and Slovenia were
invited to join NATO in 2004. (21) Another three countries - Croatia,
Albania, and Macedonia - hope to join the organization in the next few years.
Who better to put Americans in detention camps than their old communist
enemies? On 22nd September 2003, a NATO exercise in Galloway, Scotland saw
Ukrainian troops pulling unsuspecting motorists out of their cars in a mock
hunt for suspected terrorists. This formed part of a much larger NATO
"crisis response" operation called Exercise Northern Lights, a
training run for the new NATO Response Force, as it is now called, expected to
be partially operational by October 2004 and fully operational by 2006.(22) The Galloway operation and a
second operation in Turkey on 20 November 2003. According to the NATO website,
"The forces rescued and evacuated the U.N. staff and civilians,
established an embargo, engaged in counter-terrorist operations and a show of
force". Interestingly, it occurred on the same day as terrorists bombed
the British Embassy and HSBC bank in Istanbul, killing 27 people.(23)
In order to
justify bringing in foreign troops to combat domestic "terrorism",
the U.S. Government will send the National Guard abroad to fight. In 2003,
174,000 of the 350,000 reserves and national guard were on active duty.(24) Since the 1991 Gulf War, the U.S.
Government has increased the number of National Guard and reserves in foreign
operations. During the Vietnam War, only 8,700 were deployed but over 75,000
Army and Air Guardsmen were called upon to help bring a swift end to Desert
Storm in 1991. Since that time, the National Guard has seen the nature of its
Federal mission change, with more frequent call ups in response to crises in
Haiti, Bosnia, Kosovo, and the skies over Iraq.(25)
10.3 GUN
CONFISCATION
Firearms:
Everyone should have one and know how to use and clean it - it may just save
your life. But more importantly there's nothing that demoralizes an invading
enemy more than being shot at. - George Orwell, advice to the Home
Guard, 1939. Source: BBC documentary, George Orwell: A Life In
Pictures, 14 June 2003
Whether
guns cause or prevent crime and need to be controlled for this reason is a
controversial issue for many people. However, it is clear from history that
civilian ownership of firearms is a major deterant to tyrannical governments.
This is why the current move towards gun control in the U.S., supported by the
U.N. campaign against small arms, should be viewed with grave suspicion.
Unarmed or disarmed citizens are far more likely to be murdered by governments
than by common criminals or to die in wars. Gun control laws are often imposed
by governments with murderous intent.
Writing in The
Arizona Journal of International & Comparative Law No. 3, 483-535 (2000)
Stephen Halbrook argues that German Jews and other German opponents of Hitler
were not destined to be helpless and passive victims. The 1928 Weimar Law on
Firearms and Ammunition required the registration of most lawfully owned
firearms, as do the laws of some American states. The Weimar registration
programme provided the information which the Nazis needed to disarm the Jews
and others considered untrustworthy. In November 1938, the Nazis passed their
own Weapons Law which banned Jews from the firearms business and required
surrender of all firearms and edged weapons. In the same month came The Night
of the Broken Glass (Kristallnacht)--the infamous Nazi rampage against
Germany's Jews. Aside from the Jews there was almost no resistance in Germany
itself, because the Nazis had enjoyed years in which they could enforce the gun
laws to ensure that no potential opponent of the regime had the means to
resist. Under the Weimar Law, the German police were granted complete
discretion to deny licenses to criminals or individuals the police deemed
untrustworthy. The Nazi disarmament campaign began as soon as Hitler assumed
power in 1933. Other European countries also had laws requiring police records
to be kept on persons who possessed firearms. When the Nazis took over
Czechoslovakia and Poland in 1939, it was a simple matter to identify gun
owners. Many of them disappeared in the middle of the night along with
political opponents. The invasion of Belgium, Holland and France in May 1940
was accompanied by a law called Regulations on Arms Possession in the Occupied
Zone which ordered the surrender of all firearms and munitions on pain of
death. Switzerland was the only country in Europe, indeed in the world, where
every man had a military rifle in his home. Nazi invasion plans acknowledged
the dissuasive nature of this armed populace.(26)
In a review
by David B. Kopel of the book entitled Lethal Laws, published by Jews
for the Preservation of Firearms, Kopel gives a stark warning to advocates of
gun control. All of the major tyrannical regimes of the twentieth century
imposed restrictive gun laws on the populations before they murdered and
terrorized them en masse. The countries examined were Ottoman Turkey, USSR,
Nazi Germany, China, Guatemala, Uganda, and Cambodia. The same thing happened
in Rwanda and the former Yugoslavia at the time the book was written.
R.J.
Rummel, the world's foremost scholar of the mass murders of the 20th century
and finalist for 1996 Nobel Peace Prize, gives statistical dimension to state
sponsored murder. Statistics of Democide,1997, and Death by
Government,1994, provide data on mass murder by governments throughout the
20th century. In chapter 2 of Death by Government he defines the murder
of civilians and POW's by governments - in contrast to soldiers dying in combat
and civilians who are killed unintentionally during war - as " democide
":
Democide's necessary and sufficient meaning is that of the intentional
government killing of an unarmed or disarmed person or people. [emphasis
added] (27)
What is the
track record of governments of undemocratic countries murdering unarmed
citizens? According to table 1.6 in Death By Government, the average
estimate of the total number of victims of government sponsored mass murder
over the twentieth century was 169,202, 000. If the military and civilian
deaths caused by war for the whole twentieth century are added, the death total
only rises to an estimated 203,000,000.(28)
The more
alarming fact about Rummel's statistics is that the ratio of governments
murdering their own citizens to foreign citizens is approximately 3 to 1.
Rummel says that of the 169,202,000 democide deaths, 129,908,000 were domestic
killings. The biggest murder of citizens by their own governments took place in
Russia and China under Stalin and Mao. The Nazis killed mostly foreigners
(estimate 20 million) and only about a million of their own. According to
Rummel, the People's Republic of China killed a statistically insignificant
number of foreigners but a median estimate of 35 million of their own between
1945 and 1987. The USSR killed about 54 million of their own but only 7 million
foreigners 1917-1987.(29)
Equally important to our current predicament is
Rummell's observation in Power Kills that democide is highly and
inversely related to democracy and that democracies never make war on each
other:
There is one solution to each and
the solution in each case is the same. It is to foster democratic freedom and
to democratize coercive power and force. That is, mass killing and mass murder
carried out by government is a result of indiscriminate, irresponsible power at
the center. Or in terms of the title of this book, power kills. (30)
The
most powerful person and the driving force behind the New World Order in the
U.S. for the last few decades has been David Rockefeller. In an article in the New
York Times, 10 August 1973, he was quoted:
Whatever the price of the Chinese
Revolution, it has obviously succeeded not only in producing more efficient and
dedicated administration, but also in fostering high morale and community of
purpose. The social experiment in China under Chairman Mao's leadership is one
of the most important and successful in human history.
David
Rockefeller still heads the CFR and Bilderberg group which are working to
relinquish American national sovereignty to the United Nations. Stephen
Rockefeller works with ex- KGB chief Mikhael Gorbachev to formulate and promote
the radical U.N. environmental laws. Since 9/11, Western countries become less
and less democratic every day at an alarming pace; this process is being
coordinated internationally. Of the seven genocidal governments studied in Lethal
Laws, not one announced its intention to its victims. All of the victims
were told that they were being temporarily relocated or another lie in order to
induce them not to resist. And one of the reasons that the lies were believed
by so many people is that there are many governments throughout world history
which have sent people on forced marches or other forms of forced relocation
and not killed them. Currently, the Bush Administration is contemplating a
draft of civilian professionals into the U.S. Army to be sent over to the
Middle East. These are America's middle class - engineers, doctors, etc. It has
consistently lied to its regular troops about the length of time they will stay
in Iraq. At this time, it appears they will be there for years to come. Over
three hundred thousand U.S. troops who have served in the Gulf Region since
1990 are now seriously ill with Gulf War Illness and tens of thousands more
have died from it.
Chapter 10
End Notes
1. Terror laws are 'needless
totalitarianism', BBC, London, 17 Sept. 2003. See
http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/uk_politics/3114552.stm
and Terror threat sparks new powers, 26 Nov. 2003. See
http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/uk_politics/3236844.stm
2. David Leppard, Police will run
internet after terrorist attack, The Times Online, London, 15 June
2003. See http://www.propagandamatrix.com/
police_will_run_internet_after_terrorist_attack.htm
3. 'Terror cordon' plan for UK
cities, BBC, London, 2 Dec. 2002. See
http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/uk_politics/2612319.stm
4. Peter Fray, London could be
evacuated if attacked, The Sydney Morning Herald, 8 Sept. 2003. See http://www.smh.com.au/articles/2003/09/07/1062901944298.html
5. Ian Johnston, 'Blunkett's
Stormtroopers' to open new front in war against terrorism, Scotland on Sunday,
10 Aug. 2003. See http://www.scotlandonsunday.com/uk.cfm?id=873642003
6. Martial Law Will Replace
Constitution After Next Terror Attack, Newsmax, 21 Nov. 2003. See http://www.infowars.com/print/ps/franks_martial.htm
7. Ritt Goldstein, Foundations are
in place for martial law in the US, Sydne Morning Herald, 27 July 2002
http://www.smh.com.au/articles/2002/07/27/1027497418339.html
8. David Cho, Schools Boost
Preparations for Attack, Many Anti-Terror Plans Would Stop Parents From Picking
Up Children, Washington Post, 14 February 2003.
See http://www.washingtonpost.com/ac2/
wp-dyn?pagename=article&node=&contentId=
A5447-2003Feb13¬Found=true
9. Document sent by a parent to Alex
Jones, radio talk show host in Austin TX. See
http://infowars.com/print_sovietschoolspg1.htm
http://infowars.com/print_sovietschoolspg2.htm
http://infowars.com/print_sovietschoolspg3.htm
10. Tom Baldwin, Red Alert? Stay
home await word, Gannett News Service, Trenton NJ, 16 March 2003. See http://www.propagandamatrix.com/red_alert_stay_home_await_word
11. Northern Command General
Endorses Posse Comitatus Review, Newsmax, 22 July 2002. See http://www.newsmax.com/archives/articles/2002/7/22/01218.shtml
12. Gene Healy, Misguided Mission
for Military, The Cato Institute, 31 July 2002. See
http://www.cato-institute.org/research/articles/healy-020731.html
13. Martial Law Has Begun,
Alex Jones.
See
http://www.infowars.com/martiallaw.html
14. CDC Advances Totalitarian
Legislation Under Guise of "Public Health", Tetrahedron, LLC,
Health Science Communications, 9 Nov. 2001. See http://tetrahedron.org/news/NR011109.html
15. The Model State Emergency
Health Powers Act, Draft Legislation as of December 2001, The Center for
Law and The Public's Health. See
http://www.publichealthlaw.net/MSEHPA/MSEHPA2.pdf
16. Congressman Ron Paul, U.S. House
of Representatives, Oppose The New Homeland Security Bureaucracy, 13
Nov. 2002. See
http://www.house.gov/paul/congrec/congrec2002/cr111302.htm
17. Section 304, Homeland
Security Act, 2002.
See http://www.cdi.org/terrorism/homeland-security.pdf
18. Alex Jones, Operation Urban
Warrior, Infowars.com.
See http://www.infowars.com/ouwmar9901.html
19. Gar Smith, One nation under
guard, The San Francisco Bay Guardian, 10 March 1999. See
http://www.sfbg.com/News/33/23/Features/war.html
20. Rumsfeld Plans to Propose
NATO Rapid Reaction Force, Defense Secretary Interview with CNN, 21 Sept.
2002.
See copy on US Dept of State website
http://usinfo.state.gov/regional/nea/iraq/text/0922rmfd.htm
21. Quick Guide: Nato,
BBC, 19 Nov. 2003.
See http://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/europe/country_profiles/1549072.stm
22. Ukrainian marines stop
drivers. BBC, London, 23 Sept. 2003.
See http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/scotland/3131058.stm
and Scottish coast to host war games, BBC, London, 11 Sept. 2003.
See http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/scotland/3100730.stm
23. Response Force demonstrates
capability in first exercise, NATO website. See http://www.nato.int/shape/news/2003/11/i031121a.htm
24. Iraq effect shakes National
Guard, Christian Science Monitor, 18 Sept. 2003. See
http://www.csmonitor.com/2003/0918/p02s01-usmi.html
25. National Guard Fact Sheet,
National Guard website. See
http://www.ngb.army.mil/downloads/fact_sheets/arng.asp
26. Stephen Halbrook, Nazi
Firearms and the Disarming of the German Jews.
See Stephen Halbrook's website for article at
http://www.stephenhalbrook.com/article-nazilaw.pdf
also reviewed by David Kopel and Richard Griffiths, Hitler's Control, The
lessons of Nazi history. National Review Online 22 May 2003 http://www.nationalreview.com/kopel/kopel052203.asp
Halbrook's article is also a chapter in a book published by Jews for the
Preservation of Firearms called Death By Gun Control. Halbrook cites a
review by David Kopel of an earlier JPFA publication called Lethal Laws
by Jay Simkin, Aaron Zelman, & Alan M. Rice. See http://www.jpfo.org and http://www.lethallaws.com/kopel.htm.
27. published on-line at http://www.hawaii.edu/powerkills/DBG.CHAP2.HTM
28. R.J. Rummel, Death By
Government, New Brunswick, N.J.:Transaction Publishers, 1994,
Table 1.6. See http://www.hawaii.edu/powerkills/DBG.TAB1.6.GIF
29. R.J. Rummel, Statistics of
Democide: Genocide and Mass Murder Since 1900, Charlottesville,
Virginia: Center for National Security Law, School of Law, University of
Virginia,1997; and Transaction Publishers, Rutgers University, Table 16A.
Summary Democide Totals. See http://www.hawaii.edu/powerkills/SOD.TAB16A.1.GIF
30. R.J. Rummel, Power Kills,
Democracy as a Method of Nonviolence, New Brunswick, N.J.:
Transaction Publishers, 1997. See http://www.hawaii.edu/powerkills/PK.CHAP1.HTL
Chapter 11
THE LEGAL APPARATUS OF TOTALITARIANISM
... war hysteria is
continuous and universal in all countries, and such acts as raping, looting,
the slaughter of children, the reduction of whole populations to slavery, and
reprisals against prisoners which extend even to boiling and burying alive, are
looked upon as normal, and, when they are committed by one's own side and not
by the enemy, meritorious.
- George Orwell, 1984, part
2, chapter 9
The War on Terror
is the chosen pretext for the global integration of police, intelligence and
military functions. Since 9/11, there has been a global attack on civil liberties
and a race to set up the international technological infrastructure for a
high-tech feudal society. Governments across the world are promoting the idea
that society must militarize itself in order to be free from terror, i.e.
abandon moral convictions, sweep aside distinctions between foreign and
domestic threats, and even the distinction between terrorism and ordinary
crime. When a country is at war, their is no atrocity it will not justify in
the name of victory. Once the legal and technological apparatus of
totalitarianism is established, there exists the very real prospect of a
permanent planetary dictatorship where human existence is micro-managed from
cloud cuckoo land by a tiny ruling elite who are themselves above the law.
11.1
INTEGRATION
The European
globalists seized upon the Madrid train bombing of 11 March 2004 to push
forward key areas of E.U. judicial and security integration. Brussels responded
with a 'counter-terrorism summit' which drafted 57 proposals on criminal
justice, security, and terrorism. Britain had hitherto been reluctant to
surrender judicial powers to Brussels, but following the summit, Whitehall
signaled that the Government was preparing to drop its veto over important
areas of judicial cooperation. (1)
These included many proposals which were already on the table in Brussels: The
establishment of an E.U. intelligence agency and E.U. security coordinator; an
E.U. database of forensic material; the logging of all telecommunications;
tracking all air travel in and out and within the E.U. (effectively an E.U.
version of the U.S.'s controversial PNR, CAPPS II and US-VISIT plans); the
fingerprinting of nearly everyone in the E.U. by the introduction of biometric
passports and ID cards for citizens and the same for resident third country
nationals; the development of the Schengen Information System (SIS) and Visa
Information Systems (VIS) to store the new identification and visa data; and
simplification of procedures for exchange of information - including personal
information such as DNA, fingerprints and visa data - between intelligence and
law enforcement agencies.(2)
An analysis
by StateWatch of London, concluded that 27 of the 57 proposals had little or
nothing to do with tackling terrorism.
11.2
MENTAL HEALTH LAWS
The U.K.
Government is moving to expand the use of mental health laws to control the
wider population. The draft Mental health Bill published in June 2002, included
plans to force mentally ill people living in the community to take their
medication and proposals to detain dangerous people with severe personality
disorders even if they have not committed a crime.(3) 'Serious personality disorder' has
no medical diagnosis. The Joint House of Commons and House of Lords Committee
on Human Rights have serious reservations about some aspects of the draft:1)The
compulsory detention of people for the protection of others when the people
detained have never been charged with any criminal offence; 2) the breadth of
circumstances in which a patient could be subjected to compulsory, non
consensual treatment; 3) that part of current laws which prevents detention 'by
reason of promiscuity or other immoral conduct, sexual deviancy or dependence
on drugs or alcohol' has been omitted from the Bill. The committee warned that
Nazi Germany and the U.S.S.R. were probably not the only countries in which
socially or politically unacceptable behaviour was regarded as a manifestation
of a 'disorder of the mind'. (4)
In the
U.S., Missouri dentist Charles Sell has waited in a federal prison for more
than four years for trial on charges of Medicaid fraud. The delay is attributed
to the Government's persistent argument that Sell is not mentally competent to
stand trial unless he is forcibly drugged. He is, they say, suffering from
delusions because he thought there was a Government effort to cover up his
personal knowledge of the its culpability in the 1993 deaths at the Branch
Davidian land near Waco, Texas. The state has diagnosed Sell as having what it
calls a 'delusional disorder'. As an Army Reservist called up to serve as an
expert in forensic dentistry, Dr. Sell was on the scene the day of the tragic
fire. Other issues include accusations of Dr. Sell using politically incorrect
swear words. The Government wants to make him competent by forcefully giving
him powerful medicine. Dr. Sell doesn't want to be medicated since he's had bad
reactions to similar drugs in the past. Also, one of the medicines that the
Government might want to use on him is an experimental medicine that could kill
him.(5)(6)
The
twentieth century's most tyrannical regimes pioneered the use of psychiatric
'treatment' against political dissidents. Vladimir Bukovsky spent 12 years in
Soviet prisons and psychiatric hospitals due to his outspoken opposition to
communism.(7)
Wherever manifestations of dissidence couldn't be explained away as a legacy of
the past, they were viewed as mental illness. One leading psychiatrist had incarcerated
thousands of sane men in lunatic asylums on orders from the KGB. Drugs were
administered as punishment for anti-social behaviour. These are not only
painful but can have lasting side effects. Bukovsky said that a few of the
doctors called the psychiatric hospital in which he was interned, 'our little
Auschwitz.'(8)
11.3
ABOLITION OF JURIES AND ARBITRARY DETENTION
UK
The 2003 Criminal
Justice Act contains three areas of serious concern: 1) Removal of the
right to trial by jury in complex fraud cases or where the judge and
prosecution believe their is a risk of jury tampering 2) abolishing the double
jeopardy makes all acquittals conditional; 3) the admissibility of previous
convictions, acquittals and hearsay evidence.(9)(10)This is moving British
justice towards a European style inquisitorial system, away from the
traditional adversarial system. These measures are designed to harmonize the
U.K. with the E.U. Corpus Juris proposal put forward in April
1997. CJ will set up a European Public Prosecutor on the continental
inquisitorial model, who will have over-riding jurisdiction throughout Europe
to instruct national judges to issue arrest warrants against suspects and have
them held in custody for nine months pending investigation (or
transported to other countries in Europe) with no obligation to produce
prosecution evidence and no right to a public hearing during this time. The
cases are then to be tried by special courts, consisting of professional judges
and excluding simple jurors and lay magistrates. The E.U. public prosecutor is
responsible for both investigation and prosecution of the crimes. Our rights of
habeas corpus established in 1679 and trial by jury established by Magna
Carta in 1215 are to be nullified. Furthermore, the European Arrest Warrant
removes the need for any formal extradition procedures for 32 crimes, some of
which are not even crimes in U.K. law. These include xenophobia and racism
which encompass criticism of the E.U.. The Corpus Juris manual itself,
(Sous la direction de Mireille Delmas-Marty, ISBN 2-7178-3344-7, p40, para 3),
informs us that: "[Corpus Juris is] designed to ensure, in a largely
unified European legal area, a fairer, simpler and more efficient system of
repression."(11)(12)(13)(14)(15)
Under the Anti-Terrorism,
Crime and Security Act 2001, the Home Secretary could order that a foreign
national be detained indefinitely on suspicion that he was either a terrorist
or a threat to national security. However, in December 2004, the law lords
ruled that these powers contravened the European Convention on Human Rights and
ordered the release of twelve foreign nationals who could otherwise have been
detained in prison indefinitely. In response, the Government introduced the Prevention
of Terrorism Bill, which gives the Home Secretary power to impose 'control
orders' on both British and foreign terror suspects. Instead of holding
suspects in prison, the control orders could: Impose house arrest or other
restrictions on movements, including electronic tagging; restrict association
and communication with specified people; restrict use of telephones and the
internet. This overturns 800 years of British legal history by taking away both
habeus corpus and trial by jury, and giving judicial powers to the Home
Secretary! Unsurprisingly it faces a stormy passage through both Houses of
Parliament. (16)
On 31 March 2003, Home
Secretary David Blunkett, signed an extradition treaty on behalf of the U.K.
with his U.S.counterpart, Attorney General John Ashcroft. This ostensibly
brings the U.S. into line with procedures between European countries.
Parliament was not consulted at all and the text was not available until the
end of May. Like the European Arrest Warrant, it removes the requirement on the
U.S. to provide prima facie evidence when requesting the extradition of
people from the U.K., although that requirement remains when the U.K. makes the
request of the U.S..(17)
USA
Section 412 of
the U.S.A. Patriot Act allows for the indefinite detention of
non-citizens. The Attorney General has unprecedented new power to order their
detention based on a certification that he has reasonable grounds to believe a
non-citizen endangers national security. Worse still, if no other country will
accept them, they can be detained indefinitely in the U.S. without trial. In
January 2003, a decision by the 4th U.S. Circuit Court of Appeals in Richmond,
Va. on the case of Yaser Esam Hamdi, affirmed the Government's authority to
detain indefinitely American citizens captured in foreign battles or those who
participate in terrorist attacks against U.S. interests abroad.(18)The court did not
address questions about U.S. citizens arrested as enemy combatants in the U.S.
Furthermore, in June 2003, a U.S Federal Court ruled that the Government can
keep secret the names of the hundreds of foreigners detained since 9/11.(19)The Government has classified as an
'enemy combatant', Jose Padilla of Chicago, who was arrested at O'Hare Airport
on suspicion of plotting domestic terrorism after returning from Pakistan. This
unconstitutional detention still awaits judicial review (20)
Judicial
Review of Padilla's case will be void if Ashcroft's 'Patriot Act II' is
passed because it gives him power to designate U.S. citizens 'enemy combatants'
for terrorist activity carried out in the U.S.. Section 501 (Expatriation of
Terrorists) expands the 'enemy combatant' definition to all American citizens
who 'may' have violated any provision of section 802 of the first Patriot Act.
Section 101 will also designate individual American terrorists as 'foreign
powers' and again strip them of all rights under the 'enemy combatant'
designation. Under section 802 of Patriot Act I, the term `domestic
terrorism' means activities that, `(A) involve acts dangerous to human life
that are a violation of the criminal laws of the United States or of any State;
`(B) appear to be intended, `(i) to intimidate or coerce a civilian population;
`(ii) to influence the policy of a government by intimidation or coercion; or
`(iii) to affect the conduct of a government by mass destruction,
assassination, or kidnapping; and `(C) occur primarily within the territorial
jurisdiction of the United States.(21) Not only has the Justice Department
stated they can infer from conduct that someone is not a U.S. citizen but also
under section 201 of 'Patriot Act II', it is a criminal act for any
member of the Government or any citizen to release any information concerning
the incarceration or whereabouts of detainees. It also states that law
enforcement does not even have to tell the press who they have arrested and
they never have to release their names. Therefore section 501 of 'Patriot
Act II' means that a U.S. citizen engaging in lawful activities can be
grabbed off the street and thrown into a van never to be seen with absolutely
no right of appeal!(22)(23)
Section 322
of ' Patriot Act II' removes Congress from the extradition process and
allows officers of the Homeland Security complex to extradite American citizens
anywhere they wish. It also allows Homeland Security to secretly take
individuals out of foreign countries.
A draft of
the bill was leaked to Washington D.C. watchdog, The Center For Public
Integrity, in January 2003. It caused such a furore that the bill was
immediately shelved. However there are three ways the Government might use to
get it passed: 1) After the next major terror attack, it will be rushed into
law by panicked legislators in the same way Patriot Act I was passed in
the immediate aftermath of 9/11; 2) the Government will declare martial law and
impose the legislation without authority from Congress; 3) the bill will be
broken down into pieces and tacked onto other legislation.
On 12 June
2003 the The Guardian newspaper reported that U.S. military officials
are making preparations for the trial and possible execution of captives held
in Guantanamo Bay, including the construction of a death chamber. A building at
the detention camp in Cuba for suspected Al-Qaida members is being renovated to
serve as a courtroom for military tribunals, signaling that the U.S. is moving
towards bringing charges against some of the prisoners.(24) According to The Mail on Sunday:
American law
professor Jonathan Turley, who has led U.S. civil rights group protests against
the military tribunals planned to hear cases at Guantanamo Bay, said: "It
is not surprising the authorities are building a death row because they have
said they plan to try capital cases before these tribunals. "This camp was
created to execute people. The administration has no interest in long-term
prison sentences for people it regards as hard-core terrorists."(25)
In June
2004, The Washington Post published on its web site an internal White
House memo from 1st August 2002, signed by then Assistant Attorney General Jay
S. Bybee, which argued darkly that torturing al-Qaida captives "may be
justified" and that international laws against torture may be
unconstitutional if applied to interrogations" conducted under President
Bush. The memo then continued for 50 pages to make the case for the use of torture.
The Bybee memo was clearly the basis for the working-group report on detainee
interrogations presented to Defense Secretary Donald H. Rumsfeld a year later.(26)(27)
The torture techniques being practiced on teenage goat-herders from Afghanistan(28) are a first step
towards using torture on U.S. citizens who are deemed 'enemy combatants' i.e. anybody
at all. Pictures of prisoners shackled, bound and with bags over their heads,
serves to de-sensitize the public, police and military to the most disgusting
but necessary instrument of dictatorship. The notion that torture is acceptable
is also being heavily promoted in the mainstream American media.
11.4
EXPANDING THE DEFINITION OF 'TERRORISM'
The purpose of
creating crimes of 'domestic terrorism', is to abolish civil rights and to
dramatically increase the power of government. This this was forseen in a
report published by the U.S. Army War College in July 1994, entitled Revolution
in Military Affairs and Conflicts Short of War:
American leaders
popularized a new, more inclusive concept of national security. No
distinction--legal or otherwise--was drawn between internal and external
threats. In the interdependent 21st century world, such a differentiation was
dangerously nostalgic. The new concept of security also included ecological,
public health, electronic, psychological, and economic threats. Illegal
immigrants carrying resistant strains of disease were considered every bit as
dangerous as enemy soldiers. Actions which damaged the global ecology, even if
they occurred outside the nominal borders of the United States, were seen as
security threats which should be stopped by force if necessary. Computer
hackers were enemies.(29)
THE UK
DEFINITION:
The U.K.
2000 Terrorism Act expands the definition of terrorism to include
serious damage to property or computer systems, designed to intimidate a
section of the public, and which is carried out for political, religious or
ideological reasons. This could include animal rights activism, tree protesters
and even some kinds of industrial action. The Home Secretary is afforded powers
to designate and proscribe 'terrorist' organizations. This is a very
significant power because of the severe penalties imposed for anyone involved
or associated with these groups. Amnesty International have pointed out the
potential for repressive foreign governments to press for their political
enemies to be so designated. Membership of a proscribed organization carries a
ten year prison sentence. Organizing or addressing a meeting which includes
members of a proscribed group is an offence under section 12. This even
criminalizes independent third parties such as journalists who arrange private
meetings which include a member of proscribed group. Section 56 criminalizes
any level of activity within a proscribed group even if it has nothing to do
with terrorism. It carries a maximum sentence of life imprisonment. Section 57
imposes ten years imprisonment for possessing something which could be
construed as being intended for use in terrorist activities.
Section 44
of the Terrorism Act allows police limited power to stop and
search people for articles 'of a kind which could be used in connection with
terrorism'. The important issues are that the police do not have to demonstrate
any grounds for reasonable suspicion whereas The Police and Criminal
Evidence Act (PACE) allows a constable stop and search authority if they
are acting on reasonable grounds. Secondly if the constable does find
the items in question, and if there is reasonable suspicion that they will be
used for terrorist purposes, they may be seized and retained.(30) Section 44 notices
have been used by police to stop and search protesters at RAF Fairford during
the Iraq war and more recently against protesters at an international arms fair
in London.(31)
THE EU
DEFINITION
Article 1
of the Framework Decision on Combating Terrorism December 2001 reads:
[offences] which
are intentionally committed by an individual or a group against one or more
countries, their institutions or people with the aim of intimidating them and
seriously altering or destroying the political, economic or social structures
of those countries will be punishable as terrorist offences.
Article 4
extends the definition to include 'instigating, aiding, abetting or attempting
to commit a terrorist offence' and Article 5m., 'Promoting of, supporting of or
participation in a terrorist group.' Explanatory notes state that Article 3.,
defining terrorist offences 'could include, for instance, urban violence'. The
inclusion in Article 3f. of the 'unlawful seizure of or damage to state or
government facilities, means of public transport, infrastructure facilities,
places of public use, and property' (property covers public and private) could
embrace a wide range of demonstration and protests, ranging from the
non-violent Greenham Common protests against a U.S. cruise missile base in the
U.K., to the anti-globalization protests in Genoa. The phrase in Article
3h.,'endangering people, property, animals or the environment', could refer,
for example, to animal right protests.(32)
Under
Article 5. the prison sentences imposed are long: 5l., Directing a terrorist
group 15 years; and 5m., promoting of, supporting of or participation in a
terrorist group, 7 years. Terrorists will also lose their right to vote.
The E.U.
anti-terrorism laws are being directed against protesters at E.U. summits and
other international conferences. Following the arrest and shooting of
protesters at the E.U. summit in Gothenberg 14-16 June 2001, a Police
Cooperation Working Party met in Brussels on 4 July. This was quickly followed
by a series of meetings by the E.U. Council's Justice and Home Affairs
committee who requested that member states participate in i) surveillance of
protest groups ii) the plan to create a new database on the Schengen Information
System (SIS) on protestors; iii) the plan agreed to bring together
para-military police units (eg: carabineri, CRS, Tactical Support Groups for EU
Summits and international meetings.(33)
THE
AMERICAN DEFINITION
Under
section 802. of the Patriot Act , the term 'domestic terrorism'
means activities that, `(A) involve acts dangerous to human life that are a
violation of the criminal laws of the United States or of any State; `(B)
appear to be intended,`(i) to intimidate or coerce a civilian population; `(ii)
to influence the policy of a government by intimidation or coercion; or `(iii) to
affect the conduct of a government by mass destruction, assassination, or
kidnapping; and '(C) occur primarily within the territorial jurisdiction of the
United States.'
Also under
section 802, the U.S. Government can bankrupt political organizations it
asserts are involved in domestic terrorism. The government can seize and/or
freeze the assets on the mere assertion that there is probable cause to believe
that the assets were involved in domestic terrorism. The assets are seized
before a person is given a hearing, and often without notice. In order to
permanently forfeit the assets, the Government must go before a court, but at a
civil hearing, and it is only required to prove that the assets were involved
in terrorism by a preponderance of the evidence. Section 806 is so broadly
defined that it could include anyone who supported a terrorist group in any
way.(34)
Section
301-306 of 'Patriot Act II' (Terrorist Identification Database)
authorizes a national database of suspected terrorists and radically expands
the database to include anyone associated with suspected terrorist groups and
anyone involved in crimes or having supported any group designated as
terrorist. These sections also set up a national DNA database for anyone on
probation or who has been on probation for any crime, and orders State
governments to collect the DNA for the Federal government.(28) Section 402 is titled
"Providing Material Support to Terrorism." The section reads that
there is no requirement to show that the individual even had the intent to aid
terrorists. Section 411 expands crimes that are punishable by death. Again,
they point to Section 802 of the first Patriot Act and state that any
terrorist act or support of terrorist act can result in the death penalty.
Section 421 increases penalties for terrorist financing. This section states
that any type of financial activity connected to terrorism will result to time
in prison and $10-50,000 fines per violation.(35)(36)
A flyer
created by the Phoenix FBI suggests that police officers contact the Joint
Terrorism Task Force if they encounter any of the following persons (a partial
list):
Right
Wing Extremists: Defenders of U.S. Constitution against federal government and
the U.N. (Super Patriots),
Left
Wing Terrorism: Political motivation is usually Marxist/Leninist philosophy
Common
Law Movement Proponents: make numerous references to the U.S. constitution,
attempt to police the police.
Single
Issue Terrorist: Animal Rights, Eco-terrorism, Lone individuals, Cyber
penetration, violent anti-abortion extremism
Hate
Groups: Black separatists, Christian Identity.(37)
This is not
an isolated incident. Alex Jones' film 911:The Road To Tyranny, shows
Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) teaching a class of police officers
that terrorists include the Founding Fathers of America, gun owners, Christians
and home schoolers.(38)
The New
York Times announced on 17 September 2003 that there is to be a database of
100,000 suspected terrorists. It will be run jointly by the CIA, FBI, State
Dept. and Dept. Homeland Security. Justice Dept. officials said they expected
the centre to be operating by December. It will track not only suspected
foreign terrorists but also Americans tied to domestic events like violence at
abortion clinics.(39)
11.5
SURVEILLANCE LAWS
UK
The 2001 Anti-Terrorism,
Crime and Security Act enables the police and security services to go
through personal information held by 'public authorities', e.g. medical
records, bank statements, school records, Inland Revenue files, even though no
crime (let alone terrorist offence) has been committed or even suspected. No
judicial oversight is required and indeed the information can be volunteered by
the public bodies on a spontaneous basis.(40) 'Public authority ' is defined by
the 1998 Human Rights Act (6)(3) as (a) a court or tribunal, and (b) any person
whose functions are of a public nature. (41)
Section 19
of the 2000 Terrorism Act makes it a criminal offence punishable
by up to five years in prison, not to disclose to the police information that
creates suspicion of terrorist activity when discovered in the course of one's
' trade, profession, business or employment'.(42)
On 24 November
2004, the Government introduced the Serious Organised Crime and Police Bill,
which sets up a an FBI-style Serious Organized Crimes Agency (SOCA). This Bill
is still being debated, but the Fourth Report of the Joint Committee on
Human Rights raises serious concerns over surveillance powers granted to
the Agency. It confers broad powers to SOCA to gather, store and analyse
information relating to crime generally not just serious crime. It also confers
broad powers over the kinds of information SOCA gathers, and the disclosure of
that information both to the Agency, and by the Agency to other Government
departments.
These laws
reflects a shift in philosophy towards the E.U. Corpus Juris model, in
which one is presumed guilty until proven innocent and therefore deserving of
continuous surveillance.(43)
USA
Section 358
of the Patriot Act requires that, in addition to law enforcement,
intelligence agencies such as the CIA also receive suspicious activity reports
from financial institutions. These reports are usually about wholly domestic
transactions of people in the United States, and do not relate to foreign
intelligence information. In addition, Section 358 allows law enforcement and
intelligence agencies to get easy access to individual credit reports in
secret. There is to be no judicial review and no notice to the person to whom
the records relate.(44)
Section 215
allows the FBI to force anyone at all - including doctors, libraries,
bookstores, universities, and internet service providers - to turn over records
on their clients or customers. The FBI does not even have to show a reasonable
suspicion to a judge that the records are related to criminal activity, much
less the requirement for 'probable cause' that is listed in the Fourth
Amendment to the Constitution. Judicial oversight of these new powers is
essentially non-existent. All the Government needs to do is make the broad
assertion that the request is related to an ongoing terrorism or foreign
intelligence investigation. A person or organization forced to turn over
records is prohibited from disclosing the search to anyone. As a result of this
gag order, the subjects of surveillance never even find out that their personal
records have been examined by the government. Section 213 expands the
Government's ability to search private property with a warrant but without
notice to the owner. This means that law enforcement agents can enter a house,
apartment or office with a search warrant when the occupants are away, search
through their property, take photographs, download files off their computer and
in some cases even seize property and not tell them until later. The Patriot
Act also changes the law to allow wiretaps and searches without showing
probable cause when 'a significant purpose' is intelligence gathering for
regular domestic criminal cases. It also expands the use of warrantless
wiretaps to include lists of websites visited and email headers.(45)
Section 106
of 'Patriot Act II' states that Government agents must be given immunity
for carrying out warrantless searches of private property. This section throws
out the entire Fourth Amendment against unreasonable searches and seizures.
Section 123 restates that the Government no longer needs warrants and that the
investigations can be a giant dragnet-style sweep. Section 126 grants the
Government the right to mine the entire spectrum of public and private sector
information from bank records to educational and medical records. This is the
enacting law to allow computers to break down all walls of privacy. The
Government states that they must look at everything to 'determine' if
individuals or groups might have a connection to terrorist groups. From cradle
to grave, all Americans will be guilty and never proven innocent. Section
301-306 sets up national databases of suspected terrorists complete with DNA
samples. The database will also be used to 'stop other unlawful activities'. It
will share the information with state, local and foreign agencies for the same
purposes. Section 313 provides liability protection for businesses, especially
big businesses that spy on their customers for Homeland Security, violating
their privacy agreements.(46)
The Intelligence
Authorization Act for Fiscal Year 2004 became Public Law No: 108-177 on
13 December 2003.(47) It achieved one of the objectives
of 'Patriot Act II' by removing the need of the FBI to obtain a warrant
before conducting searches of third party information. Congressman Ron Paul
made a speech against the bill in November:
I am
referring to the stealth addition of language drastically expanding FBI powers
to secretly and without court order snoop into the business and financial
transactions of American citizens. These expanded internal police powers will
enable the FBI to demand transaction records from businesses, including auto
dealers, travel agents, pawnbrokers and more, without the approval or knowledge
of a judge or grand jury. This was written into the bill at the 11th hour over
the objections of members of the Senate Judiciary Committee, which would
normally have jurisdiction over the FBI. The Judiciary Committee was frozen out
of the process. It appears we are witnessing a stealth enactment of the
enormously unpopular "Patriot II" legislation that was first leaked
several months ago. Perhaps the national outcry when a draft of the Patriot II
act was leaked has led its supporters to enact it one piece at a time in
secret. Whatever the case, this is outrageous and unacceptable.(48)
11.6 THE
RULING CLASS ABOVE THE LAW
USA
Section 312
of 'Patriot Act II' gives immunity to law enforcement engaging in spying
operations against the American people and would place substantial restrictions
on court injunctions against Federal violations of civil rights across the
board. Section 205 allows top Federal officials to keep all their financial
dealings secret, and anyone investigating them can be considered a terrorist.(49)
Section 304
of The Homeland Security Act removes liability from anyone involved in
administering the smallpox vaccine and other bioterrorist countermeasures:
Manufacturers and distributors of countermeasures, hospitals, clinics, and
other healthcare entities under whose auspices the countermeasures are
administered, and licensed health care professionals or other individuals
authorized to administer the countermeasures under state law ("qualified
persons").(50)
A study by the Defense
Dept.'s Inspector General found that the Pentagon couldn't properly account for
more than a trillion dollars in monies spent in year 2000.(51)
EU
Article 1,
chapter 1 of Protocol on the Privileges and Immunities of the E.U. states
that '...premises and buildings of the Communities shall be exempt from search,
requisition, confiscation or expropriation, and their archives shall be
inviolable'. Article 12 of Chapter 5 states, 'In the territory of each member
state and whatever their nationality, officials and other servants of the
Communities shall.... be immune from legal proceedings in respect of acts
performed by them in their official capacity, including their words (spoken or
written). They shall continue to enjoy this immunity after they have ceased to
hold office'. Thus no buildings or offices, filing cabinets, archives or bottom
drawers belonging to the E.U., wherever they are located, can be snooped,
searched or inspected EVER. These two exemptions alone place the staff and
premises of the E.U., in their official capacities, completely above the law.(52)
The
European police force, Europol, is included in this legal exemption. Their
officials are immune from prosecution and its files cannot be subpoenaed by any
court. It is based in the old fortified Gestapo building in The Hague. Article
8 of the Treaty of Amsterdam, signed into law via British Statutory
Instrument 2973:1997, concerning Europol officers, declares that,'such persons
shall enjoy immunity from suit and legal process in respect of acts, including
words written or spoken, done by them in the exercise of their official
functions…' (53)(54)
The proof of
these incredible statements came in 1999, when the entire E.U. Commission
resigned, having been exposed for fraud, yet nobody was prosecuted. The E.U.
has been unable to sign off its accounts for the last ten years and an
estimated 5-8% of its £63 billion budget disappears in fraud and mismanagement
every year.(55)(56) Over 90% of the budget cannot be
properly accounted for.(57)
British MEP Theresa Villiers reports that the problem
with the Commission's accounts was highlighted by the decision in 2002 by its
Chief Accountant, Marta Andreasen, to go public about the total absence of
genuine accounting procedures. The Commission was not even using the most basic
double entry bookkeeping - in widespread use in Europe since the Renaissance -
and used by virtually every company from British Petroleum to the local
sweetshop. Andreasen uncovered these facts within weeks of arriving at her post
at the European Commission. She quickly approached her bosses, pointing out the
very serious problems which she had found and asked for change. She was told
that it was her job to sign off on the accounts and if she did not do so, she
would be sacked. When she refused to be silenced, the European Commission
suspended her and subjected her to a petty campaign of persecution. And who was
the man leading this campaign ? None other than former British Labour Party
leader, Neil Kinnock, a member of the disgraced Santer Commission which was
forced to resign in 1999, and who was subsequently re-appointed as Commissioner
in charge of tackling E.U. fraud.(58)(59)
UK
In February 2005,
Amnesty International put out a press release concerning the pending enquiry
into the murder of human rights lawyer, Patrick Finucane, in which the British
Government is alleged to have collaborated as part of its anti-terrorism
strategy in Northern Ireland :
The UK government
has reneged on its promise to act on the recommendation of Justice Cory, a
former Canadian Supreme Court judge, that a public inquiry be held in the case
of Patrick Finucane. Instead it has stated that Patrick Finucane's case would
be the subject of an inquiry under the new Inquiries Bill now going through
parliament. The government has also stated that the Bill aims to take account
of "the requirements of national security"
...Under the Inquiries Bill:
the
inquiry and its terms of reference would be decided by the executive; no
independent parliamentary scrutiny of these decisions would be allowed;
the
chair of the inquiry would be appointed by the executive and the executive
would have the discretion to sack any member of the inquiry;
the
decision on whether the inquiry, or any individual hearings, would be held in
public or private would be taken by the executive;
the
decision to issue restrictive notices to block disclosure of evidence would be
taken by the executive;
the
final report of the inquiry would be published at the executive's discretion
and crucial evidence could be omitted at the executive's discretion, "in
the public interest". (60)
Chapter 11 End Notes
1. Richard Norton-Taylor, EU set
to agree sweeping counter-terror policies, The Guardian, 25 March
2004.
See http://www.guardian.co.uk/eu/story/0,7369,1177349,00.html?=rss
2. StateWatch, Scoreboard on
post-Madrid counter-terrorism plans, 23 March 2004.
See http://www.statewatch.org/news/2004/mar/swscoreboard.pdf
3. Milburn promises Mental Health
Bill, BBC, London, 14 Nov. 2002. See http://www.propagandamatrix.com/milburn_promises_mental_health_bill
4. Mental health rights fears,
BBC, London, 11 Nov. 2002. See
http://www.propagandamatrix.com/mental_health_rights_fears
5. Robert B. Bluey, Forced
Drugging Case Headed to Supreme Court, CNSNews.com, 29 Nov. 2002.
See http://www.propagandamatrix.com/
forced_drugging_case_headed_to_supreme_court
6. Michael Arnold Glueck, M.D. and
Robert J. Cihak M.D., American Conscience: The Saga of Dr. Charles Sell,
Newsmax, 26 March 2003. See
http://www.newsmax.com/archives/articles/2003/3/25/192512.shtml
7. Edmund Conway, Don't pay TV
licence fee, campaigners urge viewers, The Daily Telegraph, London, 08
Nov. 2002. See http://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/
main.jhtml?xml=/news/2002/11/08/nfee08.xml
8. Vladimir Bukovsky, To Build A
Castle: My life as a Dissenter, 1978, p.196.
See http://www.roca.org/OA/5/5e.htm
9. Criminal Justice: Battle
Against the Bill, Liberty. See
http://www.liberty-human-rights.org.uk/issues/
criminal-justice-battle-against-the-bill.shtml
10. Criminal Justice Act,
2003, Part 7. See
http://www.legislation.hmso.gov.uk/acts/acts2003/30044--h.htm#43
11. Phillip Day, Are You Furious
and Paddling Yet? The Campaign For Truth in Europe. See
http://www.campaignfortruth.com/Eclub/250303/CTEleadarticle.htm
12. Commentary, Corpus Juris (a
euro-sceptic website), 01 Jan. 1999
See http://www.euroscep.dircon.co.uk/corpus3.htm#Top
13. Philip Johnston, Britons face
extradition for 'thought crime' on net, The Daily Telegraph, 18 Feb. 2003. See
http://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/main.jhtml?xml=/news/
2003/02/18/nxeno18.xml&sSheet=/news/2003/02/18/ixnewstop.html
14. Philip Johnston, Blair
accused of treason over Europe, The Daily Telegraph, London, 21 Sept. 2000. See
http://news.telegraph.co.uk/news/
main.jhtml?xml=%2Fnews%2F2000%2F09%2F21%2Fnblur221.xml&secureRefresh=true&_requested=56786
15. Petrina Holdsworth, Bye Bye
British legal System, UK Independence Party website. See
http://www.independence.org.uk/html/body_comment_info_0.html
16. Restrictions that UK suspects
may face, BBC News online, 27 Feb 2005. See
http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/uk/4212431.stm
17. New UK-US Extradition Treaty,
Statewatch website, analysis no 18. 2003. See
http://www.statewatch.org/news/2003/jul/25ukus.htm
18. U.S. Can Hold Citizens as
Combatants, Fox News website, 08 Jan. 2003. See
http://www.prisonplanet.com/news_alert_010803_combatants.html
19. US terror arrests to remain
secret, BBC, London, 17 June 2003. See
http://www.propagandamatrix.com/us_terror_arrests_to_remain_secret
20. Charles Lane, In Terror War,
2nd Track for Suspects Those Designated 'Combatants' Lose Legal Protections, Washington
Post, 1 Dec. 2002. See
http://www.propagandamatrix.com/in_terror_war_2nd_track_for_suspects
21. How the USA PATRIOT Act
redefines "Domestic Terrorism"
American Civil Liberties Union website, 6 Dec 2002
http://www.aclu.org/NationalSecurity/NationalSecurity.cfm?ID=11437&c=111
22. Alex Jones, A Brief Analysis
of the Domestic Security Enhancement Act 2003, Also Known as Patriot Act
II, 10 Feb 2003. See http://www.infowars.com/alexjones.html
23. Patriot Act II, draft version
leaked to the Center for Public Integrity on 9 Jan. 2003. Available to download
in full at: http://www.publicintegrity.org/dtaweb/
report.asp?ReportID=502&L1=10&L2=10&L3=0&L4=0&L5=0
24. David Teather, US plans for
executions at Guantanamo, The Guardian, London, 12 June 2003,
http://www.prisonplanet.com/us_plans_for_executions_at_guantanamo.htm
25. US plans death camp, news.com.au,
26 May 03.
See http://www.prisonplanet.com/us_plans_death_camp.htm
26. Robert Scheer, Conservatives
put Bush above law, polkonline.com, 17 June 2004
http://www.polkonline.com/stories/061704/opi_law.shtml
27. Mark Sherman, White House
Won't Release Gonzales Papers, The Guardian, 6 January 2005
http://www.guardian.co.uk/worldlatest/story/0,1280,-4715334,00.htm
28. Duncan Campbell, Afghan
prisoners beaten to death at US military interrogation base The Guardian,
London, 7 March 2003. See http://www.guardian.co.uk/international/story/0,3604,909164,00.html
29. Revolution in Military Affairs
and Conflict Short of War . p12, July 1994,
U.S. Army War College. See
http://www.carlisle.army.mil/ssi/pdffiles/00233.pdf
30. Anti-Terrorism Legislation in
The United Kingdom, Liberty, 2003.
See http://www.liberty-human-rights.org.uk/
resources/publications/pdf-documents/anti-terrornew.pdf
31. Police questioned over terror
act use, BBC, London, 10 Sept. 2003 http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/england/london/3097150.stm
32. EU to adopt new laws on
terrorism, Statewatch, 2003. See
http://www.statewatch.org/news/2001/sep/14eulaws.htm
33. Conclusions adopted by the
Council (Justice and Home Affairs) and the representatives of the member states
on 13 July 2001 on security at meetings of the European Council and other
comparable events, doc no 10916/01,16.7.01; also Draft Conclusions on
security at meetings of the European Council and other comparable events, doc
no
10731/01 and Rev 1, 10 & 11.7.01. See Statewatch article: The
"enemy within":EU plans the surveillance of protestors and the
criminalization of protests http://www.statewatch.org/news/2001/aug/protest.pdf
Also: Initiative by the Kingdom of Spain for the adoption of a Council
Recommendation on the introduction of a standard form for exchanging
information on terrorists, Brussels, 29 May 2002 5712/6/02 REV 6.See http://www.statewatch.org/news/2003/apr/spainterr.pdf
34. ACLU, op cit. see http://www.aclu.org/NationalSecurity/NationalSecurity.cfm?ID=11437&c=111
35. Charles Lewis and Adam Mayle, Special
Report, Justice Dept. Drafts Sweeping Expansion of Anti-Terrorism Act
Center Publishes Secret Draft of `Patriot II' Legislation,
The Center for Public Integrity, January 2003. See
http://www.publicintegrity.org/dtaweb/report.asp?
ReportID=502&L1=10&L2=10&L3=0&L4=0&L5=0
36. Alex Jones, op cit.
37. This FBI Flyer is available to
view at:
http://www.keepandbeararms.com/images/FBI-MCSOTerroristFlyer-Back.jpg
http://www.keepandbeararms.com/images/FBI-MCSOTerroristFlyer-front.jpg
38. 911: The Road To Tyranny,
a documentary film by Alex Jones. See
http://www.infowars.com/tyranny.htm
39. Eric Lichtblau, Administration
Creates Center for Master Terror 'Watch List', New York Times, 16 Sept
2003. See http://www.propagandamatrix.com/
administration_creates_center_for_master_terror_watchlist
40. Liberty, op cit.
41. U.K. Human Rights Act 1998,
Chapter 42.
See at http://www.hmso.gov.uk/acts/acts1998/80042--a.htm
42. Liberty op cit., p.13
43. Fourth Report of the Joint
Committee on Human Rights, Serious Organised Crime and Police Bill, 12 January
2005. See http://www.publications.parliament.uk/pa/jt200405/jtselect/jtrights/26/2604.htm
44. How the Anti-Terrorism Bill
Puts Financial Privacy at Risk, ACLU website 23 October 2001.
See http://www.aclu.org/NationalSecurity/NationalSecurity.cfm?ID=9147&c=111
45. Surveillance Under the USA
PATRIOT Act, ACLU website. See
http://www.aclu.org/SafeandFree/SafeandFree.cfm?ID=12263&c=206
46. Alex Jones, op cit.
47. Intelligence Authorization
Act for Fiscal Year 2004, H.R.2417, 108th Congress.
See http://thomas.loc.gov/cgi-bin/query/z?c108:H.R.2417:
48. Ron Paul, Congressman for Texas,
speech in the House of Representatives, 20 Nov. 2003. See http://www.fas.org/irp/congress/2003_cr/h112203.html
49. Alex Jones, op cit.
50. Guidance for the Healthcare
Community Concerning Section 304 of the Homeland Security Act, CDC website.
See http://www.bt.cdc.gov/agent/smallpox/vaccination/healthcare-304-guidance.asp
51. Tom Abate, Military Waste
Under Fire, $1 Trillion Missing - Bush targets Pentagon Accounting, San
Francisco Chronicle, 18 May 2003. See
http://www.sfgate.com/cgi-bin/article.cgi?file=/c/a/2003/05/18/MN251738.DTL
52. Philip Day, op cit.
53. Ibid.
54. Ambrose Evans-Pritchard, EU
police force could be a repressive monster, says report, The Daily Telegraph,
31 Jan. 2001.
See http://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/
main.jhtml?xml=%2Fnews%2F2001%2F01%2F31%2Fweup01.xml
55. Theresa Villiers MEP, Tackling
Fraud And Mismanagement In The EU, 28 April 2003. See
http://villiers.politicos.ws/record.jsp?type=news&ID=138
Also, Top financial watchdog slams EU accounts system, The EU
Observer.com. See
http://www.independence.org.uk/html/eu_news.html
56. EU Accounts - A decade of
failure, theconservatives.com, 15 November
2004
http://www.conservatives.com/tile.do?def=news.story.page&obj_id=117282
57. EU accounts fail to pass muster,
BBC News on-line, 18 November 2003. See
http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/world/europe/3279675.stm
58. Theresa Villiers MEP, Cleaning
Up The Commission. See
http://www.theresa-villiers.com/record.jsp?type=issue&ID=8
59. Ambrose Evans-Pritchard, Tory
MEPs urge Kinnock to resign, The Daily Telegraph, London,15 March
2003. See
http://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/main.jhtml?xml=
%2Fnews%2F2003%2F03%2F15%2Fwfile15.xml
60. Amnesty International Press
Release, AI Index: EUR 45/003/2005 (Public), News Service No: 034,11 February
2005
http://web.amnesty.org/library/index/engEUR450032005?open&of=eng-gbr
Chapter 12
THE TECHNOLOGICAL APPARATUS OF TOTALITARIANISM
[T]he capacity to
assert social and political control over the individual will vastly increase.
It will soon be possible to assert almost continuous surveillance over every
citizen and to maintain up-to-date, complete files, containing even the most
personal information about the health or personal behavior of the citizen in
addition to more customary data. These files will be subject to instantaneous
retrieval by the authorities.
– Between Two Ages- America's Role in the Technetronic Era,
1970. Zbigniew Brzezinski,first
director of The Trilateral Commission 1973-1976
and U.S. National Security Advisor 1977-1981.
Source:The
Rand Corporation website
In an interview
with The Times newspaper, the U.K. Information Commissioner, Richard
Thomas, expressed his concern that "we don't sleepwalk into a surveillance
society".(1)
He said that there is a growing danger of East German Stasi-style snooping if
the state gathers too much information about individual citizens. He was
referring to three projects in particular, which Brzezinski foresaw over thirty
years ago: the proposed Identity Card scheme which will have personal details
and the fingerprints of everyone in the country; the population database named
the 'Citizen’s Information Project' and proposals in the Children Bill -
currently before Parliament - which would create a database of personal
information on all children from birth to age 18 and details of their parents.
These and many
other measures and technologies are being introduced piecemeal across the globe
and justified individually. However collectively, they constitute the awesome
global network of big brother surveillance planned decades ago.
12.1 ID
CARDS AND BIOMETRIC IDENTIFICATION
EUROPE
After the
establishment of biometric ID systems, pressure will begin to build to enact
laws that will require citizens to produce an ID whenever a government official
demands it. In the countries that already have national ID card systems, the
police have acquired such powers e.g. France, Germany, Belgium, Greece,
Luxembourg, Portugal, and Spain.(2)
The European
Commission has produced two draft Regulations (25.9.03) to introduce two sets
of biometric data (fingerprints and facial image) on visas and resident permits
for third country nationals by 2005. The biometric data and personal details on
visas will be stored on national and E.U.-wide databases and be accessible
through the Visa Information System (VIS) held on the Schengen Information
System (SIS II). The Regulation stipulates that two biometric identifiers must
be held on an imbedded chip in a document. (3)
On 13 December
2004, the E.U. General Affairs Council agreed to adopt a Regulation on
mandatory facial images and fingerprints in E.U. passports.(4) Once the details have been decided,
replacement and new passports will have to contain facial images within 18
months and fingerprints within three years. The U.K. has not signed up to this
Regulation, but is proceeding with biometric passports and ID cards anyway.
UK
The Government
introduced The Identity Cards Bill in November 2004, enabling the phased introduction
of ID cards by 2008.(5) The Home Office website partly
justifies the ID card on the grounds of international requirements, stating
that Brits will not be able to travel abroad if we don't have biometric
passports and that we might as well have an ID card because the biometric
passport system is virtually the same thing!:
The Government's decision to
proceed with the introduction of a national identity cards scheme is based in
part on the fact that we will have to introduce more secure personal
identifiers (biometrics) into our passports and other existing documents in
line with international requirements. Right across the world there is a drive
to increase document security with biometrics. If our citizens are to continue
to enjoy the benefits of international travel, as increasing numbers of them
are doing we cannot be left behind. It is worth remembering that 21 of the 25
EU Member States (all apart from the UK, Ireland, Denmark and Latvia) have
identity cards.
Already the
International Civil Aviation Organisation (ICAO) has established standards in
the use of biometrics in passports and a biometric British passport will be
introduced in 2005 that will incorporate a computer chip to store a facial
image biometric. The United States is introducing a biometric passport
requirement for all visitors going to the US without a visa.
The decision to
introduce biometrics into existing identity documents has therefore already
been made. Without an identity cards scheme, the majority of the population
would be enrolled via existing identity documents like passports anyway. The
costs involved in this would be nearly the same as implementing a comprehensive
identity cards scheme available to the whole resident population, but without
the added benefits.
The British
anti-ID campaign, www.no2ID.net,
outlines the main aspects of the system (6):
1. The
National Identification Register. The heart of the system. Clause 1 of the Bill
imposes an obligation on the Secretary of State to establish a central population
register containing a wide range of details of every UK citizen and resident
aged from 16 years and 3 months.
2. The code. Clause 2
(6) requires that every individual must be given a unique number, to be known
as the National Identity Registration Number (NIRN). This number will become
the “key” for government and private sector organisations to access information
on the register and to share that information.
3. Biometrics. Clause 5
(5) requires individuals to submit to fingerprinting and “other” means of
physical identification. This is likely to include electronic face scanning and
iris recognition.
4. The card. Clause 8
establishes the actual identity card, generated from and containing the
information in the Register.
5. Legal obligations.
Clause 15 establishes a requirement to produce the card in order to obtain
public services.
6. Administrative
convergence. The number and the card register are used by a variety of agencies
and organisations as their administrative basis. 1 (5) permits the bringing
together of all registration numbers (National Insurance, NHS, etc) used by a
person.
7. Cross notification.
Agencies will be required to notify each other of changes to a person's
details. Clause 19 authorises the Secretary of State to disclose details from
the register to other agencies without the consent of the individual.
8. New crimes and
penalties. The Bill establishes a large number of new crimes and offences to
ensure that people comply with the ID requirements.
NORTH
AMERICA
A Canadian
parliamentary committee has unexpectedly told the Canadian Parliament that it
could find no evidence to justify a national ID card scheme. Members almost
unanimously declared the proposal a waste of time and resources. Government MP
Joe Fontana, who chairs the committee, told press that the Committee was still
struggling to determine why an ID card was even needed. "I think the
fundamental question of why do we need to have a national ID card has yet to be
answered,'' he said.(7)
It was only
a matter of days after the attack of September 11th before some members of the
U.S. Congress proposed the implementation of a national ID card system as a way
of thwarting terrorist attacks. The national ID card had been proposed in the
past as a way of stopping illegal immigration. Larry Ellison, chairman and CEO
of Oracle, made headlines after 9/11, saying: "We need a national ID card
with our photograph and thumbprint digitized and embedded in the ID card".
The prospect of massive computer databases or registries, software data
collection systems, digital fingerprinting, handprint scans, facial recognition
technologies, voice authentication devices, electronic retinal scans, and other
'biometric' surveillance technologies have suddenly become realistic options
for government identification purposes.(8)
Due to
popular suspicion of a compulsory ID card in the U.S., the federal Government
is introducing the measure by stealth. On 16 April 2002, the Subcommittee
Hearing on Standardizing State Driver's Licenses proposed establishing a
national identity system based on the state driver's licence. The measures
proposed unspecified unique biometric identifiers on the new cards.(9) H.R. 418, The Real ID Act, passed
in the House in February 2005 and will require states to have either an
electronic licence or ID card by 2008, which interestingly is also the year
that ID cards will be phased in the U.K.(10)The legislation allows
the Dept. Homeland Security to design state ID cards and drivers licenses with
biometric information such as retinal scans, fingerprints, DNA data and RFID
tracking technology.
Behind
these proposals is a huge Government sponsored research effort into biometric
technology. The Office of Homeland Security now has a Behavioral Research and
Biometrics Science and Technology Directorate. It has awarded a three year
contract to International Biometric Group LLC for research into the effects of
identity determination systems and processes on international travel, border
management and homeland security.(11)
The Science
and Technology section of the Office of Homeland Security's National
Strategy for Homeland Security, July 2002, states that it wants to develop
systems that can measure 'hostile intent' and sensors that can detect
immunization status.(12)The section entitled Law contains
proposals for increased information sharing, biometric identification, and
standardization of state drivers licences.(13)
Biometrics and
smart-card technologies will play a major role in the ' U.S. Visit '
project, a $1.5-10 billion project under the Dept. Homeland Security, announced
in September 2003. The Enhanced Border Security and Visa Entry Reform Act of
2002 mandated the system and set several milestones, including the
collection of biometric information from visitors entering the U.S. by air and
sea by the end of 2003. All visitors over the age of 13 will now have their
fingerprints taken and stored for 75 to 100 years by the Dept. Homeland
Security, which will be shared with other government departments and agencies,
and other governments. The E.U. Regulation requiring biometric passports has
the secondary effect that whenever E.U. citizens travel abroad (not just to the
United States), they will again be required to register their fingerprints and
face-scans with foreign governments as their passports are verified. As a result,
the E.U. is drastically enlarging the U.S. VISIT programme by turning it
against its own citizens and then globalising this practice.(14)
The Transportation
Security Administration has a major contract in the works called the Transportation
Workers Identification Credential. A pilot program involving 10,000
transportation workers is evaluating biometric technologies that can be used
for government, contractor, and private-sector workers at transportation
facilities.(15)
The
Biometrics Management Office (BMO) has been set up as a central procurement
agency for the U.S. Dept. Defense. its motto reads,
...ensuring
the right person with the right privileges has access at the right time to
support war fighting dominance.... Biometrics are measurable physical
characteristics or personal behavioral traits used to recognize the identity,
or verify the claimed identity of an individual. We are looking at: facial
recognition, fingerprint, hand geometry, iris scan, signature verification, and
voice recognition.
All
military personnel and DOD civilian employees will be subject to biometric
identification.(16) In an interview with
the BBC, a BMO spokesman said that biometrics are going to play an increasing
role in everyone's lives.(17)The BBC also reported in January
2003 that retinal scanners will be used at the new £14.5m Venerable Bede Church
of England Aided School. The technology will be used on pupils buying meals in
the school canteen and in the library when children want to take out books.(18) In May 2003, Akron
School Board in Ohio gave the go ahead for a finger-printing system to be
installed in the school canteen.(19) Since October 2002 the U.N. High
Commission for Refugees has been taking compulsory iris-scans of returning
Afghan refugees at three centres on the Pakistan border. A total of over
130,000 people have been scanned so far.(20)
The
Pentagon is developing a radar-based device that can identify people by the way
they walk, for use in a new anti-terrorist surveillance system. Operating on
the theory that an individual's walk is as unique as a signature, the Pentagon
has financed a research project at the Georgia Institute of Technology that has
been 80 to 95 percent successful in identifying people.(21)
In 2001 a company
called Graphco teamed up with several other companies to bring face scanning
cameras to the Super Bowl in Tampa, FL. After the game, Tampa Bay police
reported that the technology pinpointed 19 people with criminal records out of
a crowd of 100,000.(22)
Biometrics
research has been guided by the U.S. military over the past decade. In 1992,
the National Security Agency (NSA) initiated the Biometric Consortium,
consisting of representatives from six departments of the U.S. Government and
each of the Military Services. The NSA initiated the formation of the
Consortium as part of its Information Systems Security mission, with a goal to
increase the availability of biometric authentication and identification to
meet the needs of the Dept. Defense and other Federal agencies. It is chaired
by an NSA agent and its stated objective is to build a consensus in industry
and academia around the requirements of the NSA:
[To] Create
standardized testing databases, procedures, and protocols for the community and
security policy organizations. Provide a forum for information exchange between
the Government, private industry, and academia. Establish increased Government
and commercial interaction. Facilitate symposia/workshops to include the
participation of academia and private industry.(23)
12.2
COMPUTER DATABASES
USA
To take
advantage of the snooping provisions in Patriot Acts I and II, a
project called 'Total Information Awareness Network' was proposed. Although the
Government officially shelved the plan in September 2003 due to public outrage,
it will only take another terror attack to bring it back. The controversial
programme was conceived by retired Admiral John Poindexter and was run by the
Information Awareness Office that he headed inside the Defense Advanced
Research Projects Agency (DARPA). The goal was to develop software that could
examine the computerized travel, credit, medical and other records of Americans
and others around the world to search for telltale hints of a terrorist attack.
Poindexter's office told contractors that he wanted the software to allow U.S.
agents to rapidly scan and analyze multiple petabytes of information. Just one
petabyte of computer data could fill the Library of Congress more than 50
times.(24)
Whilst the
Federal Government officially shelved its TIA network, the States have been
working on a similar project independently with Federal backing. Dubbed
"Matrix", Multistate Anti-Terrorism Information Exchange, the
database has been in use for a year and a half in Florida, where police praise
the crime-fighting tool as nimble and exhaustive. It cross-references driving
records and restricted police files with billions of pieces of public and
private data, including credit and property records. As a dozen more states
pool their criminal and government files with Florida's, the Matrix database is
expanding in size and power. Organisers hope to coax more states to join,
touting its usefulness in everyday policing not just tracking terrorists.
Organisers are considering giving access to the CIA even though in the 1970s,
Congress barred the CIA from scanning files on Americans. The system is owned
by a private company called Seisint, in Boca Raton, but it is federally funded
and guarded by state police.(25)
In
September 2003, alongside Project VISIT, Dept. Homeland Security
launched a Security Planning and Integrated Resources for Information
Technology (SPIRIT) system that will combine hundreds to thousands of
legacy applications into single computer networks . This will facilitate the
creation of a vast federal database encompassing all the large federal
agencies. Together, the contracts for this project are worth about $10 billion.
In the Information Sharing and Systems section of The National
Strategy for Homeland Security 2002, the Government says that it needs to
link up all the IT systems of every single agency of the Federal government in
order to create accurate terrorist 'watch lists'. More disturbing still is the
paper's proposal to use data-mining techniques to interrogate this database in
order to spot 'patterns of criminal behaviour' and detain 'suspected
terrorists' before they act. (26)(27)(28)
The
Transportation Security Administration's Computer Assisted Passenger
Prescreening (CAPPS II) system, is being developed to screen travelers,
rather like the European Schengen Information System (SIS) that monitors
peoples' movement around the E.U.. It will use 'dynamic intelligence
information' to select passengers for enhanced screening' authenticated from
publicly and commercially available databases to 'run against terrorist or
other appropriate federal systems and an aggregate numerical threat score will
be generated in less than five seconds'.(29)
UK AND
EUROPE
In June
2002 the British Home Secretary sought to expand the scope of section 22
of the Regulation of Investigatory Powers Act 2000. S.22 currently authorizes
the police (including MOD police, NCS, NCIS) Secret Intelligence Agencies (MI5,
MI6, GCHQ), Customs and Excise and the Inland Revenue, to obtain communications
data from companies without a court order for the following purposes:
(2)(a) in the interests of national
security;
(b) for the
purpose of preventing or detecting crime or of preventing disorder;
(c) in the
interests of the economic well-being of the United Kingdom;
(d) in the
interests of public safety;
(e) for the
purpose of protecting public health;
(f) for the
purpose of assessing or collecting any tax, duty, levy or other imposition,
contribution or charge payable to a government department;
(g) for the
purpose, in an emergency, of preventing death or injury or any damage to a person's
physical or mental health, or of mitigating any injury or damage to a person's
physical or mental health; or
(h) for any
purpose (not falling within paragraphs (a) to (g)) which is specified for the
purposes of this subsection by an order made by the Secretary of State
Communications data includes name and address, service usage
details, details of who you have been calling, details of who has called,
mobile phone location (which through global positioning system tracking chips
can place you within 200 meters), source and destination of email, usage of web
sites (but not pages within such sites). The draft Statutory Instrument
expanded this list to include 24 public bodies, which according to StateWatch,
amounted to 1039 individual authorities.(30)(31) The proposed bodies
are:
1)
Government departments: Dept. Environment, Food and Rural Affairs; Dept.
Health; Home Office; Dept. Trade and Industry; Dept. Transport; Dept. Work and
Pensions; Northern Ireland Executive's Dept. Enterprise.
2) Local
authorities: Any local authority in England and Wales; any fire authority; any
council in Scotland; any district council in Northern Ireland
3) NHS
bodies in Scotland and Northern Ireland: The common services Agency of the
Scottish Health Service; The Northern Ireland Central Services agency for
Health and Social Services.
4) Other
bodies: Environment Agency; Financial Services Authority; Food Standards
Agency; Health and Safety Executive Information Commissioner; Office of Fair
Trading; Postal Services Commission; Scottish Drug Enforcement Agency; Scottish
Environmental Protection Agency; UK Atomic Energy Authority Constabulary; a
universal service provider covered by Postal Services Act.(32)
Due to a
backlash from civil liberties groups, the plans to expand RIPA S.22 were
shelved a week after they were announced.(33)
Separate from the
identity card scheme, the Cabinet has given the go-ahead to set up Britain's
first national population computer database under the Office of National
Statistics. For use by public services, the 'citizen information project' is to
bring together all the existing information held by the Government on the 58
million people residing in Britain. It will include their name, address, date
of birth, sex, and a unique personal number to form a 'more accurate and
transparent' database than existing national insurance, tax, medical, passport,
voter, and driving licence records.(34)
The Children Bill
introduced on 4th March 2004, proposes a database of all children from birth
until adulthood.(35) It was put forward
after the failure of official agencies to share information in the Victoria
Climbie child abuse case. School achievements, medical and social services
records and parental marital status could be on the database. The Dept. Health
is also planning a database detailing treatments and social care for all
patients. Childrens' personal files will record every "concern" that
a professional has about them. It will also record "concerns" about
their parents. The Bill will allow this to happen without the knowledge or
consent of children and parents. The information-sharing goes far beyond concerns
that a child is at risk of significant harm. It will also include information
about other family members that may be considered relevant, such as suspected
drug and alcohol misuse or mental health problems.
Clause 8 of the Bill
empowers the Secretary of State to define by Regulations what information
should be held on the database. There is no limit to this power, and there
seems to be nothing to prevent the Secretary of State from ordering that all
agency files be held centrally.
DATA
RETENTION
Section 11
of the U.K. 2001 Terrorism Act outlined a voluntary code of practice for
Internet Services Providers (ISP's) to hold data on customers' web surfing and
email for up to 6 years.(36) This ill thought out piece of
legislation has since been criticized by MPs as being completely unworkable due
the huge burden of record keeping it places on ISPs but the Government is still
keen to press ahead with it.(37)(38)
E.U. Directive
on Privacy and Electronic Communications (Directive 2002/58/EC) July 2002
allows member states to pass laws mandating the retention of the traffic and
location data of all communications taking place over mobile phones, SMS,
landline telephones, faxes, e-mails, chat rooms, the Internet, or any other
electronic communication device. The retention of the contents of the
communications are not covered by the Directive, but the purpose is exactly the
same as the British proposals, applied to 450 million citizens: To keep a log
of who you have phoned and when; who you have exchanged emails with and when;
who you have sent short messages via mobile phone to and when; which internet pages
you visited and for how long.
The Directive
reverses the 1997 Telecommunications Privacy Directive by explicitly allowing
E.U. countries to compel ISPs and telecommunications companies to record,
index, and store their subscribers' communications data. These requirements can
be implemented for purposes varying from national security to criminal
investigations and prosecution of criminal offences, all without specific
judicial authorization.(39)The Directive requires
records to be kept for up to 24 months.(40) The list of data to be retained by
ISPs and telecoms companies was drawn up by Europol as revealed in a
confidential document obtained by Statewatch containing the agenda of the
Expert Meeting on Cybercrime of 10th April 2002. (41)
At the summit
which followed the Madrid bombing in March 2004, the E.U. accepted a draft
Framework Decision on data retention at the request of the U.K., France,
Ireland and Sweden. This strengthened the 2002 Directive by extending data
retention to up to 3 years and widened its use from specific investigations to
"prevention and detection" of crime. This opens the door for a
dragnet style sweep on the American "Total Information Awareness"
model.(42)
12.3 DNA
DATABASES
UK
British
police have a database of 2 million DNA samples taken from people charged with
criminal offences. This is the first of its kind in the world. In September
2003 Kevin Morris, chairman of the Police Superintendent's Association said he
would urge the Home Secretary to consider extending the database to everyone in
the country in order to solve crimes quicker and prevent them happening.(43) In March 2003 the Home Office
announced proposals to take and store DNA samples from anyone arrested even if
they are released without charge.(44) The highest court in
the land, the law lords, ruled on 22 July 2004 that police can keep these DNA
samples indefinitely.(45)
USA
The
proposals for a DNA database under 'Patriot Act II' were outlined in the
previous chapter. However, the FBI already hold a DNA database of 1.5 million
people. In April 2003, the U.S. Government announced plans to include DNA
samples from everybody arrested even if they are not charged.(46)
12.4
IMPLANTABLE MICROCHIP
A study of
future military strategy entitled Airforce 2025 was drawn up by the U.S.
Air University in 1996. In the section Information Operations: A New War Fighting
Capapility, the authors suggest the advantages of satellite linked
implanted brain microchips over other communication systems. These will allow
the implanted personnel to 'pull a computer-generated mental visualization of
the desired battlespace anytime, anywhere'. It suggests that the civilian
population can become conditioned to accept the concept of implanted troops in
the way they have become accustomed to other medical implants.(47)
Researchers
at the University of Southern California are now developing the world's first
prosthetic brain part. Funded by DARPA, they are learning how to build
sophisticated electronics and integrate them into human brains which could one
day lead to cyborg soldiers and robotic servants as well as putting them into
diseased brains for medical purposes. Under DARPA'S Brain Machine Interface Program,
MIT researchers have monkeys in a laboratory can control the movement of a
robotic arm using only their thoughts. This is technology which can literally
read your mind.(48) (49) (50)
A Mexican
company called Solusat is marketing the Verichip, manufactured by military
contractor Applied Digital Solutions of Florida (ADS), as an anti-kidnapping
device. The RFID Verichip is injected under the skin and emits a radio frequency
signal which can be detected by a scanner. Other potential uses of the chip,
according to company officials, include scanning unconscious patients to obtain
their medical records or restricting access to high-security buildings by
scanning workers to verify their clearance.(51)
ADS is
developing Radio Frequency ID chips able to track the movement of people
worldwide using global positioning satellites. The company is field testing its
Personal Locator Device, or PLD, which ADS says could help track lost children
and sick or elderly family members. Currently the company is marketing a GPS
system which uses a strap on monitor or watches.(52) (53) from ADS for other purposes such
as.
The current
body piercing fashion which is being heavily promoted by the controlled media
might be seen against this background. The police state planners are using
popular culture to persuade today's youth that it is 'cool' to have pieces of
metal inserted into their heads. Being linked up to national defence
departments by such artefacts will not be such a 'cool' experience however.
On 7 April 2004, Alex
Jones interviewed Conrad Chase, director of the Baja Beach Clubs International,
an international chain of exclusive nightclubs. He has introduced the VeriPay
system for VIP members of his clubs allowing them to pay for services by
swiping their microchipped bodies. Chase himself was implanted at the media
launch of the VIP implant system along with stars from the Spanish version of
the TV Show, "Big Brother," (called "Grand Hermano" in
Spain). Showcased by ADS at a global security conference in November 2003, the
VeriPay System is a new syringe-injectable microchip implant for humans,
designed to be used as a fraud-proof payment method for cash and credit-card
transactions. The chip implant is alleged to be an advance over credit cards
and smart cards.(54)
The use of ADS
chips has also caught on in government agencies.(55) On 14 July 2004, the
Associated Press announced:
MEXICO CITY (AP) - Security has
reached the subcutaneous level for Mexico's attorney general and at least 160
people in his office - they have been implanted with microchips that get them
access to secure areas of their headquarters.
Mexico's top federal prosecutors and
investigators began receiving chip implants in their arms in November in order
to get access to restricted areas inside the attorney general's headquarters,
said Antonio Aceves, general director of Solusat, the company that distributes
the [ADS] microchips in Mexico
12.5 RADIO
FREQUENCY IDENTIFICATION (RFID)
Katheryn
Albrecht of Consumers Against Supermarket Privacy Invasion and Numbering
(CASPIAN) reports:
A new
consumer goods tracking system called Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) is
poised to enter all of our lives within five years, with profound implications
for consumer privacy. RFID couples radio frequency (RF) identification
technology with highly miniaturized computers that enable products to be
identified and tracked at any point along the supply chain. The system could be
applied to almost any physical item, from ballpoint pens to toothpaste, which
would carry their own unique information in the form of an embedded chip. The
chip sends out an identification signal allowing it to communicate with reader
devices and other products embedded with similar chips. Analysts envision a
time when the system will be used to identify and track every item produced on
the planet. RFID employs a numbering scheme called EPC (for 'electronic product
code') which can provide a unique ID for any physical object in the world. The
EPC is intended to replace the UPC bar code used on products today. Unlike the
bar code, however, the EPC goes beyond identifying product categories--it
actually assigns a unique number to every single item that rolls off a
manufacturing line. For example, each pack of cigarettes, individual can of
soda, light bulb or package of razor blades produced would be uniquely
identifiable through its own EPC number. Once assigned, this number is
transmitted by a radio frequency ID tag (RFID) in or on the product. These tiny
tags, predicted by some to cost less than 1 cent each by 2004, are 'somewhere
between the size of a grain of sand and a speck of dust'. They are to be built
directly into food, clothes, drugs, or auto-parts during the manufacturing
process. They are not removed from the product when it leaves the store.
Receiver or reader devices are used to pick up the signal transmitted by the
RFID tag. Proponents envision a pervasive global network of millions of
receivers along the entire supply chain -- in airports, seaports, highways,
distribution centers, warehouses, retail stores, and in the home. This would
allow for seamless, continuous identification and tracking of physical items
(and their owners) as they move from one place to another, enabling companies
to determine the whereabouts of all their products (and owners) at all times.
The ultimate goal is for RFID to create a 'physically linked world' in which
every item on the planet is numbered, identified, cataloged, and tracked. Since
the Auto-ID Center's founding at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology
(MIT) in 1999, it has moved forward at remarkable speed. The center has
attracted funding from some of the largest consumer goods manufacturers in the
world, and even counts the Department of Defense among its sponsors. The
European Central Bank is quietly working to embed RFID tags in the fibers of
Euro banknotes by 2005. With corporate sponsors like Wal-Mart, Target, the Food
Marketing Institute, Home Depot, and British supermarket chain Tesco, as well
as some of the world's largest consumer goods manufacturers including Procter
and Gamble, Phillip Morris, and Coca Cola it may not be long before RFID-based
surveillance tags begin appearing in every store-bought item in a consumer's
home. (56)
Confidential documents obtained by CASPIAN from the AutoID
Center show that the industry is fully aware of the massive unpopularity of
RFID technology but is relying on consumer apathy to enable them to force it on
the public. To reinforce this apathy, the RFID coalition are hiring PR firms to
emphasize the "inevitability" of its introduction.(57)
Gillette
introduced RFID into its products early in 2003 and combined them with
technology to take a photograph of anyone who picked up the product off the
shelf. Trials of this anti-theft technology were undertaken by a Tesco Store in
Cambridge U.K. (58) Tesco, the world's
third largest retailer is also one of the world's largest promoters of RFID
technology, and has recently purchased 20,000 readers and antennas for 1300 of
its stores.(59)
Wal-Mart is the leading promoter of RFID use in American retailing.
Meanwhile the
U.S. Defense Dept. announced in October 2003 that by January 2005 all its
suppliers must embed passive RFID chips in each individual product where
possible.(60)
The European Central
Bank is moving forward with plans to embed RFID tags as thin as a human hair
into the fibers of Euro bank notes by 2005, in spite of consumer protests. The
tags would allow currency to record information about each transaction in which
it is passed. Governments and law enforcement agencies hail the technology as a
means of preventing money-laundering, black-market transactions, and even
bribery demands for unmarked bills. However, consumers fear that the technology
will eliminate the anonymity that cash affords.(61)
LOYALTY
CARDS
On the
horizon, the consultants say, is the day when RFID chips would allow shoppers
to leave the store without checking out at all and get the bill on their credit
card or store account. Stores across the world already track consumer purchases
with opt-in loyalty cards. Using RFID to register sales instead of regular
checkouts would force people to use the loyalty cards in order to pay for the
goods. Anonymous purchases will become a thing of the past. Potential for RFID
technology to be used to prescribe or proscribe what people can buy can be seen
in the proposed "Fat Tax" whereby sales taxes would be imposed on
foods considered to cause obesity. The RFID system could be used to stop people
purchasing too many of these items. The "fat tax" idea is backed by
major scientific and environmental organizations such as WorldWatch and The
Center for Science in the Public Interest and scientists writing in the British
Medical Journal.(62)(63) The new Dialogue Youth cards were
introduced in October 2003 at the new super-campus incorporating three schools
in Midlothian, Scotland, comprising Dalkeith High School, St David's High and
Saltersgate school for children with special needs. The use of the cards to
monitor eating habits is the latest initiative introduced to fight rising
levels of obesity amongst children. The photo ID card is part of a cashless
system in the dining areas. Once pupils have topped up the cards with credit,
IT systems at the school will be able to record every purchase a pupil makes
from the schools' canteen, cafe and vending machines. Those who choose salads
and other healthy options will be rewarded with discounts or privileged access
to activities.(64)
And who
knows, the intelligence services who have access to supermarket databases might
decide that your loyalty card needs to be invalidated because their data-mining
software has determined that you are a potential terrorist or criminal. If you
adjust your behaviour then you may find your loyalty card comes back on-line.
In step
with the loyalty card database is the pronouncement by U.S. Postal Service that
they are going to end anonymous use of the postal service due to the anthrax
mailings in October 2001. The impetus for this move came directly from a
Presidential commission, which recommended that USPS introduce sender identification
for every item of mail.(65)The investigation of the anthrax
mailings by Dr. Leonard Horowitz and Michael Ruppert found that the Government
itself was the likely culprit, showing once again how the
problem-reaction-solution play is being used to manipulate policy-makers and
public opinion into accepting the police state. (66)(67)
12.6 CAR
AND MOBILE PHONE TRACKING
One of the
best kept secrets in auto manufacturing is the fact that most new cars have
black box data recorders in them. Ford and General Motors began phasing them in
six years ago and Toyota and Honda also use them. Ford calls it the 'Electronic
Data Recorder'; GM calls it the 'Sensing Diagnostic Module.' It's a small
device that records your speed, the percentage of throttle, your RPMs, whether
you have your foot on the brake and whether your seat belt is buckled and if
you get in an accident, deploys an airbag.(68) The U.K. government is looking at
implementing a nationwide satellite global positioning system (GPS) that not
only links the black box to a national road toll database but also controls the
speed of vehicles by linking the black box to throttle control. When the car
enters a 40mph zone the GPS will prevent the car exceeding the speed limit. The
GPS system could also be used to detect drivers who have not paid vehicle duty
or insurance. Most importantly the Government will know exactly where you are
at any time because GPS is accurate within ten metres. The prototype system for
cars is currently being introduced in lorries in Germany and could be
implemented in the UK by 2006. All vehicles would have to be fitted with the
black box technology.(69)(70)The Institute for
Public Policy Research who support the GPS measure have proposed that the national
road charge should be £1.30 per mile adding £16 billion per year to the cost of
motoring by 2010.(71)
Mobile
phones contain GPS tracking chips which can determine the location of users
within a few hundred metres. Under the E.U. data retention Directive, the data
that can be retained includes all data generated by the conveyance of
communications on an electronic communications network ("traffic data")
as well as data indicating the geographic position of a mobile phone user
(location data Art. 2 (b) and (c) of Dir. 2002/58/EC).(72) In October 2004 a new service was
launched in the U.K. by MobileLocate, a company which enables employers to
track their employees by their mobile phones down to 200 metres. The company
says it takes just 10 to 15 seconds for a manager to make a request to find a
mobile phone and receive a reply.(73)
Secret
Government plans to turn mobile phone masts into Big Brother spy stations have
been revealed. The new system called Celldar works by analysing radio waves
sent out by phone masts. When these waves hit an object they are reflected to
the mast. By analysing the reflections, a picture can be built of moving
objects nearby, tracking vehicles and people anywhere in the U.K. using the
country's 35,000 masts. The Evening Standard has learned that the
Ministry of Defence planned a test in October 2003 but an MoD spokesman said he
was unable to comment on the project.(74) MoD is hoping to introduce the
system as soon as resources allow. Police and security services are known to be
interested in a variety of possible surveillance applications. Celldar, is
supposedly aimed at anti-terrorism, defence, security, and road traffic
management.(75)
12.7
SURVEILLANCE CAMERAS
As previously
discussed, biometric facial recognition technology already exists. The
Orwellian implications of this are mind-boggling bearing in mind the millions
of CCTV cameras worldwide. The Pentagon is developing an urban surveillance
system whose centerpiece is groundbreaking computer software that is capable of
automatically identifying vehicles by size, color, shape, and license tag, or
drivers and passengers by face.(76)
In the
U.S., tragic school shootings such as that at Columbine have led to hundreds of
schools installing surveillance cameras. Some school districts have allowed the
local police or head teacher to access the spyware via the internet and monitor
the activities of students and staff at the click of a mouse.(77)(78)
Researchers
are working to give the new equipment 'X-ray vision' - the capability to 'see'
through walls and look into people's homes. In February 2003, U.S. Federal
Regulators in relaxed rules on this "ground-penetrating radar"
technology allowing industry to develop technology which gives clearer images.
Time Domain Corp., based in Huntsville, Ala., demonstrated a "through-wall
motion detector," a briefcase-sized, 10-pound device that can be held up
to a wall. A person moving behind the wall shows up as a colorful blob on a
small display. The detector is intended for use by law enforcement, firefighters,
and the military.(79) The potential
military and police use of "through wall surveillance" technology
developed by Hughes corp. is discussed in a report by the Department of Applied
Military Science at the Royal Military College of Canada. These devices are
already being used by police in California and Mexico, and are also designed
for urban warfare.(80) Similar technology is useful for
seeing through clothing at airports and checkpoints.(81)
In Germany,
EADS (European Aeronautic Defense and Space), the Bavarian Police Helicopter
Squadron, and the Bavarian Interior Ministry are collaborating on Project
Autopol (automatic object recognition for police helicopters) to help law
enforcement agencies track illegal residents. Autopol combines automatic target
recognition (ATR) technology with an infrared camera installed in a police
helicopter. The infrared camera pinpoints warm objects such as people, animals,
cars, or power lines. (82)
The U.S.
Centibots project, funded by (DARPA), has developed new technology to support
the coordinated deployment of as many as 100 robots for missions such as urban
surveillance. These small mobile cameras on wheels, have their own artificial
intelligence and can hunt fugitives or provide mobile surveillance and security
for government agencies.(83)
The Federal
National Science Foundation has awarded Bill Kaiser and his engineering team at
UCLA $7.5 million to develop a systems of mobile cameras that zip through the
countryside on cables. Designed to monitor endangered species and analyze
environmental chemistry, they will also extend the urban surveillance grid out
into the wilderness.(84)
12.8 BLACK
BUDGET FUNDING
Development of the
technological apparatus of totalitarianism is possibly being funded by the
Pentagon's black budget. The Dept. Defense's Inspector General found that the
Pentagon couldn't properly account for trillions of dollars in accounting
entries every year.(85) For fiscal year 2000,
auditors found $1.1 trillion in bookkeeping entries that could not be tracked
or justified and $2.3 trillion worth of untraceable bookkeeping entries for
year 1999. (86)
Chapter 12
End Notes
1. Richard Ford, Beware rise of
Big Brother state, warns data watchdog, The Times
http://www.timesonline.co.uk/newspaper/0,,2710-1218615,00.html
2. Identity Cards, Frequently
Asked Questions, Privacy International Website, 24 Aug.1996.
See http://www.privacy.org/pi/activities/idcard/idcard_faq.html
3. Biometrics - the EU takes another
step down the road to 1984, Statewatch, 2003. See
http://www.statewatch.org/news/2003/sep/19eubiometric.htm
4. Statewatch, news index, December
2004
http://www.statewatch.org/news/archive2004.htm
5. Home Office website, FAQ's on ID
Cards. See
http://www.homeoffice.gov.uk/comrace/identitycards/faq.html
6. FAQ's on ID Cards,
www.no2ID.net http://www.no2id.net/IDSchemes/faq.php#1
7. Canadian parliamentary report
ridicules ID cards as pointless, costly and dangerous,
Privacy International Media Release, 8th Oct. 2003. See
http://www.statewatch.org/news/2003/oct/14canada.htm
8. Adam Thierer, National ID
Cards: New Technologies, Same Bad Idea, Cato Institute, Issue #21, 28 Sept.
2001. See http://www.cato.org/tech/tk/010928-tk.html
9. Watching the Watchers - Policy
Report #1, Electronic Privacy Information Center. Feb. 2002. See
http://www.epic.org/privacy/id_cards/yourpapersplease.pdf
Also see http://www.epic.org/privacy/id_cards/
10. Declan McCullagh, National ID
cards on the way?, CNET News.com, 14 February 2005
http://news.com.com/National+ID+cards+on+the+way/2100-1028_3-5573414.html
11. Gail Repsher Emery, Biometrics
company to evaluate technologies for Homeland Security, Washington Technology, 10
Aug. 2003. See
http://www.washingtontechnology.com/news/1_1/homeland/21866-1.html
12. The National Security
Strategy for Homeland Security, July 2002, Science and Technology, p.52.
See http://www.whitehouse.gov/homeland/book/sect4-1.pdf
Mainpagehttp://www.whitehouse.gov/homeland/book/index.html
13. Ibid., Law, p.49. See
http://www.whitehouse.gov/homeland/book/sect4.pdf
14. An Open Letter to the European
Parliament on Biometric Registration of All EU Citizens and Residents, Privacy
International, 30 November 2004. See
http://www.privacyinternational.org/issues/terrorism/ep_letter_biometrics.html
15. Homeland Security takes
action, Washington Technology, 1 Sept 2003; Vol. 18 No. 11. See
http://www.washingtontechnology.com/news/18_11/cover-stories/21541-1.html
16. Biometrics Management Office,
Dept. of Defense website. See
http://www.defenselink.mil/nii/biometrics/
17. Alfred Hermida, Faces and
eyes rival passwords, BBC, London, 23 Jan. 2003. See
http://www.propagandamatrix.com/faces_and_eyes_rival_passwords
18. Eye scanners for school
children, BBC, London, 8 Jan. 2003,
http://www.propagandamatrix.com/eye_scanners_for_school_children
19. Stephanie Warsmith, Students
will scan for meals: Akron school board OKs fingerprint
system, Akron Beacon, 28 May 2003. See
http://www.propagandamatrix.com/students_will_scan_for_meals
20. UNHCR imposing compulsory
iris-scans on returning refugees over six years old, Statewatch, Aug. 2003.
See http://www.statewatch.org/news/2003/aug/04afghan.htm
21. Pentagon System Hopes to
Identify Walks, Rocky Mount Telegram, 19 May 2003. See
http://www.propagandamatrix.com/
pentagon_system_hopes_to_identify_walks
22. Biometrics Benched for Super
Bowl, Wired News, 31 Dec. 2002. See
http://www.wired.com/news/culture/0,1284,56878,00.html
23. Background of the US
Government's Biometric Consortium, The Biometric Consortium website. See http://biometrics.org/REPORTS/CTST96/
24. Michael J. Sniffen, Pentagon
office creating surveillance system to close, The Associated Press,
copy on StarTelegram.com, 25 Sep. 2003. See
http://www.dfw.com/mld/dfw/news/nation/6857188.htm
25. Organizers say 'Matrix' Big
Brother database would be tied in with CIA, Associated Press, copy on
propagandamatrix.com.
See http://www.propagandamatrix.com/240903matrix.html
26. Homeland Security takes
action, Washington Technology, op cit.
27. Amelia Gruber, Government
rife with opportunities for small IT companies, survey finds,
GovExec.com, 14 Aug. 2003. See http://www.govexec.com/dailyfed/0803/081403a1.htm
28. The National Security Strategy
for Homeland Security, Information Sharing and Systems, pp. 55-58
29. Privacy and Human Rights,
a report by Privacy International, 2003. See http://www.privacyinternational.org/survey/phr2003/
threats.htm#The%20Current%20Landscape%20in%20the%20United%20States
30. Regulation of Investigatory
Powers Act, 2000, section 22.See
http://www.hmso.gov.uk/acts/acts2000/00023--c.htm#22
31. UK government forced to delay
new surveillance powers, Statewatch, news, June 2002. See
http://www.statewatch.org/news/2002/jun/05datauk.htm
32. Stuart Millar, Government
sweeps aside privacy rights, The Guardian, London, 11 June 2002. See http://www.guardian.co.uk/Archive/Article/0,4273,4431109,00.html
33. Stuart Millar, Lucy Ward
and Richard Norton-Taylor, Blunkett shelves access to data plans, The
Guardian, London, 19 June 2002. See http://www.guardian.co.uk/internetnews/story/0,7369,739959,00.html
34. Alan Travis, Secret go-ahead
for ID card database, The Guardian, London, 30 Sept. 2003. See
http://www.guardian.co.uk/print/0%2C3858%2C4763836-103685%2C00.html
35. UK: Children Bill to
introduce surveillance of every child and record "concerns" about
their parents, Statewatch news, April 2004 http://www.statewatch.org/news/2004/apr/07children-bill.htm
36. Anti-Terrorism Legislation in
The United Kingdom, Liberty, 2003, p.29. See http://www.liberty-human-rights.org.uk/resources/
publications/pdf-documents/anti-terrornew.pdf
37. MPs urge changes to net snooping laws, BBC, London, 28 Jan. 2003.
See
http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/technology/2702889.stm
38. Stuart Millar, Internet
providers say no to Blunkett, The Guardian, London, 22 Oct. 2002. See http://www.guardian.co.uk/internetnews/story/0,7369,816523,00.html
39. Data Retention,
Electronic Privacy Information Center.
See http://www.epic.org/privacy/intl/data_retention.html#origins
40. Privacy fears over EU
snooping plans, BBC, London, 20 Aug. 2002.
See http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/technology/2204909.stm
41. EU surveillance of telecommunications,
Statewatch, news, May 2002. See
http://www.statewatch.org/news/2002/may/18europol.htm
42. Data retention comes to roost
- telephone and internet privacy to be abolished, Statewatch news,
September 2004. See
http://www.statewatch.org/news/2004/apr/21dataretention.htm
43. Simon Jeffery, Police seek
DNA record of everyone, The Guardian, London, 8 Sept. 2003. See http://www.propagandamatrix.com/police_seek_dna_record_of_everyone
44. Nick Hopkins, Police to get
right to DNA test everyone they arrest, The Guardian, London, 27
March 2003, See http://www.propagandamatrix.com/
police_to_get_right_to_dna_test_everyone_they_arrest
45. Police can keep DNA of innocent
people indefinitely, statewatch, September 2004
http://www.statewatch.org/news/2004/sep/03uk-dna-database.htm
46.. Richard Willing, White House
seeks to expand DNA database, USA Today, 15 April 2003. See http://www.usatoday.com/news/washington/2003-04-15-dna-usat_x.htm
47. LTC William B. Osborne, Maj
Scott A. Bethel, Maj Nolen R. Chew, Maj Philip M. Nostrand and Maj YuLin G.
Whitehead, Airforce 2025, The Air University, August 1996, Information
Operations: A New War-Fighting Capability, Ch.4 Implanted Microscopic
Chip. See
http://www.fas.org/spp/military/docops/usaf/2025/v3c2/v3c2-1.htm#Contents
48. Brain Machine Interfaces,
DARPA Defense Sciences Office, Biological Sciences,
http://www.darpa.mil/dso/thrust/biosci/brainmi.htm
49. Michael Rosenwald, Can an
electronic device replace damaged brain circuits?, Popular Science, June
2003. See http://www.propagandamatrix.com/darpa_cyborg_race
50. Gareth Cook, Defense
Department funding brain-machine work,The Boston Globe, 5 August 2003. See.
http://www.propagandamatrix.com/
defense_department_funding_brain_machine_work
51. Tracking Junior With a Microchip, Wired News. See
http://www.propagandamatrix.com/101003microchip.html
52. Angela Swafford, Barcoding
humans, Boston Globe, 20 May 2003. See http://www.propagandamatrix.com/barcoding_humans
53. Digital Angel Corporation
website, GPS technology section. See http://www.digitalangel.net/consumer.asp
54. Alex Jones, infowars.com, Baja
Beach Club in Barcelona, Spain Launches Microchip Implantation for VIP Members,
7 April 2004 http://www.infowars.com/print/bb/bajaimplantupdate.htm
55. Chip Implanted in Mexico
Judicial Workers,Associated Press 14 July 2004. See
http://www.prisonplanet.com/articles/july2004/140704chipimplanted.htm
56. Katherine Albrecht, RFID:
Tracking everything, everywhere, Consumers Against Supermarket Privacy
Invasion and Numbering (CASPIAN). See http://www.stoprfid.com/rfid_overview.htm
57. Alex Jones Interviews Katherine
Albrecht, The Alex Jones Show, 8 July 2003. See
http://www.prisonplanet.com/jones_report_071403_albrecht.html
58. Alok Jha, Tesco tests spy
chip technology: Tags in packs of razor blades used to track buyers, The
Guardian, London, 19 July 2003. See http://www.guardian.co.uk/
uk_news/story/0%2c3604%2c1001211%2c00.html
59. Tesco Spychips,
www.boycotttesco.com. See
http://www.boycotttesco.com/wrong.html
60. Matthew Broersma, Defense
Department drafts RFID policy, CNET News.com, 24 Oct. 2003.
See http://zdnet.com.com/2100-1104_2-5097050.html
61. Electronic Privacy Information
Center, RFID page. See
http://www.epic.org/privacy/rfid/
62. Fat tax 'could save lives',BBC,
London, 28 Jan. 2000. See
http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/health/620844.stm
63. More Absurd Fat Tax Proposals,
Consumer Freedom, 1 March 2000. See
http://www.consumerfreedom.com/article_detail.cfm?ARTICLE_ID=102
64. Stephen Naysmith, New ID
cards let parents spy on what kids eat, Sunday Herald, 26 Oct. 2003. See http://www.sundayherald.com/37698
65. Audrey Hudson, 'Smart stamps'
next in war on terrorism, The Washington Times, 26 oct. 2003. See http://washingtontimes.com/national/20031026-124606-8419r.htm
66. Dr Leonard Horowitz, The
CIA's Role in the Anthrax Mailings: Could Our Spies be Agents for
Military-Industrial Sabotage, Terrorism, and Even Population Control?. See
http://www.tetrahedron.org/articles/anthrax/anthrax_espionage.html
67. Investigators Conclude
Russian Defector is Lead Suspect in Anthrax Mailings Case, Tetrahedron LLC.
News Release: No. DITA-81, 30 Aug. 2002. See
http://www.tetrahedron.org/news/NR020830.html
68. In-Car Black Boxes: Safety
Measure Or Spy Tactic? Louisville Ky. -- transcript of John Boel's report
shown exactly the way it appeared on WLKY NewsChannel 32 at 11 p.m. on 17 Feb.
2003.
See http://www.propagandamatrix.com/
in_car_black_boxes_safety_measure_or_spy_tactic
69. Juliette Jowit, Black box in
car to trap speed drivers, The Observer, London, 3 Aug. 2003. See http://www.propagandamatrix.com/black_box_in_car_to_trap_speed_drivers
70. Tom Symonds, Tracking the
future of driving, BBC, London, 9 June 2003. See
http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/uk_politics/2975216.stm
71. Anger at £1.30-a-mile road
toll plan, The Scotsman, 14 Oct. 2003. See
http://www.news.scotsman.com/topics.cfm?tid=477&id=1136522003
72. Electronic Privacy Information
Center, op cit.
73. Now Employers Can Spy on
Staff Out of Office, The Scotsman, 17 October 2004
http://www.infowars.com/print/bb/employersspy.htm
74. Mark Prigg, Secret MoD plan
to create spy stations, The Evening Standard, London, 23 Oct. 2003. See http://www.thisislondon.com/news/articles/
7321553?source=Evening%20Standard
75. Jason Burke and Peter Warren, How
mobile phones let spies see our every move, The Observer, London, 13 Oct.
2002. See http://www.propagandamatrix.com/
how_mobile_phones_let_spies_see_our_every_move
76. Noah Shachtman, The
Pentagon's Plan for Tracking Everything That Moves, Big Brother Gets a
Brain, Village Voice Media, 9-15 July 2003. See http://www.propagandamatrix.com/
the_pentagons_plan_for_tracking_everything_that_moves
77. Sam Dillon, U.S. schools resort
to security cameras, International Herald Tribune, 25 Sept. 2003. See http://www.milestonesys.com/?cid=250&newsId=115.
Also
http://www.propagandamatrix.com/cameras_peer_into_school_hallways
78. Donna Lowry, Web Cameras
Monitor Class Activity, WXIA-TV Atlanta,15 Oct. 2003. See http://www.propagandamatrix.com/web_cameras_monitor_class_activity
79. David Ho, Federal regulators
ease restrictions on technology that can see through walls, Associated
Press, copy on The San Diego Union Tribune website. 13 Feb. 2003. See http://www.propagandamatrix.com/
federal_regulators_ease_restrictions_on_technology_that_can_see_through_walls
80. Major G.J. Burton CD, PPCLI and
Major G.P. Ohlke CD, Intelligence, Exploitation of millimeter waves for
through-wall surveillance during military operations in urban terrain, Land
Force Technical Staff Programme V, Department of Applied Military Science,
Royal Military College of Canada, Kingston, Ontario, 24 May 2000, pp.14, 30,
35.
See http://www.rmc.ca/academic/gradrech/millimeter-e.pdf
81. New airport scans could
expose travelers: Screeners could get x-ray vision, CNN, 26 June 2003. See http://infowars.com/print/ps/xray_screeners.htm
82. Felix Soh, "Using War
Technology to Track Illegals," Singapore Straits Times Online, 15 June
2002, copy on Justice Technology Information Network website, a division of the
National Law Enforcement and Corrections Technology Center. See http://www.nlectc.org/justnetnews/06202002.html
83. Cenibots: The 100 Robots
Project, DARPA.
See http://www.ai.sri.com/centibots/
84. Charles Choi, Tiny robots in
the trees, United Press International, science news, copy on
Colaradodaily.com, 12 Oct. 2003. See
http://www.coloradodaily.com/articles/2003/10/12/news/est/est02.txt
85. Tom Abate, Military Waste
Under Fire, $1 Trillion Missing - Bush targets Pentagon Accounting, San
Francisco Chronicle, 18 May 2003. See
http://www.sfgate.com/cgi-bin/article.cgi?file=/c/a/2003/05/18/MN251738.DTL
86. David Wood, Pentagon's
Unreliable Bookkeeping Stands as Obstacle to Bush Reforms, New House News
Service, 2001. See http://www.newhouse.com/archive/story1a061301.html
Chapter 13
THE FAMILY AND RELIGION
Like the
communists, the Western elite are attacking traditional social insitutions
which challenge the moral authority of the state. They are promoting New Age
religion because it is more suited to their political agendas.
13.1
ELITISM AND THE NEW AGE RELIGION
New Age religion
proposes the ascendancy of a ruling elite un-restrained by the moral strictures
of ancient religious texts. Whereas monotheistic religions propose a deity who
is apart from the world and judges man for his actions, New Age pantheism
proposes that God is the collective whole of every entity in the world
organized into a spiritual hierarchy. Evolution and reincarnation underpin a
spiritual hierarchy headed by the Masters of Wisdom who can communicate
telepathically with their followers. The Masters will bring humanity into the
Age of Aquarius or The New World Order using their higher wisdom. These ideas
stem from the Theosophical movement founded by a Russian woman called Helena
Blavatsky born in 1831. The Nazis took Theosophy seriously and Hitler based his
genocidal theories of master race, or supermen ( "Ubermenschen") on
it.(1)Theosophy
has been promoted at the U.N. by The Lucis Trust which enjoys consultative
status with its Economic and Social Council.(2)The U.N. is regarded by New Agers as
the supreme political instrument of the Hierarchy, which is appropriate given
that the U.N. has always been controlled by the elite.(3)
Not only is
pantheism used to justify the dictatorship of a ruling elite, it also tied into
agendas such as eugenics / bioethics, population control, and radical
environmentalism. Pantheistic Earth worship is promoted at the highest level of
the environmental movement. As an atheistic parallel of the ten commandments,
the U.N. Earth Charter, a 16 point plan for humanity written by Stephen
Rockefeller and Mikhail Gorbachev, has been placed in a 500 pound chest called The
Ark of Hope.
On page 60
of her book, Manual of the Co-Creators for the Quantam Leap, New Ager
Barbara Marx Hubbard states that the spiritual elite will have to kill off one
half of the population in order to evolve humanity to the next level: 'We are
in charge of God's selection process for Planet Earth. He selects, we destroy.
We are the riders of the pale horse, Death'. Hubbard was a former member of the
Presidential Committee on National Curriculum and Democratic Party nominee for
Vice-President in 1984.(5) (6)
13.2
CAUGHT IN THE ACT AT BOHEMIAN GROVE
On 2nd August 1982 Newsweek magazine
reported:
... the
world's most prestigious summer camp - the Bohemian Grove - is now in session
75 miles north of San Francisco. The fiercely guarded, 2,700 acre retreat is
the country extension of San Francisco's all-male ultra-exclusive Bohemian Club
to which every Republican President since Herbert Hoover has belonged. With its
high-powered clientèle, coveted privacy and cabalistic rituals, the Bohemian
Grove has prompted considerable suspicion... The most important events, however
are the "lakeside talks" (past orators: Alexander Hague and Casper
Weinberger). This year's speaker was Henry Kissinger on The Challenge of the
'80s.(7)
In July
2001, documentary film-maker Alex Jones infiltrated Bohemian Grove, becoming
the first person to capture the bizarre occult activities of the Bohemian
Club's world leaders on videotape.(8) The centre-piece of
the festivities is The Cremation of Care, literally the torching of
human compassion. This involves a mock human sacrifice to the sun god Moloch,
performed in front of a forty-foot tall stone owl. Alex Jones commentates:
We were all
focused at what was going on across the pond. Suddenly the owl was lit up by
some flood lights and out ran a hundred priests or so in black, red and green
robes. Most of them were in black, some in red and a couple in silver or green
robes. Then, out came the high priest, who went through all his incantations
about the dead (who is dead at the Grove in the past, may their spirits be
conjured and brought back there by the "great owl"). He praised the
owl for about twenty minutes and he talked about "goodly Tyre and
Babylon".
The priests
went on to burn alive a human effigy whose cries for mercy were broadcast
through a public address system. Pyrotechnics caused metal crucifixes around
the pond to burst into flames.
Religious infanticide
was widespread among the ancient peoples of the Eastern Mediterranean region,
but the cult of Moloch is the most documented. Baal Moloch (or Molekh) 'The
Bull of the Sun' was the sun god of the Phoenecians (called Canaanites in the
Bible). He was conceived in the form of a calf or an ox, or depicted as a man
with the head of a bull. In many instances the bodies of children were burnt as
sacrifices, performed to renew the strength of the sun fire.(9)
Canaan is
an ancient term for the country roughly corresponding to what was later
historically known as Palestine or The Holy Land, and in modern political
terms, Israel and the Occupied Territories. The Canaanites were the Semitic
inhabitants of Canaan before the Israelites arrived and it seems that the
Israelites followed the Canaanite practice of sacrificing children to Molech.
The ritual is described in The Old Testament 'to pass through the fire' and is
strongly condemned.(10) Tyre was an major
commercial city in the Phoenician empire and many of its kings were named
Baal after the sun god. (11)
13.3
TARGETING THE YOUNG
New Age religion
and witchcraft have become very popular amongst today's youth because they
offer magical power, personal liberation, and an anything goes culture. This is
exactly the kind of moral vacuum the elite need to exert control over the
population. According to Reuters, 19 June 2003:
Paganism and the
ancient art of witchcraft are on the rise in Britain, experts said on Thursday
as the summer's most celebrated Pagan festival approached. Television, the
Internet, environmentalism and even feminism have all played a role in the
resurgence, they say. Soaring Pagan numbers have churches worrying and calling
for stricter controls on cult TV programs and films that celebrate sorcery like
"Harry Potter," "Buffy the Vampire Slayer" and
"Sabrina the Teenage Witch... "Anything that makes teenage
girls feel powerful is bound to go down well," joked OBOD's McCabe. Kevin
Carlyon, High Priest of British White Witches said "Harry Potter" in
recent years had continued the trend, helping create what he called "the
fastest growing belief system in the world." (12)
Sponsored
by ExxonMobil, 'Harry Potter Day' 2001, saw American children attending public
libraries for potion class.(13) Here is a sample of
Harry Potter 's occult powers:
Harry
longed to bite the man... but he must master the impulse. He had more important
work to do. But the man was stirring... Harry saw his vibrant, blurred outline
towering above him, saw a wand withdrawn from a belt... He had no choice... He
reared high from the floor and struck once, twice, three times, plunging his
fangs deeply into the man's flesh, feeling his ribs splinter beneath his jaws,
feeling the warm gush of blood... The man was yelling in pain... then he fell
silent... He slumped backward against the wall... Blood was splattering onto
the floor... His forehead hurt terribly. (14)
K B Toys
now make occultic barbie dolls called Secret Spells Christie and Secret Spells
Kayla.(15)
One company, Mezco Toyz, has invented the Living Dead Doll, a creation straight
from a horror movie. The gruesome ten-inch dolls, with devil-red eyes and blood
pouring from their mouths, come in their own coffins, along with a death
certificate. The characters include Sybill, who is strapped in a straitjacket
with a collar and chain, and Inferno, who has auburn hair, fiery eyes and
bat-like wings.(16)
13.4 BANNING MONOTHEISM
Meanwhile,
the E.U. is attacking religions using human rights laws, just as they are being
used to attack national sovereignty. In December 2003, a law was implemented in
the U.K. based on a European Union Directive which bans discrimination in the
workplace on the grounds of religion, belief, or sexual orientation. Thousands
of religious schools, charities and organizations could face legal action if
they refuse to employ atheists or homosexuals, or sack staff who become
Satanists under proposed Government regulations.(17)
President
Bush signed America up to UNESCO on 1st October 2003 after a nineteen year
absence. UNESCO'S Manifesto 2000 for a culture of peace and non-violence includes
the aim to, 'Defend freedom of expression and cultural diversity, giving
preference always to dialogue and listening without engaging in fanaticism,
defamation and the rejection of others.'(18) Christianity, Judaism
and Islam and most other religions emphatically "reject others" and
can be extremely defamatory. Under this rule, monotheistic religions would be
muzzled.
UNESCO is equally
contemptuous of the family. A 10-part series for teachers, published in 1949
under the title Toward World Understanding, reads like The Communist
Manifesto: 'Government schools must stamp out love of country and the
family must be viewed as the enemy'.(19)
The U.K. Serious
Organised Crime and Police Bill introduced in November 2004, creates a new
crime of incitement to religious hatred. This will have the effect of stopping
religious groups from criticizing each other, and therefore expressing their
core belief that theirs is the only true religion. It also sets a very
dangerous precedent that the state can censor criticism of a set of beliefs.
What happens when the state declares that euthanasia or another belief of some
'bioethics committee' falls within this protection?
13.5
ENFORCING LOVE OF BIG BROTHER
We have cut
the links between child and parent, and between man and man, and between man
and woman. No one dares trust a wife or a child or a friend any longer. But in
the future there will be no wives and no friends. Children will be taken from
their mothers at birth, as one takes eggs from a hen. The sex instinct will be
eradicated. Procreation will be an annual formality like the renewal of a
ration card. We shall abolish the orgasm. Our neurologists are at work upon it
now. There will be no loyalty, except loyalty towards the Party. There will be
no love, except the love of Big Brother. -George Orwell, 1984
Chapter 12
described the U.K. Children Bill, 2004, which sets up a database to
monitor personal, health and educational information for all children and their
families.(20)
Currently, under The 1996 Education Act parents can be fined £2500 or
sentenced to three months in prison if their child regularly truants from
school. In October 2003 the Government proposed introducing £25- £100 fines for
each unauthorized absence from class.(21)
13.6
SEXUAL ABUSE
On top of all
the tyrannical social politcal agendas, the elite are backing an equally
disturbing agenda of sexual abuse. The Daily Telegraph reported on 23rd
October 2003:
The
European Union's elite are determined to destroy Europe's Christian heritage,
Italy's reform minister, Umberto Bossi said yesterday. He described the elite
as 'filthy pigs' who wanted to 'make paedophilia as easy as possible'.(22)
Many major
paedophile rings have been uncovered which involved members of the ruling
class. In June 2003, scandal rocked the Portuguese establishment when it
emerged that senior figures were in a paedophile ring at a state run boys
orphanage. Among them were Paulo Pedroso, an MP and number two in the
opposition Socialist Party; Carlos Cruz, one of Portugal's most popular
television journalists; and Jorge Ritto, retired ambassador to UNESCO. The
arrest of Pedroso was the first of a politician during the investigation. It
followed the testimony of two 14-year-old boys who identified the 38-year-old
divorcée from photographs and claimed that they were taken to a country home in
Elvas, near the Spanish border, on several occasions during 1999 and 2000 while
Pedroso was still a Minister.(23)
French
police investigating the disappearance of 115 young women in the Toulouse area
between 1986 and 1997 discovered that serial killer Patrice Alègre, a
policeman's son, organized the city's prostitution business, providing
under-age girls for sadomasochistic orgies with Magistrates, politicians,
policemen, journalists and businessmen at Toulouse's Palais de Justice and a
chateau owned by Toulouse council.(24)
In
January 2003, child porn allegations caused Tony Blair to issue a D-Notice to
gag the press from revealing the names of known paedophiles within the British
Government. The Sunday Herald has also had it confirmed by a senior
source in British intelligence that at least one high-profile former Labour
Cabinet minister is among Operation Ore suspects, an operation by Scotland
Yard's Paedophile Unit into child porn downloaded from the internet. The
Sunday Herald has been given the politician's name but, for legal reasons,
cannot identify the person. There are still unconfirmed rumours that another
senior Labour politician is among the suspects. The intelligence officer said
that a 'rolling' Cabinet committee had been set up to work out how to deal with
the potentially ruinous fall-out for both Tony Blair and the Government if
arrests occur.(25)
The
Independent reported on 12th June 2002:
When police
in the tiny republic of Montenegro swooped on a suspected pimp accused of
running a major sex trafficking operation, they ran into an embarrassing
problem. The man they were about to put behind bars was none other than the
country's deputy state prosecutor... Montenegro has been shaken hard by the
burgeoning scandal, which allegedly involved leading members of the judiciary,
police and political officials. Zoran Piperovic, the republic's deputy
prosecutor, was arrested this week, and six other officials have been detained.
They are accused of forcing women, mostly from Moldavia, Ukraine and Romania,
into prostitution... It is an open secret in the Balkans that
people-trafficking rings run through Montenegro to Bosnia and Kosovo, with
profits from the dirty trade reaching millions of Euros. The sex-slave routes
lead to Italy and Britain, where at least 1,400 women, mainly from eastern
Europe, are tricked into prostitution each year. The trade is highly lucrative
for the men who "own" them; in London, women can bring in about
£100,000 a year for their pimps.(26)
Madeleine
Rees, the head of the U.N. Human Rights Commission office in Sarajevo, stated
that trafficking in women through Bosnia started with the arrival of the international
peace keepers in 1992. As well as 21,000 NATO peace keepers and aid workers,
there were police from 40 countries trying to keep Bosnia's warring factions
apart. Extra-curricular activities involved running paedophile and prostitution
rings with the local criminals.(27) The core of the U.N.
international police force in Bosnia were employees of Dyncorp, a US based
military contractor. Insight on the News magazine reports that
none of the girls were from Bosnia but were kidnapped in Russia, Romania and
other places, and transported by DynCorp /U.N. employees and the Serbian mafia.(28) More than 6000 girls
aged between 12 and 16 are smuggled to Western Europe each year. Researchers
have identified north-eastern Italy as a key sorting centre for girls from
Eastern Europe, again underlining the importance of the U.N.'s activities in
Bosnia. (29)
A copy of
the joint study sponsored by the U.N. High Commission for Refugees and Save The
Children, obtained by United Press International, describes the sexual abuse of
children in Sierra Leone, Liberia, and Guinea by U.N. and NGO staff. Agency
workers from the international and local NGOs as well as U.N. agencies were
ranked as among the worst sex exploiters of children, often using the very
humanitarian aid and services intended to benefit the refugee population as a
tool of exploitation. The assessment team listed sexual allegations and called
for further investigation against workers from 42 agencies.(30)
Chapter 13 End Notes
1. Jackson Spielvogel and David Redles, Hitler's Racial
Ideology: Content and Occult Sources, Simon Wiesenthal Center, Annual 3. See http://motlc.wiesenthal.com/resources/books/annual3/chap09.html
2. List of the non-governmental
organizations in consultative status with the Economic and Social Council as at
31 July 1998, E/1998/INF/6,Distr. GENERAL, U.N.
See http://www.un.org/documents/ecosoc/docs/1998/e1998-inf6.htm
3. The Aquarian Age Community
website.
See http://www.aquaac.org/un/found.html
4. The Ark of Hope website.
See http://arkofhope.org/index.php?module=htmlpages&func=display&pid=1
5. Gary Kah, The Demonic Roots of
Globalism, Huntington House Publishers, 1995 p.125
6. Ibid., p.116
7. Bohemian Club, Gaylon Ross
Sr..
See http://www.4rie.com/rie%207.html
8. Alex Jones, Occult Activities
at the Elite Bohemian Grove, in Northern California Exposed!. See
http://www.infowars.com/bg_story_template.html
9. Moloch, Encyclopedia Mythica.
See http://www.pantheon.org/articles/m/moloch.html
10. Moloch, Catholic Encyclopedia.
See http://www.newadvent.org/cathen/10443b.htm
11. NationMaster.com.
See http://www.nationmaster.com/encyclopedia/Tyre
12. Pete Harrison, Sabrina, Harry
and the Web Help UK Paganism Grow, Reuters, 19 June 2003,
http://www.propagandamatrix.com/
sabrina_harry_and_the_web_help_uk_paganism_grow
13. Caryl Matrisciana, Entertainment
at any cost?, WorldNetDaily.com, 9 Nov. 2001. See
http://www.biblerevelations.org/harry_potter/any_cost.htm
14. J K Rowling, Harry Potter and
The Order of The Phoenix, p.463. See http://www.propagandamatrix.com/
harry_potter_and_the_order_of_the_phoenix
15. Infowars.com http://infowars.com/print/misc/wicca_barbie.htm
16. Jacqui Goddard, Horror dolls
threaten Barbie, The Scotsman, 25 Nov. 2002. See
http://www.propagandamatrix.com/horror_dolls_threaten_barbie
17. Jonathan Petre, Euro rules
force Church bodies to employ atheists, The Daily Telegraph, London,
25 Jan. 2003. See
http://www.propagandamatrix.com/
euro_rules_force_church_bodies_to_employ_atheists.htm
18. Manifesto 2000 for a culture
of Peace and Non-violence, UNESCO. See
http://www3.unesco.org/manifesto2000/
uk/uk_manifeste.htm#respecter
19. Phil Brennan, UNESCO:
Strangle This Monster in Its Crib, Newsmax, 18 June 2003. See
http://www.propagandamatrix.com/unesco_strangle_this_monster_in_its_crib
20. UK: Children Bill to
introduce surveillance of every child and record "concerns" about
their parents, Statewatch news, April 2004
21. £100 instant penalty for
truancy, BBC, London, 3 Oct. 2003. See
http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/education/3159532.stm
22. Ambrose Evans-Pritchard, EU
elite are filthy pigs, says Bossi, The Daily Telegraph, London, 23
Oct. 2003. See http://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/
main.jhtml?xml=%2Fnews%2F2003%2F10%2F23%2Fwpig23.xml
23. Portugal shamed by child sex,
The Sunday Herald, 12 Oct. 2003. See
http://www.sundayherald.com/37405
24. Paul Webster, Toulouse
officials ordered murder, says serial killer, The Guardian, London,
3 June 2003. See http://www.propagandamatrix.com/
toulouse_officials_ordered_murder_says_serial_killer
25. Neil Mackay, Child porn
arrests 'too slow', The Sunday Herald, 19 Jan. 2003. See
http://www.sundayherald.com/30813
26. Vesna Peric Zimonjic, Government
officials in sex trafficking ring arrested, The Independent, London,
6 Dec. 2002. See http://www.propagandamatrix.com/
government_officials_in_sex_trafficking_ring_arrested
27. Daniel McGrory, Woman sacked
for revealing UN links with sex trade, The Times, London, 7 Aug.
2002. See http://www.propagandamatrix.com/
woman_sacked_for_revealing_un_links_with_sex_trade
28. Kelly Patricia O Meara, DynCorp
Disgrace, Insight on the News, 14 Jan. 2002. See
http://www.insightmag.com/main.cfm/
include/detail/storyid/163052.html
29. Philip Willan, 6,000 children
smuggled to the west each year for sex, The Guardian, London, 12
July 2002. See http://www.propagandamatrix.com/
6000_children_smuggled_to_the_west_each_year_for_sex
30. U.N. Finally Forced to Probe
Its Pedophilia Scandal, Newsmax.com, 7 May 2002. See
http://www.propagandamatrix.com/
un_finally_forced_to_probe_its_pedophillia_scandal
Copyright
© by Michael Nield 2004, 2005
All rights Reserved.
Permission granted to reproduce for personal and educational use only.
Commercial copying, hiring, lending is prohibited
Chapter 14
POPULATION CONTROL
Gradually, by
selective breeding, the congenital differences between rulers and ruled will
increase until they become almost different species. A revolt of the plebs
would become as unthinkable as an organized insurrection of sheep against the
practice of eating mutton.
- Bertrand Russell, The
Impact of Science on Society
With
the restraints of moral conventions and democracy dispensed with, the new
utopia offers the holy grail of all dictators: Control over life itself. Yet
some of that control has existed for decades in spite of our notionally free
and democratic societies. Science offers the great advantage that very few
people can understand it. Whoever pays for its conduct and its presentation in
the popular media can dictate the consensus on any given issue, simply by
asserting that his committee of experts are the most distinguished. The less
well funded and represented dissenters are labeled the dangerous 'quacks' and
'junk scientists'.
And this is how
the petrochemical-pharmaceutical cartel has killed, injured, and sterilized
millions of people over the last hundred years. The same forces that supported
Hitler have continued to operate covertly ever since.
Population
control is multi-faceted. It includes: Reducing the number of people; eugenics;
reducing intelligence levels; mind control; increasing poverty; and creating
financial dependence on the pharmaceutical industry. Various facets of the
population control agenda can be served simultaneously by the same device.
Facing up to this
21st century holocaust merely requires an acknowledgement of the moral position
of its elevated sponsors. Some might be unashamedly evil but most are
Malthusians who believe that the there is no sanctity in human life. To 'save
the planet' we must kill off most of the people, so said Jacques Cousteau in
the UNESCO Courier of November 1991:
The damage people
cause to the planet is a function of demographics - it is equal to the degree
of development. One American burdens the earth much more than twenty
Bangladeshes ... This is a terrible thing to say. In order to stabilize world
population, we must eliminate 350,000 people per day. It is a horrible thing to
say, but it's just as bad not to say it. (1)
Bertrand Russell,
one of the twentieth century's most eminent philosophers, said the same in his
book, The Impact of Science on Society:
At
present the population of the world is increasing ... War so far has had no
great effect on this increase ... I do not pretend that birth control is the
only way in which population can be kept from increasing. There are others ...
If a Black Death could be spread throughout the world once in every generation,
survivors could procreate freely without making the world too full...(2)
Russell also supported the idea of
engineering human beings to meet social requirements:
Scientific
societies are as yet in their infancy. . . . It is to be expected that advances
in physiology and psychology will give governments much more control over
individual mentality than they now have even in totalitarian countries. Fitche
laid it down that education should aim at destroying free will, so that, after
pupils have left school, they shall be incapable, throughout the rest of their
lives, of thinking or acting otherwise than as their schoolmasters would have
wished. . . . Diet, injections, and injunctions will combine, from a very early
age, to produce the sort of character and the sort of beliefs that the
authorities consider desirable, and any serious criticism of the powers that be
will become psychologically impossible.
The Nazis were more
scientific than the present rulers of Russia. . . . If they had survived, they
would probably have soon taken to scientific breeding. Any nation which adopts
this practice will, within a generation, secure great military advantages. The
system, one may surmise, will be something like this: except possibly in the
governing aristocracy, all but 5 per cent of males and 30 per cent of females
will be sterilized. The 30 per cent of females will be expected to spend the
years from eighteen to forty in reproduction, in order to secure adequate cannon
fodder. As a rule, artificial insemination will be preferred to the natural
method. . . .
Gradually, by
selective breeding, the congenital differences between rulers and ruled will
increase until they become almost different species. A revolt of the plebs
would become as unthinkable as an organized insurrection of sheep against the
practice of eating mutton. (3)
The progressively
dumbed down society described in Brave New World is desirable to those
in the ruling class who believe in 'command and control'. However, with the
internet serving as a counter-weight to official disinformation, we can now
afford ourselves some protection against a health catastrophe we might
otherwise endure at their hands.
14.1
FUNDING POPULATION CONTROL
Displayed on
Rockefeller University's website homepage on 3 December 2003, was a picture of
a crowded city market with the following caption beneath:
It took
from the beginning of time until 1950 to put the first 2.5 billion people on
the planet. Yet in the next half-century, an increase that exceeds the total
population of the world in 1950 will occur, So writes Joel E. Cohen, Ph.D.,
Dr.P.H., professor and head of the Laboratory of Populations at The Rockefeller
University and Columbia University, in a Viewpoint article in the November 14
issue of the journal Science.(4)
Limiting
population growth has been a preoccupation of the European and American elite
throughout the twentieth century. The Population Council was established in
1952 by John D. Rockefeller III. The multi-billion dollar World Wildlife Fund
is sponsored by British and Dutch Royalty and the elite environmental
think-tank, The Club of Rome, counts several world leaders amongst its members.
The U.N.'s population control activities receive funding from all the major
charitable foundations, especially the Ford Foundation and Rockefeller
Foundation. Ted Turner's $1 billion United Nations Foundation and the $24
billion Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation are entirely devoted to population
control activities although they are disguised as public health campaigns.
The United
Nations Population Fund (UNFPA) is the single largest international source of
overt funding for population and reproductive health programmes. Since it began
operations in 1969, the Fund has provided nearly $6 billion in 'assistance' to
developing countries.(5)The UNFPA only manages one quarter
of the world's population control budget for developing countries, which is in
excess of $1 billion per year.(6) The Netherlands, Britain, and Japan
were by far the biggest funders of UNFPA in 2001, providing almost 50% of the
total $396 million.(7) Meanwhile the U.S. Agency for
International Development (USAID) gives substantially more money to population
control programmes than to healthcare and food assistance.(8)
14.2 AIMS
AND METHODS - THE ART OF KILLING QUIETLY
The
population control agenda is presented to the public as a universal concern for
planetary resources and environmental pollution, and to a lesser degree,
socio-economic deprivation, women's rights, and reproductive health. Whatever
the truth of these arguments, the point is that population 'control' is
coercive. The policy papers on population control contain objectives that
are so extreme that coercion would certainly be needed to meet them. The 1972
benchmark environmentalist publication, The Limits To Growth, predicted
planetary meltdown by 2050 unless radical limits to population growth were
imposed. In 1974, this was translated into hard U.S. national security policy
by National Security Advisor, Henry Kissinger. His lengthy National Security
Study Memorandum 200 laid out the aims, timescale, and methods of U.S.
foreign policy for limiting the population growth of 'lesser developed
countries'.(9)
Measures were to be taken to keep the world's population growing beyond 8
billion, meaning 500 million fewer people by year 2000 and 3 billion fewer by
2050. However, many suspect that this is nowhere near the real target of the
elite and their Malthusian collaborators, which is to cut the world's current
population in half. The American population control think tank, Negative
Population Growth Inc., recommended in 1992 that the population of the U.S.
should be 125-150 million, requiring a 50% cut from its current level.(10) In 1995, the same think-tank
published a study recommending an 80% reduction in global population. (11)
In NSSM
200, Henry Kissinger stated that no single approach would 'solve' the
population problem. Multiple and seemingly unconnected approaches are also less
likely to attract attention. Here follows a short-list of these approaches.
14.3
ENVIRONMENTALISM
The
environmental movement has been an important tool for justifying population
reduction. As The Daily Telegraph recently reported, banning the
pesticide DDT in the early 1970s was a huge victory for the population
controllers. DDT was introduced as an insecticide in the 1940s and promised to
eradicate malaria, one of the world's biggest natural killers. Despite all the
scientific evidence to the contrary, the powerful environmental lobby declared
it dangerous, and so it was banned. As a result, hundreds of millions of lives
have been lost to malaria unnecessarily.(12) Alexander King, president of the
The Club of Rome, confirmed the real purpose of the ban.
My own doubts
came when DDT was introduced. In Guyana, within two years, it had almost
eliminated malaria. So my chief quarrel with DDT,in hindsight, is that it has
greatly added to the population problem.(13)
14.4
PUBLIC HEALTH POLICY AND WESTERN MEDICINE
THE DRUGS
TRUST
The
pharmaceutical industry is a multi-trillion dollar business, and healthcare
spending consumes a significant proportion of Western GDP. One family in
particular has played a key role in the development of the pharmaceutical
industry - The Rockefellers. As described in chapters 2 and 4, the Rockefellers
invested in the German chemical and pharmaceutical giant, I.G. Farben in the
1930s. Sterling Drug, Inc., was the main cog and largest holding company in the
Rockefeller drug empire during the first half of the 20th Century.(14)Today, Rockefeller owned Bristol-
Myers Squibb Inc. accounts for nearly half of the chemotherapy sales in the
world.(15)
The five
leading private medical research institutes in the U.S. are either controlled
by, or affiliated to, the Rockefellers: Rockefeller University, Memorial Sloan-Kettering
Cancer Center, Aaron Diamond AIDS Research Center, Howard Hughes Medical
Institute and Cold Spring Harbour Laboratories. These institutes conduct
cutting edge medical research which affects the world's entire health care
system.
A brief chronology of the establishment of health
and educational institutions by John D. Rockefeller:
1889
-1909 The University of Chicago
1901
The Rockefeller Institute For Medical Research, now Rockefeller University
1909
Rockefeller Sanitary Commission for Eradication of Hookworm Disease
1910
In partnership with the Harriman family, funded the Station for Experimental
Evolution and Eugenics Records Office in Cold Spring Harbour.
1914
The China Medical Board (16)
The $65 million endowment of
the Rockefeller Institute dwarfed the budget of the Public Health Service in
the first three decades of 20th century.(17) Rockefeller University is a world
leading centre for pharmaceutical medicine. Its website boasts:
In its history,
Rockefeller has been associated with 22 Nobel laureates and 18 Lasker Award
recipients. Five faculty members have been named MacArthur Fellows and 11 have
garnered the National Medal of Science, the highest science award given by the
United States. And, 34 Rockefeller faculty are elected members of the National
Academy of Sciences... Rockefeller forges collaborations with biotech and
pharmaceutical companies as needed to speed research findings into development
to improve patient care.(18)
The world's
premier AIDS research institution, Aaron Diamond AIDS Research Centre, is
affiliated to the Rockefeller University by academic, infrastructural, and
administrative ties.(19) Established in 1991, ADARC is the
world's largest private research laboratory devoted solely to biomedical
research on HIV/AIDS and is currently co-leading China's largest AIDS
'treatment programme'.(20) Rockefeller owned Time
magazine voted their man at ADARC, Dr David Ho, 'Man of The Year' in 1996.
The Howard
Hughes Medical Institute has worked in partnership with the Rockefeller
University since 1986.(21) Founded in 1953, at close of
financial year 2002, Howard Hughes Medical Institute endowment was $10.3
billion making it the second largest philanthropy in the USA after the $24
billion Bill Gates Foundation.(22) HHMI currently
employs seven Nobel prize winners. (23) Current Trustees include James A
Baker III and CEO of the Hughes Corporation, William R Lummis. In 1987 World
Bank President, James D Wolfensohn, was elected as trustee. (24)
The
Rockefeller University has close ties with Memorial Sloan-Kettering Cancer
Center.(25) During early 1970s Laurence S.
Rockefeller sat on the board of the Memorial Sloan -Kettering Cancer Centre and
was trustee of the Sloan Foundation.(26)The Rockefeller University archive
reveals that the Rockefellers provided substantial endowment for Memorial
Sloan-Kettering. The New York Cancer Hospital, founded in 1884, was one of the
first hospitals devoted entirely to the research and treatment of cancer. Later
known as the General Memorial Hospital for Cancer and Allied Diseases
(1899-1916), and then as Memorial Hospital, it was vastly expanded and
modernized in 1936 as a result of contributions by John D. Rockefeller II and
the General Education Board. The Sloan foundation was founded in 1934 by Alfred
P. Sloan Chairman of General Motors. In 1945, the Sloan-Kettering Institute was
created to conduct intensive research in oncology. In 1960 the Memorial
Sloan-Kettering Cancer Center was formed to serve as an administrative umbrella
for the hospital and institute.(27) Rockefeller's modernization
involved relocating Memorial to a new site just across the street from
Rockefeller University. (28) Nelson A. Rockefeller was a Member
of Westchester County (NY) Board of Health from January 1933 to June 1953.(29) Westchester became home to the
Phelps Hospital founded in 1952 with Rockefeller money. With a donation of 66
acres on the Hudson River and $500,000 by the Arthur Curtis James Foundation,
along with a pledge of $800,000 toward the project by John D. Rockefeller II,
the new hospital was born.(30) The Phelps Hospital is now one of
the sites of Memorial Sloan-Kettering Cancer Centre.(31) James Robinson III,
Chairman of the MSKCC board of Overseers and Managers, is also a director of
Bristol-Myers Squibb. Richard Gelb, Vice-Chairman of the MSKCC board, is also
Bristol-Myers Chairman of the Board. Richard Furlaud, another MSKCC board
member, recently retired as Bristol-Myers' president.(32)
The Station
for Experimental Evolution and The Eugenics Records Office was endowed with
funds from the Rockefeller and Harriman families in 1910.(33) Since the 1970s, the
re-named Cold Spring Harbour Laboratories have been home to the world's cutting
edge research programmes on cancer as well as research in neurobiology, plant
genetics, genomics, and bioinformatics. James Watson, co-discoverer of DNA, was
its Director from 1969 to 1994 and it is undertaking work to map the human
genome on behalf of The Human Genome Project.(34) The early research
into eugenics at Cold Spring was mirrored by the Rockefellers' funding of
racial hygiene research in Germany at the Kaiser Wilhelm Institute for
Psychiatry in Munich and The Kaiser Wilhelm Institute for Anthropology,
Eugenics, and Human Heredity in Berlin in the late 1920s.(35)
However, the
roots of this pharmaceutical stranglehold penetrate deep into the American
education system. In 1910, a report was produced by the American Medical
Association that changed the course of medical history. Previously, American
medical education had been unregulated and suffered a bad reputation. Seeing an
opportunity, the Carnegie Foundation offered to produce guidelines and
qualifications for medical schools on behalf of the AMA. The Flexner Report,
named after Abraham Flexner of the Carnegie Foundation, included
recommendations to strengthen courses in pharmacology. Rockefeller and Carnegie
then commenced to pour money into those institutions which conformed to the new
requirements. To date, Rockefeller, Carnegie, Ford, Sloan, Kellogg and other
foundations have showered over a billion dollars on the medical schools of
America. (36)
According to The
Drug Story by Maurice Bealle, an investigation into Rockefeller influence
on medicine, the Rockefeller Foundation was the single largest contributor to
American medical education:
Harvard, with its
well-publicized medical school, has received $8,764,433 of Rockefeller's Drug
Trust money, Yale got $7,927,800, Johns Hopkins $10,418,531, Washington
University in St. Louis $2,842,132, New York's Columbia University $5,424,371,
Cornell University $1,709,072, etc., etc.(37)
The
Rockefellers and their alumni have held key positions directing American public
health, and were directly involved with the establishment of American public
health institutions. In 1938 Jewish German researchers fleeing Hitler were
welcomed at the newly founded National Institutes of Health, built on a private
estate in Bethesda donated by John D. Rockefeller.(38)This is still the home
of the NIH today. Nelson A. Rockefeller was Under Secretary of Department of
Health, Education, and Welfare from June 1953 to January 1955. Prior to this
appointment he was Chairman, Special Committee on Defense Organization from February
to April 1953 and afterwards, Consultant to Secretary of Defense on
Organization of the Department of Defense from January to April 1958. Between
January 1953 and December 1958 he was Chairman of the President's Advisory
Committee on Government Organization. Rockefeller took the HEW job to
reorganize the health department to meet the secrecy requirements of U.S.
biological, chemical, and nuclear weapons programme which required substantial
testing on unwitting American and Canadian citizens, as described in the
section on AIDS below.(39) Laurence S.
Rockefeller was also on the board of the Community Blood Council of Greater NY,
funded by the Sloan Foundation. (40) Rockefeller
University faculty boasts 34 National Academy of Science members and eight of
the New York Academy of Sciences' Council currently work for Rockefeller
connected companies or institutions. (41)
THE
BUSINESS WITH DISEASE
Charges of
genocide against the Drugs Trust are appropriate on three counts: 1) Most
pharmaceuticals do not cure diseases; 2) Pharmaceuticals kill and injure vast
numbers of people; 3) Pharmaceuticals are forced upon the public by governments
and effective alternatives are denied.
Given the
first two charges, it might seem impossible for the third to be accomplished in
a free society. This is how it's done: 1) Laws and regulations controlling
medical treatments, mainly administered by agencies such as the Food and Drug
Administration in the U.S. and The Medicines Control Agency in the U.K. mandate
which treatments are safe, effective, and legal; 2) Professional medical
associations who licence doctors dictate what treatments can be prescribed; 3)
The British and European model of socialized medicine allows the government
health departments to decide health policy and purchase treatment on behalf of
the public which very rarely includes non-drug based treatments; 4) Medical
research bodies controlled by the Drugs Trust and the government, influence the
policies of the previous three. 1, 2, and 3 are the enforcement arm of the
cartel whilst method 4 is the propaganda arm. In this way western public
health-care system is the epitome of fascism: The corporations use government
to enforce a cartel at the expense of the public interest.
Recent
articles in the mainstream media and medical journals have revealed the tip of
the public death-care iceberg. Killing 250,000 patients a year, doctors are the
third leading cause of death in the U.S. according to the Journal of
American Medical Association.(42)
A recent
editorial in The Lancet (Vol. 359, No. 9313; 2002) warned of the
corruption of Western medicine by drug companies. The editors of this most
esteemed scientific journal asked, "Just how tainted has medicine become
[by pharmaceutical industry payoffs]?" They concluded, "Heavily, and
damagingly so," urging "doctors who support this culture for the best
of intentions" to "have the courage to oppose practices that bring
the whole of medicine into disrepute." (43) Up to half the
articles on drugs which appear in mainstream medical journals are written by
ghost writers employed by drug companies not the named authors.(44)
Congressman
Dan Burton has been investigating vaccines for four years as Chairman of the
Dan Burton Committee on Government Reform on The Status of Research into
Vaccine Safety and Autism. He believes that conflicts of interest at the
Centers for Disease Control (CDC) are a problem, particularly on the vaccine
advisory panel:
This
presents a real paradox when the CDC routinely allows scientists with blatant
conflicts of interest to serve on influential advisory committees that make
recommendations on new vaccines, as well as policy matters... All the while
these same scientists have financial ties, academic affiliations, and other
vested interests in the products and companies for which they are supposed to
be providing unbiased oversight.(45)
Dr Matthias
Rath, research colleague of Nobel Laureate Linus Pauling and Director of
Cardiovascular Research at the Linus Pauling Institute in Palo Alto,
California, is a world expert in nutritional medicine.(46) On 14th June 2003, Dr
Rath filed a complaint at the International Criminal Court in The Hague against
the pharmaceutical industry. The charges brought were 'genocide' and other
'crimes against humanity', committed in connection with the pharmaceutical
industry's business with disease:
The accused
willfully and systematically maintain cardiovascular diseases, including high
blood pressure, heart failure, diabetic complications and other diseases,
cancer, infectious diseases including AIDS, osteoporosis and many other of
today's most common diseases that are recognized to be largely preventable by
natural means. The accused have deliberately caused the unnecessary suffering
and premature death of hundreds of millions of people. The accused
systematically and deliberately prevent the eradication of cardiovascular
disease, cancer and other diseases by obstructing and blocking the
dissemination of life-saving information on the health benefits of natural
non-patentable therapies. Thereby, the accused have deliberately caused further
unnecessary suffering and the premature death of hundreds of millions of
people. The accused deliberately and systematically expand existing diseases
and creating new diseases by manufacturing and marketing pharmaceutical drugs
with short-term symptomatic relief but with known and detrimental long-term
side-effects. Thereby the accused have deliberately caused further unnecessary
suffering and premature death of hundreds of millions of people. (47)
In 1996 the
U.N. Codex Alimentarius Commission launched a world-wide initiative to restrict
access to natural medicines. The Codex has been translated into hard law by the
E.U.(48)
In August 2005, The European Food Supplements Directive will become law across
the E.U. including the U.K.. This will remove over 5000 vitamin formulations
from U.K. shops and dramatically cut the dosage of many others. The Herbal
Medicines Directive under consideration by the European Parliament will prevent
any new herbal formulas ever coming onto the market and remove any herbal
product which hasn't had a proven track record in the E.U.. The Pharmaceuticals
Directive seeks to expand the scope of the drug classification. In its current
wording even food or water can be included as a substance which 'restores,
corrects, or modifies physiological functions'.
The banning
of over-the-counter natural medicine will create a two tier planetary health
system as the E.U. laws are imposed in other countries under World Trade
Organization 'harmonization' rules which will include America. Natural
Medicines will be available on prescription only for those that can afford to
pay for private consultations whilst the state-run health-care systems will
continue to prescribe pharmaceuticals to the public. In this way, the elite
will blatantly deny most people access to ground-breaking life-extension herbal
and vitamin formulations that they themselves will continue to enjoy.
Dr Rath
states that 'No sinister dark men stand behind the unethical plans of the
'Codex Alimentarius" commission, but unscrupulous shareholders and
investors of the pharmaceutical industry bank on it'. (49) However, the
controlling stake in the pharmaceutical industry is held by the same tiny cabal
that controls all other major industries. They are committed to planetary
de-population as their policy papers show. It is not, therefore, just about
making money.
A challenge to
the E.U. Food Supplements Directive is currently being mounted in the European
Court of Justice by the Alliance for Natural Health (see http://www.alliance-natural-health.org/).
14.5
CANCER
One in three
Europeans and one in two Americans will get cancer. Ten million people a year
die of cancer worldwide.(50) Despite the trillions
of dollars spent on orthodox research and treatment for cancer, the medical
establishment is no further forward in finding a cure. The reason is, of
course, that the cancer industry is a hugely profitable population control
programme which depends upon patented drugs. World Without Cancer: The Story
of Vitamin B17, by G. Edward Griffin, was first published in 1974.
The foreword to the 1997 edition states that absolutely nothing has changed
since then, except the actors in the plot.
The book details
the astonishing fraud and cover-up of the effectiveness of vitamin B17
(laetrile), not least by the Rockefellers' Memorial Sloan Kettering Cancer
Centre. For five years between 1972 and 1977 the effectiveness of laetrile was
tested by Dr Kanematsu Sugiara at MSKCC. On 13 June 1973, he produced a report
which strongly indicated its anti-cancer properties. This did not please his
employer, who then set about denigrating his findings, saying that no one else
could reproduce them. By 1977, the propaganda war was won. However in November
1997, Ralph Moss,the Assistant Director of Public Affairs who wrote the
propaganda, did an extraordinary thing. He held his own press conference at
which he named the MSKCC officials who had collaborated in the massive laetrile
cover-up. He was fired the next day, but the media soon forgot all about it. (51)
Since the FDA
banned laetrile in 1971, thousands of Americans have traveled to Mexico and
Germany every year to be treated with it. American doctors can have their
licences taken away for prescribing it, or even face imprisonment in California
due to its 'anti-quack' cancer legislation. In the U.K., it is illegal for anyone
other than registered medical practitioners to claim they can cure or treat
cancer.(52)
Unfortunately it is the Rockefeller/I.G. Farben monopoly treatment of cancer which
is quackery: there is no evidence that chemotherapy or radiotherapy increase
life expectancy. In fact both are extremely toxic and often lethal treatments
which themselves destroy the patient's immune system and cause cancer and
death.
Dr. Lorraine
Day is an internationally acclaimed orthopedic trauma surgeon and best selling
author. She spent 15 years on the faculty of the University of California
School of Medicine in San Francisco as Associate Professor and Vice Chairman of
the Department of Orthopedics. She was also Chief of Orthopedic Surgery at San
Francisco General Hospital and is recognized worldwide as an AIDS expert. Ten
years ago, she contracted breast cancer and reached the terminal stage. However
she refused orthodox treatment and devised for herself a ten point plan which
didn't involve drugs or even vitamin supplements. Knowing that cancer is the
consequence of a dysfunctional immune system, poor diet, and lifestyle and
environmental factors, she cured herself by addressing these issues. Dr. Day,
like many thousands of others, is alive and well today by taking matters into
her own hands. She is roundly attacked in the mainstream press for her crusade
against the fraud of the cancer industry and the drug industry in general.
Pictures of her tumor can be seen at www.drday.com.
14.6
VACCINATION: THE WEAPON OF CHOICE
It seems
illogical that self-proclaimed population control advocates would spend
billions of dollars on vaccination programmes trying to save the lives of
millions of people in the Third World. The grim reality is that they are
covertly murdering and sterilizing these poor people under the guise of public
health. Launched in 1999, The Global Alliance for Vaccines and Immunization is
a partnership of the who's who in population control: The Rockefeller
Foundation, the $24 billion Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation, the United
Nations Foundation ( a $1 billion endowment by Ted Turner), The World Bank, The
World Health Organization and Western governments.(53)
The
stated mission of GAVI and the Vaccine Fund, is to ensure that 'all the world's
children have equal access to lifesaving vaccines'. Unfortunately, the more
malnourished a child is the more likely it is to suffer a severe reaction to
immune-suppressing vaccinations, especially when they are given in combination.
Even the American Vaccination Adverse Event Reporting Systems (VAERS) set up in
1990, gives some indication of the carnage caused by vaccines. 90% of all
adverse reactions go un-reported to VAERS and chronic conditions which emerge
months or years later, such as autism, autoimmune diseases, allergies, cancer,
and neurodevelopment disorders, are not officially recognized as consequences
of vaccinations anyway.(54) The report by United
Press International should be read bearing this in mind:
As of the end of
last year, the system contained 244,424 total reports of possible reactions to
vaccines, including 99,145 emergency room visits, 5,149 life-threatening
reactions, 27,925 hospitalizations, 5,775 disabilities, and 5,309 deaths,
according to data compiled by Dr. Mark Geier, a vaccine researcher in Silver
Spring, Md. The data represents roughly 1 billion doses of vaccines, according
to Geier. (55)
An investigative
report by Roman Bystrianyk for www.HealthSentinel.com, shows
that there is little epidemiological evidence for the contribution of vaccines
to the widescale reduction in death rates from infectious diseases.(56) The Vital
Statistics of the United States, published by the Bureau of the Census and
the U.S. Dept. of Health, contain death rates from infectious diseases.
From 1900 to 1963, when the measles vaccine was introduced, death rates from
measles had declined from 13.3 per 100,000 to 0.2 per 100,000 - a 98% decrease.
From 1900 to 1949, death rates from whooping cough declined from 12.2 per
100,000 to 0.5 per 100,000 - a 96% decrease. From 1900 to 1949, death rates
from diphtheria declined from 40.3 per 100,000 to 0.4 per 100,000 - a 99%
decrease.
fig. 1: Death rates from infectious
diseases in the U.S.
Mortality data in
England and Wales provided by the Office of National Statistics in 1997 shows
an identical picture. From 1850 to 1968, when the measles vaccine was
introduced, death rates from measles had declined from a range of 52.11 to 26.6
per 100,000 to 0.11 per 100,000 - a range of 99.6% to 99.8% decrease. From 1860
to 1955, death rates from whooping cough declined from a range of 43.73 to
60.86 per 100,000 to 0.2 per 100,000 - a 99.5% to 99.7% decrease.
Also note that
scarlet fever and typhoid were eliminated in both countries without any
vaccination programme.
Public health
experts have long recognized these facts. Thomas McKeown was Professor of
Social Medicine in the University of Birmingham Medical School between 1950 and
1978. He is still regarded as a major social philosopher of medicine, and known
for his important works on epidemiology and the practice and purpose of
medicine. His conclusion was that infectious diseases were declining well
before widespread vaccination:
The distinguished
epidemiologist Thomas McKeown (1912-1988) maintained that reductions in deaths
associated with infectious diseases (air-, water-, and food-borne diseases)
cannot have been brought about by medical advances, since such diseases were
declining long before effective means were available to combat them.
A paper published in
the premier medical journal, The Lancet, in January1977 by the
Department of Community Medicine, also indicated that vaccinations were not
responsible for the decline in mortality:
Vaccination,
beginning on small scale in some places around 1948 and on a national scale in
1957, did not affect the rate of decline if it be assumed that one attack
usually confers immunity, as in most major communicable diseases of childhood.
… The steady decline of whooping cough between 1930 and 1957 is predictive of a
linear exponential decay characteristic of a general and progressive lessening
in the volume and spread of infection among the susceptible population. With
this pattern well established before 1957, there is no evidence that
vaccination played a major role in the decline in incidence and mortality in
the trend of events
An even a more recent
editorial statement from the Journal of Pediatrics in December 1999 declared
that proper sanitation was largely responsible for the early large declines in
infectious diseases:
...the largest
historical decrease in morbidity and mortality caused by infectious disease was
experienced not with the modern antibiotic and vaccine era, but after the introduction
of clean water and effective sewer systems.
Again, in the
August 2001 edition of the American Journal of Infection Control,
epidemiologists concluded that,
except for the
smallpox vaccination, which was introduced in 1798 and made compulsory in
England in 1853, the overall contribution of medical innovations to the health
revolution of the 1800s is difficult to validate. Diphtheria, tetanus, and
pertussis vaccine arrived on the scene only after disease mortality rates
already had been reduced significantly; measles, rubella, and polio vaccines
did not become available until the middle of the 20th century
IMMUNE
SUPPRESSION
Because
they do not trigger a proper immune response, vaccinations give live viruses
and other live vaccine contaminants a headstart in the body. Normally
microorganisms have to pass through the mucous membranes in the mouth and
gastro-intestinal tract which are lined with Immunoglobulin A. Interaction with
IgA triggers a cellular immune response which precedes the antibody/humoral
response. Injected microorganisms bypass the mucousal /cellular immune system
and directly trigger the antibody-producing plasma cells in the bone marrow.
This is why vaccine manufactures add immune system stimulating 'adjuvants' such
as aluminium, lipopolysacchride and squalene. Live microorganisms also take
advantage of significant immune suppression caused by the vaccination itself.
Research found that 20% of measles vaccines recipients have chronic measles
infections in their brains later in life indicating that live virus vaccines
create greater risk of developing the disease.(57) In the New England
Journal of Medicine of July 1994, a study found that over 80% of children
under 5 years of age who had contracted whooping cough had been fully
vaccinated against it. (58)
Dr. Archie
Kalokerinos is a Life Fellow of the Royal Society for Health, a Fellow of the
International Academy of Preventive Medicine, Fellow of the Australasian
College of Biomedical Scientists, Fellow of the Hong Kong Medical Technology
Association, and a Member of the New York Academy of Sciences. In 1978 he was
awarded the A.M.M.(Australian Medal of Merit) for 'outstanding scientific
research'. On the subject of vaccines he comments:
My final
conclusion after forty years or more in this business [medicine] is that the
unofficial policy of the World Health Organization and the unoffical policy of
the 'Save the Children's Fund' and... [other vaccine promoting] organizations
is one of murder and genocide... I cannot see any other possible explanation...
You cannot immunize sick children, malnourished children, and expect to get
away with it. You'll kill far more children than would have died from natural
infection."It was similar with the measles vaccination. They went through
Africa, South America and elsewhere, and vaccinated sick and starving children...
They thought they were wiping out measles, but most of those susceptible to
measles died from some other disease that they developed as a result of being
vaccinated. The vaccination reduced their immune levels and acted like an
infection. Many got septicaemia, gastro-enteritis, etc, or made their
nutritional status worse and they died from malnutrition. So there were very
few susceptible infants left alive to get measles. It's one way to get good
statistics, kill all those that are susceptible, which is what they literally
did."(59)
American
children receive up to forty vaccinations before the age of two. Dr. H.H.
Fudenberg, world-renowned immunologist with hundreds of publications to his
credit, made the following comments:
One vaccine decreases
cell-mediated immunity by 50%, two vaccines by 70%…all triple vaccines (MMR,
DTaP) markedly impair cell-mediated immunity, which predisposes to recurrent
viral infections.(60)
Like HIV, the
measles virus is particularly immune suppressing hence the danger of the live
virus measles vaccine. In 2001, GAVI launched an initiative to vaccinate all
200 million children in sub-Saharan Africa against measles, despite the fact
that HIV infection is rampant there.(61)
VACCINE
CONTAMINANTS
As well as
the dangerous assault on fragile immune systems by the vaccine's active
ingredients, there are live contaminants in vaccines. Microorganism
contamination, is a relatively common finding in many commercial vaccines. One
study in the journal Vaccine in 1986, found that ~6% of commercial
vaccines tested were contaminated with a tiny bacteria called mycoplasma. Most
U.S.military personnel deployed to the Gulf in 1990 received up to 30
vaccinations in a two to three day period, some probably experimental and
administered without proper informed consent. Recent studies by the Institute
of Molecular Medicine found that ~40% of veterans with Gulf War Illness were
infected with mycoplasma fermentans.(62)100% of Gulf War
Illness patients who developed the motor neuron disease, amyotrophic lateral
sclerosis, tested positive for systemic mycoplasma infection.(63)
The polio vaccine
administered to thirty million Americans during the late fifties and early
sixties was contaminated with the monkey virus SV40. This is believed to
be responsible for an epidemic of cancers.(64) When SV40 was
discovered in rhesus monkey kidney cells during the early 1960s, the
manufacturers switched rapidly to cells from African green monkeys. However Dr
John Martin, an FDA scientist discovered in 1972 that these cells were also
contaminated, this time with a cytomegalovirus. To date his requests to have
the vaccine properly tested have gone unanswered by the FDA because the
manufacturers can hide behind 'proprietary interests'. Dr Martin now works as
an independent researcher studying the role of this 'stealth' virus in whole
range of chronic debilitating illnesses. (65)
VACCINES
FOR STERILIZATION
The World Health Organization has a twenty year history of developing contraceptive vaccines. These work by creating immunity to the body's own fertility hormone, human chorionic gonadotrophin (HcG).